,transcriber's ,note3 ,bold text is surrounded by equal signs and italic text is surrounded by underscores4 ,a ,,companion ,,volume ,,to ,the ,american ,girl's ,handy ,book4 ,illustration3 ,what to do and ,how to do it ,,the ,,american ,,boys ,,handy ,,book4 ,,by ,d4,c4 ,beard4 ,new-,york ,charles ,scribner's ,sons4 ,,new ,,edition4 #a ,vol4 ,cloth4 ,price1 #b4jj4 ,,with ,,numerous ,,illustrations ,,from ,,drawings ,,by ,,the ,,author4 ,how to ,amuse ,yourself and ,others ,,the ,,american ,,girls ,,handy ,,book4 ,,by ,lina ,beard and ,adelia ,b4 ,beard ,,new ,,york ,charles ,scribner's ,sons #ahic ,,copyright ,,by ,,charles ,,scribner',s ,,sons #ahhg ,,preface4 8,i ,,do wish some one would write a book like that for girls10 is the remark we have frequently heard when a new book of sports for boys has made its appearance2 but it was not until the publication of the 8,american ,boy's ,handy ,book0 that it occurred to us to write a book for the ,american boy's neglected sisters1 which should be equally original and practical4 ,in the 8,girl's ,handy ,book10 which it has been our endeavor to make peculiarly ,american1 we have sought to introduce original and novel ideas1 and by their aid to open new avenues of enterprise and enjoyment4 ,one of our objects is to impress upon the minds of the girls the fact that they all possess talent and ability to achieve more than they suppose possible1 and we would encourage a belief in the truth of the remark said to have been made by a famous ,frenchman3 8,when you ,americans undertake anything you never stop to ascertain if it be possible1 you simply do it40 ,we desire also to help awaken the inventive faculty1 usually uncultivated in girls1 and1 by giving detailed methods of new work and amusements1 to put them on the road which they can travel and explore alone4 ,we know well the feeling of hopelessness which accompanies vague directions1 and1 to make our explanations plain and lucid1 we have ourselves1 with very few exceptions1 made all of the articles1 played the games1 and solved the problems described4 ,the materials employed in the construction of the various articles are within easy reach of all1 and the outlay1 in most cases1 little or nothing4 ,we scarcely deem it necessary to point out the fact that in supplying healthy1 sensible work and amusement for leisure hours1 employment is given whose whole tendency is to refine the tastes and ambitions of our ,american girls4 ,a few of our chapters are taken from articles which were written by us for1 and published by1 the ,youth's ,companion1 ,st4 ,nicholas1 ,harper's ,young ,people1 ,golden ,days1 and ,wide ,awake4 ,,contents4 ,,page ,,preface iii ,,spring ,,chapter ,i4 ,,first ,,of ,,april #c ,first of ,april ,party1 #e2 ,mirror ,tableau1 #f2 ,noah's ,ark ,peep-show1 #h2 ,the ,supper1 #aj4 ,,chapter ,,ii4 ,,wild ,,flowers ,,and ,,their ,,preservation #ac ,transplanting ,wild ,flowers1 #ad2 ,cut ,wild ,flowers1 #ae2 ,sending ,flowers by ,mail1 #ae2 ,preserved ,flowers1 #af2 ,pressed ,flowers and ,leaves1 #ah2 ,leaves and ,ferns for ,decoration1 #ai2 ,color of ,flowers ,changed1 #ai3 ,natural ,wax ,flowers1 #bj2 ,to ,freshen ,cut ,flowers1 #bj2 ,crystallized ,flowers1 #ba2 ,how to ,preserve the ,perfume of ,flowers1 #ba2 ,spring ,flowers in ,winter1 #bc2 ,the ,four-leaved ,clover1 #bc2 ,several ,methods of ,preserving ,flowers1 #bd4 ,,chapter ,,iii4 ,,the ,,walking ,,club #bg ,rules to be ,observed1 #ca4 ,,chapter ,,iv4 ,,easter #cc ,easter ,customs in ,other ,lands1 #cc2 ,easter ,egg ,games1 #cf2 ,easter ,egg ,dolls1 #ci2 ,humpty ,dumpty1 #db2 ,miss ,rolly-poly1 #de2 ,mandolin1 #dg2 ,maple-wax ,easter ,eggs1 #di2 ,bonbon ,box1 #di2 ,easter ,cards1 #ej2 ,little ,quakeress1 #eb4 ,,chapter ,v4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,lawn-,,tennis ,,net #ee ,rules for ,lawn-,tennis1 #fc4 ,,chapter ,,vi4 ,,may-,,day #ga ,may-day ,sports1 #gb2 ,how to ,make ,may-baskets1 #gd2 ,may-day ,combat1 #ge2 ,the ,may-pole1 #gg2 ,may-pole ,dance1 #gi4 ,,summer4 ,,chapter ,,vii4 ,,midsummer ,,eve #hc ,the ,new ,fern-leaf ,game1 #he2 ,fortune-telling3 ,the ,plaintain ,test1 #hf2 ,fortune's ,wheel1 #hh4 ,,chapter ,,viii4 ,,sea-,,side ,,cottage ,,decoration #ia ,window ,decorations1 #ib2 ,row-boat ,book-shelves1 #ie2 ,crab-net ,work-basket1 #if2 ,hat-rack1 #ih2 ,marine ,screen1 #ii2 ,horseshoe-crab ,bag1 #ajb2 ,sea-urchin ,vase and ,candlestick1 #ajb2 ,how to ,dry ,starfish and to ,polish ,shells1 #ajd4 ,,chapter ,,ix4 ,a ,,girl',s ,,fourth ,,of ,,july #aje ,interior ,decoration1 #ajg2 ,in-door ,illumination1 #ajh2 ,out-of-door ,decoration1 #aji2 ,fireworks1 #aaa2 ,parachute1 #aab2 ,thunderbolts1 #aab2 ,whirls1 and ,winged ,fancies1 #aac2 ,pin-wheels1 #aad2 ,bombs1 #aae2 ,declaration of ,independence1 #aag2 ,toss1 #aah2 ,fourth of ,july ,jackstraws1 #aai2 ,progressive ,mining1 #aai4 ,,chapter ,x4 ,,printing ,,from ,,nature',s ,,types #abc ,impression ,album1 #abc2 ,winter ,landscape1 #abg4 ,,chapter ,,xi4 ,,picnics1 ,,burgoos1 ,,and ,,corn-,,roasts #aca ,a ,burgoo1 #acb2 ,burgoo ,stew1 #acc2 ,a ,corn-roast1 #acd4 ,,chapter ,,xii4 ,,botany ,,as ,,applied ,,to ,,art #aci ,the ,peony ,leaf1 #adj2 ,a ,bunch of ,turnips1 #adb2 ,plant ,cross-section ,designs1 #add2 ,flower ,sprays1 #adf2 ,changing the ,color1 #adf2 ,burs1 #adg2 ,the ,water-,lily1 #adh4 ,,chapter ,,xiii4 ,,door-,,step ,,party ,,and ,,quiet ,,games ,,for ,,hot ,,weather #aea ,five ,minutes' ,conversation1 #aec2 ,blind ,man's ,singing-school1 #aee2 ,a ,game of ,noted ,men1 #aee2 ,what ,will you ,take to the ,picnic8 #aef2 ,assumed ,characters1 #aeg2 ,shadow ,verbs1 #aeg4 ,,chapter ,,xiv4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,hammock #aei ,materials1 #afa2 ,barrel ,hammock1 #afe4 ,,chapter ,,xv4 7,for ,little ,girls47 ,,corn-,,husk ,,and ,,flower ,,dolls #afi ,,chapter ,,xvi4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,fan #agg ,butterfly ,fan1 #agh2 ,mikado ,fan1 #ahj2 ,daisy ,fan1 #ahb2 ,cardboard ,fan1 #ahc4 ,,autumn4 ,,chapter ,,xvii4 ,,all-,,hallow-,,eve #ahg ,halloween ,parties1 #ahi2 ,melted ,lead1 #aij2 ,nutshell ,boats1 #aib2 8,three ,luggies10 #aic2 ,roasting ,nuts1 #aic2 ,kaling1 #aid2 ,the ,magic ,mirror1 #aid2 ,three ,tin ,cups1 #aie2 ,the ,ring ,cake1 #aie2 ,bobbing for ,apples1 #aif2 ,the ,ghostly ,fire1 #aig2 ,the ,fairy's ,gifts1 #aih4 ,,chapter ,,xviii4 ,,nature',s ,,fall ,,decorations ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,use ,,them #bja ,fresh ,autumn ,wild ,flowers1 #bjb2 ,buckeye ,portire1 #bjd2 ,panel of ,fall ,decorations1 #bje2 ,louis ,quinze ,screen1 #bjf2 ,a ,panel of ,field ,corn1 #bji2 ,ornamental ,gourds1 #baj2 ,gourd-,dippers and ,bowls1 #baa2 ,vases1 #bab2 ,small ,decorations1 #bad2 ,brackets1 #bad4 ,,chapter ,,xix4 ,,nutting-,,parties #bag 8,little ,brown ,squirrel10 #bah2 ,rules for ,nutting-,parties1 #bba4 ,,chapter ,,xx4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,telephone #bbd ,,chapter ,,xxi4 ,,how ,,to ,,draw #bbi ,,chapter ,,xxii4 ,,how ,,to ,,paint ,,in ,,water-,,colors #bch ,materials for ,water-,color ,painting1 #bch2 ,flowers1 #bci2 ,landscapes1 #bda2 ,painting from ,notes1 #bdd4 ,,chapter ,,xxiii4 ,,how ,,to ,,paint ,,in ,,oil-,,colors #bdi ,materials1 #bdi2 ,mediums1 #bea2 ,canvas1 #bea2 ,the ,light1 #beb2 ,setting the ,palette1 #bec4 ,,chapter ,,xxiv4 ,,how ,,to ,,model ,,in ,,clay ,,and ,,wax #beg ,materials1 #bei2 ,how to ,manage ,clay1 #bfj2 ,hints for ,modelling a ,head1 #bfb2 ,how to ,model in ,wax1 #bfc2 ,modelling-wax1 #bfc4 ,,chapter ,,xxv4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,plaster ,,casts #bfg ,,chapter ,,xxvi4 ,,china ,,painting #bgb ,list of ,materials1 #bgb2 ,a ,monochrome ,painting1 #bgh2 ,tinting1 #bgh2 ,new ,method of ,decorating ,china1 #bgi2 ,tracing1 #bhj2 ,mottled ,grounds1 #bha2 ,snow ,landscape1 #bha2 ,how to ,paint a ,head on ,china1 #bhd2 ,how to ,paint a ,carp1 ,sea-weed1 and ,fish-net1 on ,china1 #bhg2 ,foliage on ,china made with a ,sponge1 #bhi2 ,mixing ,colors1 #bhi2 ,royal ,worcester ,ware1 #bij4 ,,chapter ,,xxvii4 ,a ,,chapter ,,on ,,frames #bie ,marine ,picture ,frame1 #bif2 ,decorated ,frame1 #big2 ,frame ,covered with ,tin-foil1 #bih2 ,cork ,frame1 #bii4 ,,chapter ,,xxviii4 ,,thanksgiving #cjb ,impromptu ,burlesque ,tableaux1 #cjd2 ,landing of the ,pilgrims1 #cje2 ,first ,harvest1 #cjg2 ,devastation by the ,indians1 #cjh2 ,the ,revolution1 #cji2 ,slavery1 #caj2 ,rebellion1 #caj2 ,peace and ,plenty1 #caj2 ,the ,game of the ,headless ,turkey1 #cab2 ,a ,suggestion1 #cac4 ,,winter4 ,,chapter ,,xxix4 ,,christmas ,,festivities ,,and ,,home-,,made ,,christmas ,,gifts #cag ,julklapp1 #cai2 ,polish ,custom1 #cbj2 ,the ,bran ,pie1 #cba2 ,the ,blind ,man's ,stocking1 #cba2 ,home-made ,christmas ,gifts1 #cbb4 ,,chapter ,,xxx4 ,,amusements ,,and ,,games ,,for ,,the ,,christmas ,,holidays #ccd ,new ,game of ,bubble ,bowling1 #cce2 ,biographical ,nonsense1 #cci2 ,comic ,historic ,tableaux1 #cda2 ,living ,christmas ,cards1 #cdb4 ,,chapter ,,xxxi4 ,,new ,,year',s ,,and ,a ,,leap ,,year ,,party #cdg ,pantomime of an ,enchanted ,girl1 #cdh4 ,,chapter ,,xxxii4 ,,home ,,gymnasium #cec ,course of ,exercises1 #cef4 ,,chapter ,,xxxiii4 ,a ,,decorative ,,language #cfd ,the ,field and the ,points of ,heraldry1 #cff2 ,divisions1 #cfg2 ,colors1 #cfi2 ,how to ,make a ,design in ,decorative ,language1 #cga2 ,book-plates1 #cgg2 ,floral ,vocabulary1 #cgg4 ,,chapter ,,xxxiv4 ,a ,,few ,,items ,,on ,,old-,,fashioned ,,needlework1 ,,with ,,some ,,new ,,and ,,original ,,patterns #chj ,plain ,sewing1 #chj2 ,button-holes1 #chc2 ,how to ,patch1 to ,sew on a ,button1 and to ,mend a ,kid ,glove1 #chf2 ,fancy ,stitches1 #chg2 ,drawn ,work1 #chi2 ,applique and ,original ,designs for ,portires1 #cia2 ,lace1 #cic2 ,ribbon ,embroideries1 #cic4 ,,chapter ,,xxxv4 ,,scrap-,,book ,,and ,,home-,,made ,,book-,,covers #cie ,mother ,goose ,scrap-book1 #cie2 ,transformation ,scrap-book1 #cih2 ,an ,album1 #djj2 ,home-made ,book-cover1 #dja4 ,,chapter ,,xxxvi4 ,a ,,heap ,,of ,,rubbish ,,and ,,what ,,to ,,do ,,with ,,it #djc ,the ,mirror1 #djd2 ,the ,table1 #djf2 ,lantern1 #djh2 ,a ,music ,roll1 #daj2 ,work-basket1 #daa2 ,key and ,button-hook ,rack and ,paper ,weight1 #dab4 ,,chapter ,,xxxvii4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,attractive ,,booths ,,at ,a ,,fair--,a ,,new ,,kind ,,of ,,grab-,,bag #dac ,the ,tables1 #dac2 ,flowers for ,decorations1 #dag2 ,the ,months1 #dbj2 ,the ,five ,senses1 #dba2 ,walls1 #dbc2 ,grab-bags1 #dbc2 ,the ,lady of the ,lake1 #dbe2 ,fortune's ,wheel1 #dbf2 ,rag-balls1 #dbg4 ,,chapter ,,xxxviii4 ,,window ,,decoration #dbi ,oriental ,window-shade1 #dcj2 ,ribbon-curtain1 #dcj2 ,drapery of ,very ,small ,scraps1 #dca2 ,painting ,window-panes1 #dcb2 ,painting on ,lawn1 #dcd2 ,to ,imitate ,stained ,glass1 #dce2 ,windows of ,imitation ,ground ,glass1 #dcf4 ,,chapter ,,xxxix4 ,,furniture1 ,,old ,,and ,,new #dch ,the ,bookcase1 #dci2 ,the ,chair1 #dda2 ,the ,bedstead1 #ddd2 ,a ,dressing-table1 #ddd2 ,washstand1 #ddf2 ,a ,hall ,seat1 #ddg2 ,window ,seat and ,book-shelves1 combined1 #ddh4 ,,chapter ,,xl4 ,,something ,,about ,,mantle-,,pieces ,,and ,,fire-,,places #dea ,,chapter ,,xli4 ,,home-,,made ,,candy #deh ,peanut ,candy1 ,butter ,scotch and ,molasses ,candy1 #dei2 ,walnut and ,fruit ,glac1 #dfj2 ,marsh-mallow ,paste1 #dfj2 ,chocolate ,caramels1 #dfa2 ,pop-corn ,balls1 #dfb4 ,,chapter ,,xlii4 ,,saint ,,valentine',s ,,day #dfd ,valentine ,party1 #dfe4 ,illustration3 ,,spring ,illustration ,the ,american ,girl's ,handy ,book4 ,,chapter ,i4 ,,first ,,of ,,april4 ,,this is the children's own day1 and no assumption of dignity on the part of their elders can deter them from exercising the privileges granted to them by acknowledged custom and precedent4 8,april fool6 ,april fool60 cries my little nephew1 as he dances with delight to see his aunt walk out of the room with a piece of white paper dangling from a hooked pin1 attached to her dress4 8,april fool6 ,april fool60 shout the children in the street1 thus announcing the success of some practical joke4 8,april fool60 laughs everyone at the table1 when some unfortunate bites into a brown1 wholesome-looking cruller1 only to find it a delusion and a snare1 the coat of a cruller1 but the inside of cotton4 8,april fool6 ,april fool60 is what even the little sparrows seem to chirp1 as with a 8s-w-h-e-r-r0 they sweep down from the tree and1 frightening away the kitten1 take forcible possession of her bone4 ,what does all this mean8 ,why is the first day of ,april called 8,all-,fools-,day10 and when or where did the custom of the day originate8 ,who can tell8 ,no one seems to know4 ,even the derivation of the word ,april does not appear to have been definitely settled1 and this saucy month1 with her mischievous tricks and pranks1 her surprises and mysteries1 fools and puzzles our wisest men4 ,through many centuries the observance of ,all-,fools-,day has descended to us4 ,in many climes and many countries this day is chosen as the proper time for playing tricks on the unsuspecting4 8,festum ,fatuorum10 or 8,fools' ,holiday10 is what it was called in ,england at the time of the arrival of the early ,christians in that country4 ,easily caught like the mackerel1 which are plentiful on the ,french coast in ,april and are said to be deficient in understanding1 the ,april fool in ,france derives his name from that fish1 and is called 8,poisson d',avril0 or 8,april ,fish10 and again1 8,silly ,mackerel40 ,from the cuckoo1 a bird that does not know enough to build its own nest1 the appellation of 8gowk0 is taken1 and is given to the foolish one in ,scotland who allows himself to be duped on this day4 ,in ,india at the festival called ,huli ,festival held on the last day of ,march1 the natives make merry at the expense of their friends1 just as we do1 and their fool is called 8,huli ,fool40 ,so in the ,east and in the ,west1 in the ,north and in the ,south1 in the oldest nation as well as the youngest1 is this ridiculous custom observed1 and1 as if to make it still more ridiculous1 no one apparently knows why4 ,now1 girls1 since this holiday has descended to us from so far back that its origin appears lost in the dim twilight of past ages1 there surely must be some reason for its existence1 and that reason may be1 that 8a little nonsense now and then is relished by the wisest men10 and is therefore wholesome as an occasional diet4 ,so why not help to perpetuate it2 not with rude1 practical jokes1 but with comical surprises1 and absurd1 but unembarrassing1 situations4 ,much harmless fun can be derived from the privileges of this day1 devoted as it is to nonsense1 and we introduce the ,april ,fool ,party as an excellent means of concentrating the fun1 and furnishing plenty of merriment to the young folks who are bent on having a good time4 ,first of ,april ,party4 ,i remember1 when quite a little girl1 ,i was granted the privilege of celebrating my birthday1 which came on the #ast of ,april1 with a candy-pull1 and a few days previous to the event ,i started joyfully off to invite my friends4 ,the invitations were laughingly given and accepted1 and it did not occur to me that ,i would be suspected of playing a joke1 although the party was to be on ,april-,fools-,day4 ,it seems1 however1 that my good intentions were doubted1 and the children were undecided whether to come or not4 ,i had begun to suspect that a joke was to be played on me by their all remaining away1 before they finally arrived in a body1 having taken the precaution of coming in that way1 so that if the party were a hoax they would all be fooled together4 ,i relate this incident that warning may be taken from my experience1 and that it may be understood how important it is to make the guests invited to your ,first of ,april party realize that the invitations are given in good faith1 and that your friends are expected to be on hand at the appointed time4 ,it is well1 in giving a party of this kind1 to have the whole programme laid out beforehand1 so that everything may go smoothly and nothing be forgotten4 ,the few methods of ,april fooling given here need not constitute the whole entertainment2 the list may be added to by the young hostess1 who will1 no doubt1 have many ideas of her own to carry out4 ,we will head our list with the ,mirror ,tableau4 ,this novel tableau is made ready in the following manner3 ,in a door-way1 or bay-window draped with full curtains1 place a large mirror4 ,instead of having the curtains suspended from the usual pole1 it is best to stretch a wire across the space and slip the curtain-rings upon that1 as they will slide more readily on the wire2 and when it is time to draw back the drapery it should be done quickly4 ,a table placed before the curtains will serve as a barricade1 keeping the too curious from taking a peep at the hidden mysteries before they are ready to be revealed4 ,at the time selected1 remove the table1 and request all those desiring to see the tableau to arrange themselves in front of the curtain1 and to remain perfectly quiet1 as any movement will disturb those taking part4 ,if the front rows of the audience can be induced to kneel or sit upon the floor1 those in the rear can obtain a better view1 and it will1 at the same time1 make the group more effective4 ,when perfect quiet is obtained1 give the signal to your assistant1 who must stand opposite to you at the side of the curtain1 and with her help quickly draw aside the draperies1 thus disclosing the tableau of a group of young people1 motionless1 gazing into the mirror with eager and expectant eyes4 ,for an instant the audience will be held spell-bound1 scarcely realizing that they themselves are forming the pretty tableau4 8,we are ,april ,fools10 written with soap on the mirror near the top1 as shown in the illustration1 tells what character the actors are assuming1 and gives a name to the tableau4 ,illustration3 ,the ,mirror ,tableau4 ,during the interval which should be allowed to intervene before introducing the next thing on the programme1 the guests will find amusement in the many harmless practical jokes which are awaiting the unwary in all manner of places4 ,for instance1 some boy will print ,,april ,,fool in large white letters on his own back1 by simply resting for a moment in a convenient chair upon whose snowy tidy the dreaded words have previously been printed backwards with white chalk4 ,on the dark woolly surface of the coat1 the white letters will be perfectly transferred1 and the boy1 little knowing what he has done1 or the cause of the merriment1 will join in the general laughter his appearance creates4 ,a treacherous divan can be provided by removing the top of a low1 flat packing-box1 and putting in its place brown wrapping-paper1 tacking it down around the edges of the box4 ,with a piece of drapery thrown over it1 entirely concealing the box1 and sofa pillows placed upon it1 leaning against the wall1 the divan looks exceedingly comfortable and inviting4 ,but woe unto the person who mistakes appearances for reality1 for to attempt to sit upon this seeming substantial couch is but to break through and sit upon the floor instead4 ,the box used for the divan should not be more than twelve inches high1 so that the fall will be only funny1 not dangerous4 ,the next diversion may be a ,noah's ,ark ,peep-show4 ,make the peep-show of a box about two and a half feet long and one foot and a half high4 ,remove the top and both of the end-pieces 7,fig4 #a74 ,cut from pasteboard a slide to exactly fit the box1 and place it in the middle1 thus cutting off the view from either end1 as shown in ,fig4 #a4 ,make a curtain in two pieces1 and tack them around the upper edge of the box1 letting them meet at each end4 ,stout pieces of twine1 stretched across the openings at the ends of the box1 will serve to attach the drapery at these points4 ,illustration3 ,noah's ,ark ,peep-show4 ,almost any kind of material will answer for this purpose1 provided it is not too thin and is of some bright hue1 for the peep-show should be made to look as gay as possible4 ,place the box upon a high stand1 and so arrange it that a strong light will shine down into it1 making the interior1 from end to end1 perfectly light4 ,from a list1 previously prepared1 of the animals supposed to be on exhibition1 read the first two1 and invite two persons1 a girl and a boy1 for instance1 to look into the peep-show4 ,we will suppose that the first animals on the list are the raven and the dove4 ,inform your would-be audience that you have two of ,noah's special pets to show them2 that from the girls' point of view will be seen a raven1 and from the boys'1 a dove4 ,when taking their places at the box1 one at each end1 the two spectators must part the curtain1 and1 putting their faces between1 hold the drapery together under their chins4 ,this is to keep the remainder of the company from obtaining a glimpse into the wonderful show before their turns arrive4 ,when all is ready1 and the two wondering faces are hidden between the folds of the peep-show curtains1 with the words1 8,behold the pretty dove1 and the mischievous raven10 remove the slide1 and expose to the astonished gaze of each spectator a companion's familiar face at the opposite end of the box4 ,of course1 upon retiring from the show1 its secret must be kept1 otherwise the joke will be spoiled for those whose turns are yet to come4 ,before the next two take their station at the box1 replace the slide and pretend to rearrange the show1 to divert the suspicion that the box is empty4 ,the ,supper can be made the means of perpetrating many practical jokes4 ,the shams must be so intermingled with the real delicacies that one can never be sure what the consequences may be of partaking too rashly of even the most tempting-looking morsel4 ,small blocks of wood covered with batter and browned in the oven are excellent imitations of cakes4 ,dainty confectionery1 in crimped papers1 can be made of small radishes covered with icing of different colors4 ,button-moulds coated with chocolate will readily be mistaken for candy4 ,if a small pasteboard pill-box is first filled with flour1 and the top then covered with tissue-paper pasted down around the edges1 it will look1 when iced1 like a delicate little cake1 and will cause much merriment when anyone bites into it2 for the moment the paper cover is broken the flour will fly in every direction4 ,the fertile brain of girls1 on mischief bent1 will suggest many more frauds of this kind1 and enough surprises may be prepared to make the supper as merry as anything else on the evening's programme4 ,before leaving this subject1 once more let the caution be given to keep the jokes entirely harmless4 ,it is only poor fun that can be obtained at the expense of injuring others1 or by running the slightest risk of hurting them in any way4 ,the spirit of mischief must be kept within bounds even on ,all-,fools-,day4 ,illustration3 ,,april ,,fool ,illustration3 ,gathering ,wild ,flowers4 ,,chapter ,,ii4 ,,wild ,,flowers ,,and ,,their ,,preservation4 ,,long before the first green leaves make their appearance1 while the snows of winter still linger in the shaded nooks1 and the branches are still bare1 though blushing with the full1 flowing sap that tinges their tips pink1 yellow1 and red--when the air is filled with a sweet freshness and delicate fragrance--it is charming in our rambles to find scattered here and there upon the hill-side1 down among the roots of the great trees1 or under the hedges delicate little wild flowers waving on their fragile stalks with the faintest passing breeze4 ,they are so exquisitely beautiful with their tender hues and graceful shapes1 that a longing comes to possess them4 ,and why not keep them fresh at home8 ,plants live in the earth and require light1 air1 and moisture4 ,all of these requirements can be and are fulfilled in thousands of homes where plants are kept1 all over the world4 ,but these are wild flowers4 ,true1 and they may need something to be found only in the wild woods4 ,what1 then1 is it8 ,let us see4 ,earth1 light1 and air abound everywhere4 ,still1 upon inspection we discover that the soil around our timid wild flowers is somewhat different from that to be found in our door-yards4 ,but what is simpler than to take the earth up with the plant8 ,be careful in ,transplanting ,wild ,flowers to dig well all around and under the roots1 so that the earth surrounding and clinging to the plant may be taken up at the same time 7,fig4 #b74 ,after covering the root and soil adhering to it with a layer of clay1 mud1 or damp earth 7,fig4 #c7 set the root in a large leaf1 and tie it up with string or a wisp of grass 7,fig #d71 in order to make sure the soil does not fall off the plant4 ,thus secured the specimens will keep nicely until you reach home2 then plant them in a shady place and keep the ground moist4 ,beautiful little woodland gardens are made in this way1 where within a few steps of the door a glimpse may be had of the fair forest flowers4 ,illustration ,sweet-scented white violets1 delicate little anemones1 odd yellow violets1 and quaint jack-in-the-pulpits1 with many others1 not forgetting the graceful ferns1 are now growing in the shaded corner of the writer's lawn1 transplanted there from their home in the woods1 where she found them one lovely spring morning1 when out with a party of friends on a hunt for wild flowers4 ,the day was perfect1 filled with sunshine and the song of birds4 ,all nature appeared glad and joyous1 and the trees seemed veiled in the softest greens and pinks of budding leaves4 ,it was a happy party that went wandering into the forest1 straying here and there1 and finding new treasures at nearly every step1 stopping to gather a few of the violets that gave a purple tinge to the ground for yards around1 then rambling on to the spot that was covered with the fragile anemone1 each girl laden with the flowers she loved best4 ,some had taken them up roots and all1 while others preferred the ,cut ,wild ,flowers4 ,for these it is best to use a tin box of convenient size and form shutting closely4 ,the flowers must be fresh and not at all damp2 in such a box they can be kept for days bright and unfading4 ,they may also safely be sent to friends at a distance1 though it is better1 when ,sending ,flowers by ,mail1 if you wish to send a quantity1 to pack them in a strong pad or wooden box4 ,first lay down a piece of oiled paper of the proper size2 spread a thin layer of damp paper on this2 next a layer of flowers1 then one of thin wet paper2 and so on until the box is full4 ,over the last layer place a dry paper1 and cover this with oiled paper or tin-foil2 put the lid on the box and tie it down securely4 ,by this method a larger number of flowers can be sent in a given space than when simply inclosed in a tin box4 ,the writer has often sent daisies from ,new ,york to ,cincinnati where they arrived as fresh as when first gathered4 ,for the benefit of those who wish directions for sending flowers by mail1 we give the following on authority of the ,american ,agriculturist4 8,the law passed some years since by ,congress1 allowing packages of plants to be sent by mail1 if not over four pounds in weight1 was a capital arrangement for those who lived at a distance from railroad and express offices1 but it is so hampered with the various constructions given by the ,post ,office ,department1 that it is difficult to know what is required by the officials4 ,the law now is1 we believe1 as follows3 ,a package1 weighing four pounds or less1 can be sent at the rate of two cents per four ounces1 but the writing of the words 8roots0 or 8plants0 makes a letter of it1 and is charged letter postage4 ,nothing should be written except the address1 and the package must not be sealed1 or contain any writing1 and it must be so fastened that the postmaster can examine the contents if he wishes4 ,the plants may1 however1 be numbered1 and their names sent by letter40 ,now let us think of some way in which these lovely blossoms can be preserved4 ,in ,germany they excel in making decorations for rooms1 dinner-tables1 etc41 of ,preserved ,flowers4 ,bright-colored flowers are best adapted to this method4 ,white flowers are apt to turn yellow4 ,jack-in-the-pulpits1 clover1 roses1 and daisies came out beautifully when the writer dried them1 and why should not many other kinds do just as well8 ,try and see4 ,procure three or four quarts of fine sand2 white scouring-sand is the best2 wash it perfectly clean4 ,this can be tested by pouring the water off until it looks quite clear2 then dry the sand1 by placing it in a clean tin in the oven4 ,when it is dry--fully dry and cool--pour enough in a box to enable the flowers to stand by themselves1 their stems embedded in the sand1 which should be a mass of fine particles of uniform size4 ,illustration3 ,preserved ,flowers4 ,if the flowers are cut so that they all measure nearly the same length from the tip of the blossom to the end of the stem1 they can more readily be covered with sand4 ,the flowers must be fresh and entirely free from moisture4 ,place them stem downward in the sandy layer1 and very gently and slowly pour in the sand a little at a time1 until each leaf and petal is firmly held in place 7,fig4 #e72 then fill the box with sand nearly two inches above the level of the flowers4 ,it is very essential that every particle of the flower rest in the sand1 and that in filling up1 the smallest petal has not been bent or crumpled4 ,take care not to shake the box lest the flowers inside be injured4 ,set it in a warm1 dry place1 and let it stand at least two weeks4 ,this manner of preserving flowers retains the color1 while the shape of the leaves and petals remains unaltered4 ,the flowers will keep for years4 ,there are other ways also of preserving flowers4 ,pressed ,flowers and ,leaves4 ,although these are perfectly flat1 they seldom fade and are very pretty and useful4 ,have ready a large book or a quantity of old newspapers and several weights4 ,use the newspapers for leaves and ferns--blotting-paper is best for the flowers4 ,both the flowers and leaves should be fresh and without moisture4 ,place them as nearly in their natural positions as possible in the book or papers1 and press1 allowing several thicknesses of paper between each layer4 ,remove the specimens to dry papers each day until perfectly dry4 ,some flowers must be immersed--all but the flower head--in boiling water for a few minutes1 before pressing1 to prevent them from turning black4 ,orchids are of this nature4 ,if possible1 it is well to obtain all parts of a plant1 the roots as well as the seeds1 for a more interesting collection can thus be made than from the flower and leaf alone4 ,it is advisable to be provided with a blank book or1 what is still better1 pieces of stiff white paper of uniform size on which to mount the flowers or leaves when dried2 also with a small bottle of mucilage and a brush for fastening them1 and some narrow strips of court-plaster or gummed paper for the stems and thicker parts of the plants4 ,the sooner they can be mounted the better4 ,place them carefully on the paper1 writing beneath the locality and date of finding4 ,flowers and leaves thus prepared make beautiful herbariums4 ,should you desire ,leaves and ,ferns for ,decoration1 first press them nicely2 then give them a coat of wax1 by ironing them on both sides with a hot iron over which a piece of beeswax has first been rubbed4 ,cover the specimens completely with wax1 as this renders them quite pliable1 and they are no longer brittle nor easily broken4 ,sprays of small leaves can be pressed entire4 ,to heighten the effect1 use dry colors1 rubbing them in1 and selecting those corresponding with the color of the leaves when first gathered4 ,the colors must be put on before the coating of wax4 ,ferns should be gathered when nearly full grown1 and1 after they are pressed1 painted light green with oil-colors2 in that case the beeswax is not used4 ,the oil in the paint1 like the wax1 makes the specimens more substantial1 and they look quite fresh and fair4 ,sometimes the late autumn frosts will bleach the ferns perfectly white2 then are they even more delicate than before ,nature changed their color4 ,we have seen the ,color of ,flowers ,changed1 and it is a very pretty experiment1 very simple1 too4 ,immerse the flowers in ammonia1 and you will be surprised to see white lilies change to a delicate yellow1 pink roses turn a lovely light green1 while dark-red sweet-peas assume blue and rich purple tints2 and the change is so rapid it is almost like magic4 ,another interesting experiment is making ,natural ,wax ,flowers by dipping the fresh buds and blossoms in paraffine just sufficiently hot to liquefy it2 first the stems of the flowers2 when these have cooled and hardened1 then the flowers or sprays1 holding them by the stalks and moving them gently4 ,when they are completely covered the flowers are removed and lightly shaken1 in order to throw off the superfluous wax4 ,the flowers are then suspended until perfectly dry1 when they are found hermetically sealed in a film of paraffine1 while they still keep their beautiful coloring and natural forms1 and for a while even their perfume4 ,now let us find what can be done ,to ,freshen ,cut ,flowers4 ,when the heat has made them wilt1 clip the stems and set the flowers in cold water2 in a few hours they will regain their freshness and beauty4 ,some flowers1 however1 must be differently treated1 such as heliotrope and mignonette2 these keep if placed upon damp moss or cotton and set in a cold place at night4 ,rosebuds will retain their freshness for hours when not placed in water1 if the ends of the stems are snipped off1 and immediately tipped with melted sealing-wax2 this excludes the air1 and so keeps the flowers from drooping4 ,if roses are wilted before they can be placed in water1 cut off the ends of the stalks and immerse in very hot water for a minute or two1 and they will regain their pristine freshness4 ,another way to keep flowers fresh is to put a pinch of nitrate of soda into the glass each time you change the water ,nitrate of potash or saltpetre in a powder has nearly the same effect1 or a drop of hartshorn4 ,if plants are chilled by frost1 shower them with cold water1 and leave in a cool room2 or set the pot in cold water and keep in a moderately cool place4 ,now one word about ,crystallized ,flowers1 that sparkle and look so beautiful4 ,they must first be dried in sand1 then crystallized in the same way as dried grasses--the rougher the surface the better will it crystallize4 ,dissolve as much alum in boiling water as it will hold2 when this is determined1 pour it off and boil the solution down to one-half4 ,suspend the flowers by a net-work of string tied across the top of a pail into which they must hang2 then pour into the pail the boiling alum water1 which must completely cover the flowers1 and leave it undisturbed twelve hours1 or all night4 ,the flowers should not touch each other or the sides of the bucket4 ,be careful in removing them the next morning1 as the crystals are easily broken off4 ,flowers or sprays of grass may be beautifully frosted by dipping them in a solution of gum-arabic and sprinkling them with powdered isinglass4 ,flowers are not only very beautiful1 but many of them possess a fragrance so sweet that we would fain learn how to keep the ,perfume of ,flowers4 ,rose-leaves are the most simply prepared4 ,take a covered jar1 fill it with sweet-scented rose-leaves1 and scatter through them some salt4 ,keep the jar closed tight1 and when the petals have dried the 8scent of the roses will cling to them still10 so that every time the jar is opened a delicious fragrance will fill the air4 ,or you can cover the rose-leaves with melted lard1 and leave them for a day or two in some place at a temperature of about #adj ,f42 then cool it and knead the lard in alcohol4 ,pour off the alcohol in fancy glass bottles and use as handkerchief perfume4 ,for varieties we find this method3 8,the delicate odor of pinks and other flowers may be obtained as follows3 ,get a glass funnel1 with the narrow end drawn to a point2 in this place lumps of ice with salt1 by which a very low temperature is produced4 ,the funnel should be supported on an ordinary retort-stand and placed near the flowering plants1 when water and the ethereal odor of the blossom will be deposited on the exterior of the glass funnel1 and will trickle down to the point1 from which it drops at intervals into a glass vessel below4 ,the scent thus obtained is very perfect1 but is apt to become sour in a few days unless some pure alcohol is added4 ,by this process many odors may be procured for comparison and study4 ,to obtain the odor in perfection the blossom must be in its prime40 ,dry some sweet clover1 and the fragrance will be sweet and pleasant4 ,fill a fancy bag of some thin sheer material with the clover1 and you will find that you have imprisoned the fresh breath of summer4 ,illustration ,illustration ,old-time lavender can be prepared in the same way4 ,our thoughts so far have been for the flowers in their season4 ,but did it ever occur to you that it is possible to have ,spring ,flowers in ,winter8 ,if you search in the woods during ,december you may find1 tucked away in sheltered spots1 little woodland plants which1 when taken up and carefully transplanted in a flower-pot and set in a sunny window1 will soon begin to grow1 sending up tender stems1 and in about three weeks will blossom4 ,the little fairy-like flowers seem even more beautiful coming in the cold wintry weather4 ,fruit-tree twigs and sprays from flowering shrubs will blossom when the ground is white with snow1 if cut from trees about the first of ,february1 placed in well-heated water in a warm room1 and the water changed every day for some that is almost but not quite hot4 ,the twigs being kept warm will blossom in a few weeks4 ,it is quite a pretty idea to take up and plant in a little flower-pot ,the ,four-leaved ,clover4 ,very frequently you may find a tuft bearing only the mystic number1 and should it happen to have a five- or six-leaved clover in with the others1 they will add to the luck4 ,if you possess one of these charmed plants1 it is said 8good luck0 will always be near at hand4 ,besides the foregoing directions for the preservation of flowers1 plants1 etc41 there are numerous other methods1 which1 although not experimentally verified by the writer1 are no doubt as worthy of a place here as any of the former4 ,the following recipes have been culled from various old papers1 books1 etc4 ,some ,old-fashioned ,methods of ,preserving ,flowers4 ,the first of these ways is more properly intended for botanical collections1 and is often resorted to by collectors of rare blossoms4 ,it consists in placing ,flowers in ,alcohol1 and possesses the great advantage of preserving the flowers for years1 and keeping their most delicate fibres uninjured4 ,they make invaluable specimens to sketch from1 and though their beauty may be somewhat impaired by loss of color1 their outlines remain perfect4 ,place the flowers in a wide-mouthed bottle1 fill it to the top with alcohol1 cork it tightly1 and cover the cork with plaster-of-,paris or melted beeswax1 thus hermetically sealing it4 ,do not use sealing-wax1 as experience has taught us that the fumes of the alcohol soften the wax1 and not only spoil the neat appearance of the bottle1 but allow the spirits to evaporate4 ,another way is to ,bottle ,flowers4 ,carefully seal the ends of the stems with sealing-wax1 place them in an empty bottle--both flowers and bottle must be perfectly dry--cork the bottle1 and hermetically seal it with either sealing-wax or beeswax4 ,the next method has greater possibilities of beauty1 and consequently the reader will be more interested in learning ,how to ,preserve a ,vaseful of ,flowers for a ,year4 ,take home your basket of wild flowers1 8nodding violets10 cowslips1 bright-eyed anemones1 and all the lovely offerings of the woods1 and before arranging them in the vase1 carefully seal the stem of each flower4 ,place a glass shade over the vase2 be careful that flowers1 vase1 and shade are perfectly dry2 then fill up the groove in the wood1 in which the shade stands1 with melted wax4 ,by covering the wax with chenille it can be perfectly hidden4 ,flowers kept in this way will last for a twelvemonth4 ,the flowers preserved in an empty bottle may be taken out1 the wax cut from the stems1 and1 if arranged in a bouquet1 will last as long as perfectly fresh flowers4 ,those in the alcohol lose their color after being immersed for a time1 and will not last when removed from the alcohol4 ,in following any of these directions be careful not to tie the flowers4 ,no string must be used4 ,the flower stems must be loose and separate from each other4 ,a florist of much experience in preserving bouquets for an indefinite period gives this recipe for ,keeping ,bouquets ,fresh a ,long ,time4 ,when you receive a bouquet sprinkle it lightly with fresh water1 then put it into a vessel containing some soapsuds2 this will take the place of the roots and keep the flowers bright as new4 ,take the bouquet out of the suds every morning1 and lay it sideways1 the stems entering first1 in clean water2 keep it there a minute or two1 then take it out1 and sprinkle the flowers lightly by the hand with water2 replace it in the soapsuds1 and it will bloom as fresh as when first gathered4 ,the soapsuds need changing every three or four days4 ,by observing these rules a bouquet can be kept bright and beautiful for at least a month1 and will last longer in a very passable state4 ,from another source we learn how ,to ,keep ,flowers or ,fruit a whole ,year perfectly ,fresh4 ,mix one pound of nitre with two pounds of sal ammoniac and three pounds of clean common sand2 then in dry weather take fruit of any sort which is not fully ripe1 allowing the stalks to remain1 and put them one by one into an open glass until it is quite full2 cover the glass with oiled cloth1 closely tied down4 ,put the glass three or four inches down in the earth in a dry cellar1 and surround it on all sides to the depth of three or four inches with the above mixture4 ,the fruit will thus be preserved quite fresh all the year round4 ,in giving the following recipe for the manufacture of rose-water1 it may be as well to state that the original verse is given1 not for its merit as such1 but simply because it is the form in which the recipe reached the writer4 ,rose-water4 8,when the bushes of roses are full1 ,as most of them are about ,june1 ',tis high time to gather1 or pull ,the leaves of the flowers4 ,as soon ,as you've picked all you need for the time1 ,to each quart of water unite ,a peck of the leaves1 which1 if prime-- ,and they will be1 if pulled off aright-- ,may be placed in a still near at hand1 ,on a very slow fire4 ,when done1 ,bottle off1 and permit it to stand ,for three days ere you cork down each one40 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,iii4 ,,the ,,walking ,,club4 ,a ,,sound of girlish voices is suddenly heard in the quiet village streets1 as our ,walking ,club1 issuing from the house of one of its members1 starts off on the first tramp of the season4 ,the gay chatter and bubbling laughter blend with the twittering and chirping of the birds fluttering among the budding trees1 and all these merry sounds seem in perfect harmony with the youthful gladness of the bright morning4 ,there is a subtle power and exhilaration in the spring sunshine that stimulates the blood1 and sends it tingling through our veins1 as with light-springing steps we quickly leave the village behind us and penetrate into the outlying country1 stopping now and then to secure a branch of the downy pussy willow or brilliant red blossoms of the maple1 and again to admire a distant view where the trees seem enveloped in a hazy mist of delicate color2 on we go1 exploring sequestered spots or entering deep into the woods in search of early wild flowers4 ,illustration3 ,the ,walking ,club4 ,although possibly timid as individuals1 as a club we are brave enough2 for a party of fourteen or sixteen girls1 including our merry little chaperon1 may go1 with impunity1 where it would not be so pleasant for one to venture alone4 ,once a week all through that delightful spring the club might have been seen1 now upon a road leading in this direction1 now in that4 ,and1 often as we stepped aside to allow a carriage to pass1 its occupants would lean forward smiling1 and waving their hands in greeting2 for the moment1 perhaps1 feeling in sympathy with the vigorous young life that preferred this mode of locomotion to being carried about on the downiest cushions of the easiest of carriages4 ,a ride which accorded with the unconventional mood of our club was not despised however1 for1 urged on by the girls1 our little matron would make bold to accost some countryman driving a vehicle sufficiently large1 and persuade him1 in the terms of the country1 to 8give us a lift40 ,jolting about in a springless wagon or hay-cart was not in the least enervating1 and we experienced no indolent wish to continue our journey on wheels when forced by diverging roads to leave our equipage4 ,it was not until the ever-increasing heat of the sun1 and our own languid disinclination to much exertion1 warned us that the mildness of spring had passed1 that we concluded to disband for the summer4 ,in the fall we again fell into rank1 and came home from our walks laden with the gorgeous trophies of autumn1 as we had once carried in triumph the tasselled branches and dainty flowers of spring4 ,we continued our tramps into the early winter1 when the frosty crispness of the air made it very bracing1 and the brisk exercise of walking brought the healthy color to cheek and lip of the young pedestrians4 ,such a club as this1 which at the same time promotes health1 good spirits1 and sociability1 is one that most girls will enjoy and derive benefit from4 ,a closer acquaintance with ,nature1 which these walks afford1 is not the least of their benefits1 and to her true lover1 ,nature has many delightful surprises and secrets to reveal2 and as has been said1 even for those who cannot read her deeper meanings she has a language which calls attention to her more outward forms of beauty1 and which one may study until gradually1 with slowly opening eyes1 is seen more and more of the exquisite perfection of her work1 that long ago might have been seen had one but chosen to look4 ,as a society1 the ,walking ,club is one of the most informal4 ,no officers are needed1 although a secretary may sometimes be found useful when any word is to be sent to absent members4 ,the membership of the club should be large enough to insure the attendance of at least twelve or fourteen on each walk2 for in this case1 as ,i have said1 safety lies in numbers4 ,at a place of meeting previously appointed1 the members should assemble1 and1 before starting on their walk1 the route to be taken should be decided by vote2 a decision on this point will be more quickly arrived at if a chairman be appointed to keep order4 ,the first walk should not be too long4 ,three miles is a good walk to start with2 a mile and a half out and the same home again4 ,gradually the distance can be lengthened1 and the club be able to take a ten-mile walk without feeling fatigue4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,,to ,,make ,,the ,,exercise ,,of ,,walking ,,healthful1 ,,and ,,therefore ,,the ,,more ,,enjoyable1 ,,these ,,rules ,,should ,,be ,,observed4 #ast4 ,carry the body erect on the hips1 the shoulders thrown back1 the chest raised1 and the head square on the shoulders4 #b;d4 ,breathe through the nose while walking rapidly1 otherwise the mouth will become dry and the breath short4 #c;d4 ,wear loosely fitting clothes that will permit a free motion of the limbs1 and shoes with broad1 moderately thick1 soles and low1 broad heels4 ,in all cases a girl's skirts should be supported from the shoulders1 and in walking any distance it is absolutely necessary for comfort that there should be no weight upon the hips4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,iv4 ,,easter4 ,,everywhere the children are playing with eggs2 eggs colored in every hue--mottled1 striped1 and gilded2 real eggs and imitation ones2 sugar1 glass1 and wooden eggs2 for this is ,easter-tide1 and not only in ,america1 but in many far-away countries1 where the habits and customs are very different from ours1 does ,easter bring to the children the highly prized1 gayly-colored eggs4 ,how nice it would be if we could take a peep into these foreign countries1 and discover what else ,easter brings the little ones besides the pretty eggs1 and also how the people of such widely differing nations keep this happy festival common to all4 ,if we could look into ,england now1 we should find that the ceremonies there begin on ,palm ,sunday 7the last ,sunday before ,easter71 and on that day many people go a-palming1 only they do not1 of course1 find palm1 but gather instead branches of willow1 which they stick into their hats and button-holes4 ,on ,good-,friday we might see1 on almost every breakfast-table1 those hot spicy cakes with a cross stamped on the face1 known to many of us as well as to our ,english cousins1 as 8hot cross buns40 ,we should feel very much at home looking into the churches on ,easter ,sunday1 for we should find them beautifully decorated with flowers1 and hear the ,easter anthems chanted as we might in our own country4 ,i do not think we can see in ,america1 though1 the ceremony which1 on ,easter ,monday1 is performed by the charity school-children in ,england4 ,were we among the spectators who1 with shouts and merry laughter1 crowd around to watch this performance1 we should see the children take their places1 with their backs against the outside of the church1 and then join hands until a circle is formed around the building1 thus completing what is called 8clipping the church40 ,it would be great fun to see the ,easter celebration in ,russia1 which includes many peculiar customs1 and where the children receive presents as we do at ,christmas1 besides more eggs than any of us ever thought of possessing2 some of the eggs being beautifully made of glass or porcelain1 and filled with sugar-plums or small presents4 ,how amusing it would be to watch the people1 following a custom always observed on ,easter ,monday in this queer land1 as they go about kissing relations1 friends1 and acquaintances1 wherever they happen to meet them4 ,if we were really in this great1 cold1 furry country1 we might go with the children to make their ,easter visits1 and1 on entering a house1 hear the greeting1 8,jesus ,christ is risen10 and the answer1 8,yes1 he is risen20 then after kissing the inmates and exchanging eggs with them1 go to visit elsewhere4 ,all this would seem very strange to ,american eyes2 and it would be a strange sight too1 if we could look into the cities of ,spain and see the people in the streets shooting at stuffed figures of ,judas ,iscariot4 ,a passing glance at ,ireland on ,easter morning would show us the people making haste to be out at sunrise to see the sun dance in a pool or pail of clear water4 ,it would be worth while to give more than a passing glance into ,germany at this season1 for in this country1 where the children's happiness is so much thought of and so well provided for1 ,easter ,monday is looked upon as a grand holiday1 and all the young people appear in their gala costumes ready for any fun or frolic that may be going on4 ,it is a pretty sight when the little peasant-girls1 in their quaint gowns and odd little caps1 dance on the green with the boys1 whose costumes are equally as picturesque2 and it is also entertaining to watch them as they play various games with their many-colored eggs4 ,in ,germany1 too1 we should find that the children believe as sincerely in the ,easter hare as they do in ,santa ,claus in our country2 and the saying1 that 8the hares lay the ,easter eggs10 is never doubted by the little ones4 ,after visiting in imagination all these foreign countries to see their ,easter celebrations1 it may prove interesting to turn our eyes toward home1 for1 since our country is so large--as large almost as all ,europe put together--perhaps some of our little citizens who have never been in ,washington do not know how1 in the capital of the ,united ,states1 the children hold high carnival on ,easter ,monday1 nor how the grounds of the ,white ,house and also of the ,capitol are given up to them on this day that they may frolic on the lawns and roll their eggs down the hills4 ,it would be as novel a sight to some of us as any found abroad1 to see several thousand children rolling and tossing their eggs1 while shells of every hue cover the grass in all directions4 ,the following newspaper item1 cut from the ,evening ,star1 ,washington1 ,d4 ,c41 ,april #bg1 #ahhf1 shows how these rights of the little ,americans are recognized and respected1 and how unmolested they enjoy the privileges of ,easter ,monday4 8,,the ,,easter ,,egg-,,rolling4 8,,children ,,shake ,,hands ,,with ,,the ,,president4 8,the crowd in the ,white ,house grounds greatly increased yesterday afternoon1 so that the grounds were literally packed with children4 ,the crowd was the largest and best appearing that has collected there in many years4 ,the ,president and ,colonel ,lamont watched the children for some time from the library window4 ,at the ,president's reception at half-past one o'clock hundreds of children gave up their sport temporarily and thronged the ,east ,room to shake hands with the ,president40 ,easter ,egg ,games4 ,in the game they play at ,washington1 on the hills sloping from the ,white ,house1 the child whose egg reaches the foot of the hill in an unbroken condition takes the one worsted in the journey down4 ,another game for two is played by knocking the eggs together2 each child holds an egg firmly in his hand so that only the small end is visible1 and then the two eggs are struck against each other until one is cracked1 when the victorious player adds it to his stock1 or devours it on the spot4 ,i would not like to state the number of eggs eaten on these occasions1 but there is a boy 7not a girl7 who once consumed fourteen and lived to tell the tale4 ,sometimes the egg which breaks another is called 8the cock of one10 and when it has broken two it is 8cock of two10 and so on4 ,when an egg which is cock of one or more is broken1 the number of trophies won by the victim is added to the score of the conquering egg and it becomes 8cock of three0 or more4 ,here is a game which comes from ,germany1 and although in that country it is played exclusively by boys1 there is no reason why the girls should not participate in it as well4 ,two baskets are necessary for this game1 one large and shallow filled with soft shavings1 the other shallow also1 but smaller1 and filled with eggs4 ,the plan of the game is that one player is to run a given distance1 while another safely throws the eggs from one basket to the other1 she who completes her task first being the winner4 ,when the baskets are prepared1 and the distance the eggs are to be thrown decided upon1 the two contestants draw lots to determine who shall run and who shall throw4 ,this settled1 the player who throws takes the basket of eggs1 and one after another quickly tosses them the length of the course and into the basket of shavings1 which is placed on the ground at the end of the course opposite the thrower4 ,in ,germany this basket is held by an assistant1 but anyone occupying that position might receive some severe blows from the hard eggs thrown by unpractised hands1 and it answers the purpose just as well to place the basket on the ground4 ,meantime the other player runs the distance 7decided beforehand7 to an appointed goal1 marks it as a proof of having touched it1 and should she succeed in returning before all the eggs are thrown1 the victory and prize are her reward2 otherwise they belong to the thrower4 ,the game finished1 a prize is presented to the successful contestant4 ,should any of the eggs pitched by the thrower fail to light in the basket1 they must be gathered up and thrown again before the runner returns1 as the eggs must all be in the basket before the thrower wins the game4 8,bunching eggs0 comes from ,ireland1 and is played in very much the same manner as the game played with a slate and pencil1 and known to all children as 8tit1 tat1 toe1 three in a row40 ,a pan or large dish filled with sand or sawdust is set upon a table1 around which the children stand1 each supplied with eggs2 the eggs of each player must be all of one color1 and unlike those of any other player4 ,the object of the game is for each player to so place her eggs1 standing them upright in the sand1 or sawdust1 as to bring five in a row touching each other4 ,in turn each player puts down an egg1 sometimes filling out a row for herself1 at others cutting off the line of an opponent2 and the one who first succeeds in obtaining the desired row sings out-- 8,the raven1 chough1 and crow1 ,say five in a row40 ,another pretty game from ,ireland called 8,touch0 is played in the following manner3 ,six eggs of the different colors--green1 red1 black1 blue1 white1 and gold are placed in a row in the sand used for the other game4 ,one of the players is blindfolded and given a light wand or stick1 with which she must touch one of the eggs1 while at the same time she recites these lines3 ,peggy1 ,patrick1 ,mike1 and ,meg1 ,see me touch my ,easter egg2 ,green1 and red1 and black1 and blue1 ,count for six1 five1 four1 and two4 ,if ,i touch an egg of white1 ,a forfeit then will be your right2 ,if ,i touch an egg of gold1 ,it is mine to have and hold4 ,as is told in the rhyme1 the eggs each have a different value4 ,green counts six2 red1 five2 black1 four2 and blue1 two2 and the gold egg is worth more than all put together1 for when a player touches that1 she wins the game and a forfeit of an egg from each of the other players4 ,the white egg is worth less than nothing1 since it not only has no value but whoever touches it with the wand must pay a forfeit4 ,each player is in turn blindfolded and makes her trial1 keeping account of the value of the eggs she has touched4 ,when the sum of twenty has been reached by anyone the game is ended1 without the aid of the gold egg4 ,the position of the eggs are changed after each trial1 that the person about to touch them may not know where it is best to place her wand4 ,easter ,egg ,dolls4 ,in some of the large confectionery stores in ,new ,york ,city may be found at ,easter-tide quaint little ,easter offerings1 looking at first sight exactly like dolls' heads surmounted by pretty little head-dresses4 ,as dolls are not peculiarly appropriate gifts for ,easter1 one naturally examines them closer1 to ascertain if there is anything about them significant of the day1 and in so doing quickly discovers that the heads are not made of wax or china1 as was at first supposed1 but are simply egg-shells from which the eggs have been blown1 leaving the shell perfect4 ,little faces are painted upon these shells1 and the cunning caps or bonnets are made of tissue-paper4 ,now it is our purpose to teach the children who do not live in ,new ,york and have never seen these pretty toys1 and also those who1 having seen1 cannot afford to purchase them1 just how to make some of these little men and women1 and how to fashion a variety of head-dresses not to be found in the stores4 ,to begin with1 select several nice large eggs1 those of a pinkish yellow are preferable1 being something of a flesh-tint4 ,these eggs should be blown1 or the shells emptied of their contents2 to blow them make a small hole in each end of the shell1 and1 taking it gently between the thumb and forefinger1 put one hole to the lips2 then blow1 not too hard1 but steadily1 until the egg has all run out of the other end4 ,the face must be painted next1 and to those who know nothing of drawing this will seem no easy task1 until by carefully observing the following direction they will find that it is in the power of anyone to produce as pretty a face as could be wished for4 ,illustration3 ,patterns for ,head-dresses4 ,among picture-cards1 or in almost any juvenile book1 may be found many pretty faces of a suitable size which can be transferred to the egg in this way4 ,lay a piece of tracing-paper over the head selected1 and with a soft lead-pencil trace carefully all the lines indicating the features2 then place the paper on the shell so that the pencil-marks are next to it1 and with a hard pencil1 or ivory knitting-needle1 go over the lines again1 thus transferring the soft pencil-marks to the shell4 ,touch up and strengthen the features with a fine paint-brush and india-ink4 ,anyone understanding painting may color the face in natural tints1 but it looks very nicely done merely in outline4 ,illustration3 ,the ,nun4 ,the simplest arrangement for holding the little head erect is a small pasteboard box turned upside down1 and having a hole cut in the bottom just large enough to admit the small end of the shell2 this will support the head nicely1 and also form the shoulders4 ,illustration3 ,the ,old-fashioned ,girl4 ,make the hair of raw cotton blackened with ink1 and fasten it on the head with mucilage4 ,when all of the foregoing directions have been carried out it is time to attend to the head-dresses1 and we will begin with the quaint and old-fashioned poke-bonnet4 ,cut this bonnet from ordinary brown wrapping-paper after the pattern shown in diagram2 sew together the ends of the 8side of crown10 then sew the curved side 7which is cut in slits as shown in pattern1 and folded back as indicated by dotted line7 to the smallest part of brim2 fold in the strips marked on the straight 8side of crown0 and fasten on the 8top of crown0 with mucilage4 ,the trimming for the bonnet consists of a fold and bow of colored tissue paper4 ,illustration3 ,the ,dude4 ,make the man's hat of shiny black paper by the pattern in diagram1 and fasten together in the same manner as the bonnet1 rolling the sides of the brim when finished4 ,black and white tissue-paper folded to fit the head1 as shown by the dotted lines in the pattern1 forms the head-dress of the nun4 ,by copying the head-dresses of different nations1 an odd and curious assembly of these ,easter-egg dolls can be formed2 but that must be worked out at some future time1 for we have yet to tell how to construct some ,easter toys that cannot be found in any store4 ,the ,humpty ,dumpty who 8sat on a wall10 and the 8,humpty ,dumpty0 who 8had a great fall10 must have been like the one ,i am about to describe1 made of an egg2 for it is pretty certain that if he should fall1 8all the king's horses and all the king's men couldn't put0 this 8,humpty ,dumpty together again0 any more than they could the other4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,humpty ,dumpty4 ,the diagram shows the frame of this little fellow and how it is joined together4 ,a large egg should be chosen2 and when the contents have been blown from the shell1 four holes must be pricked in it for the arms and legs to pass through1 as shown in the diagram4 ,these limbs are made of rather fine bonnet-wire1 the piece used for the arms being about eight inches long4 ,the hand is made by bending up one end of the wire as in diagram1 and with softened beeswax covering the loop thus formed4 ,when one hand has been finished off in this way1 the other end of the wire1 still straight1 should be passed through one of the holes near the small end of the shell and out through the one opposite1 then bent up into a hand and arm in the same manner as described4 ,illustration3 ,humpty ,dumpty4 ,the wire for the legs and feet must be ten inches long4 ,the diagram shows how it is bent to form the feet4 ,on this frame1 wax can easily be modelled to look like a foot2 a coating of red paint will add to the appearance1 as red boots look well with the costume to be worn4 ,the wire for the legs should be bent in a curve in the middle 7see diagram7 before it is passed through the shell4 ,again1 as with the hands1 one foot must be finished and the legs fastened on before the other foot can be made4 ,the figure of ,humpty ,dumpty being thus prepared1 his face must be painted2 water-colors are the best for this purpose4 ,the jollier the expression of his face1 the funnier the little man will look4 ,patterns for trousers1 jacket1 and hat are shown in the diagrams4 ,the trousers should be cut from white cotton cloth two and a half inches long and six inches wide4 ,a slit an inch and a half long1 cut in the middle1 separates the legs of the trousers1 which must1 of course1 be sewed up4 ,dotted lines at top and bottom show where a gathering thread should be run1 the bottom gathers forming ruffles around the ankles4 ,white should also be used for the jacket1 cutting it three and a half inches long and five inches wide4 ,the shape of the jacket may be seen in the diagram1 dotted lines showing where the sleeves are to be gathered around the wrist4 ,collar and pockets of red--the patterns of which are given--finish the little garment4 ,a white hat four inches around the brim and two inches high is decorated with a band of red1 which should be sewed on the edge and turned up4 ,when dressing ,humpty ,dumpty1 fasten his garments on to his body here and there with glue1 which will hold them securely in place4 ,the hat also should be glued to his head1 as it is difficult otherwise to keep it on4 ,miss ,rolly-poly4 ,illustration3 ,miss ,rolly-poly4 ,little ,miss ,rolly-poly1 who decidedly refuses to lie down1 always regaining an upright posture1 no matter in what position she is placed1 is made in the following manner3 ,after the contents have been blown from the shell1 the hole of the small end is enlarged gradually until it is about a half-inch in diameter2 the shell is then placed in an upright position 7a box with a hole cut in it just large enough to hold the egg firmly makes a good stand7 and melted sealing-wax is poured in2 on top of this melted lead is poured1 all the while care being taken to keep the shell perfectly steady1 that the weight may fall exactly in the centre and make a perfect balance4 ,a small quantity of lead is sufficient for the purpose1 as the shell is so very light4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,miss ,rolly-poly4 ,miss ,rolly-poly requires no limbs2 when her babyish face is painted she is ready for her costume4 ,the dress is simply made of a strip of colored cloth1 and is two inches long and seven inches wide4 ,the white apron is fastened to the dress as shown in the diagram4 ,sleeves are made of pieces of the dress1 material about one inch long and one and a half inch wide4 ,they are rolled up and fastened with needle and thread1 then sewed on to the dress in the position shown in the diagram4 ,pockets are made for the apron1 and the ends of the sleeves tucked in them1 which makes it appear as though the hands were hidden in the pockets4 ,the cap1 made of the same material1 or of a color harmonizing with the dress1 is four inches round the brim and one inch high2 it is sewed together at the two ends1 and gathered into a pompon on top1 as is shown by the dotted lines in the diagram4 ,a little glue should also be used to fasten this dolly's dress and cap on4 ,mandolin4 ,illustration ,a pretty little toy mandolin is made of the lengthwise half of an egg-shell4 ,to separate the shell in this way it is necessary to pierce holes with a needle along the line where the division is to be made1 which will cause it to break evenly2 or the egg may be boiled hard and then cut in half with a very sharp knife4 ,fig4 #f is cut from stiff paper1 and the strings drawn with pen and ink2 then the shell is fastened to it on the opposite side by pasting a narrow strip of white tissue paper over the edges of the shell and frame1 joining them together4 ,the top of the handle is bent down a little and a narrow ribbon tied to it4 ,to make the mandolin still more complete1 paint the handle mahogany color1 with a fine needle stitch on strings of yellow silk1 and paint the egg-shell into pumpkin-like divisions of yellow and mahogany4 ,illustration3 ,the ,mandolin4 ,the ,owl4 ,illustration3 ,wing4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,owl4 ,to turn a hen's egg into an owl has not before1 ,i imagine1 been thought possible2 yet it is easy enough1 and requires but a very short time to accomplish the transformation1 when one knows just how to go to work4 ,no incubator is needed to hatch this bird1 as only the shell is used1 the contents having been disposed of in the manner before described4 ,we commence the formation of the little owl by making two holes near the large end of the shell in the position shown in diagram4 ,illustration3 ,owl ,complete4 ,by looking at the next diagram the manner of making the feet and legs may be seen4 ,a short piece of wire is bent in the shape given1 and is wrapped on to a longer wire with strong thread1 thus forming three toes1 which are quite enough for a bird that will never walk4 ,one foot made1 the wire is passed through the shell1 having first been bent into a curve1 as in the description of ,humpty ,dumpty4 ,when the last foot has been fastened on1 the wire should be pushed back into the shell1 allowing but little of the legs to show4 ,the wings are cut by the pattern given1 and are painted to resemble feathers as much as possible4 ,brown is the best color to use4 ,by the diagram may be seen how the head and body are painted4 ,maple-wax ,easter ,eggs4 ,empty the egg-shell of its contents and open a place at the small end the size of a silver dime4 ,stand it in an upright position with the largest opening on top1 and leave it while you prepare the maple-wax1 or candy4 ,mix enough water with some maple sugar to dissolve it1 and set on the fire to cook2 when it will harden in cold water it is done4 ,carefully fill the egg-shell with the hot maple-wax1 and keeping it in an upright position1 set it on the ice to cool4 ,when the wax is perfectly cold and hard1 paste an artificial daisy over the opening in the shell4 ,maple-wax is the nicest kind of candy1 and done up in this way will remain firm and hard for a long while2 and therefore these maple-wax eggs make excellent ,easter gifts to send away to one's friend at a distance4 ,the best way to pack them is to wrap them in cotton and then put them in a tin baking-powder box1 filling up the interstices with cotton to keep them from knocking about4 ,the box1 of course1 must be wrapped in paper and tied securely with a string4 ,packed like this1 they may travel safely all over the ,united ,states4 ,the writer sent several the distance of over seven hundred miles1 and they arrived at their destination in as perfect condition as when they left her hands4 ,bonbon ,box4 ,select a box two or three inches high--a round one is best--which has a lid that covers the entire box4 ,cut some straw or hay in pieces long enough to reach from the top to the edge1 and glue it on the sides of the lid1 covering them completely4 ,prepare as many halves of egg-shells as will cover the top1 allowing a space one inch wide around the edge4 ,glue the shells down1 and fill up the spaces between with straw4 ,near the edge1 on the opposite sides1 glue a loop of narrow white ribbon2 these loops are to lift it with4 ,then glue straw on all the uncovered parts of the lid1 making it a little thicker and higher at the edges4 ,when the box is finished it resembles a nest of eggs1 and makes an appropriate and acceptable ,easter gift4 ,easter ,cards4 ,it is a very pretty custom1 that of sending ,easter cards1 altogether too pretty to be allowed to lapse into disuse1 as many customs which are merely the expression of sentiment are apt to do in this busy1 practical country of ours4 ,one experiences a great deal of pleasure in selecting from the stock of beautiful cards found in the stores just before ,easter those that seem suitable for one's friends1 but more pleasure will be derived from home-made ,easter cards1 both to the sender and recipient2 for it is true that into everything we make we put a part of ourselves1 and into many a home-made article is woven loving thoughts which make the gift priceless1 although the materials of which it is composed may have cost little or nothing4 ,illustration ,several years ago the writer was visiting a friend in the country twenty miles from the nearest town where ,easter cards could be purchased1 but when ,easter approached we sent off our cards1 just the same1 and ,i am sure our friends were as pleased with them1 and more pleased1 than if they had been of the most expensive kind4 ,this is how we made them3 ,illustration3 ,pattern for the ,chicken4 ,it was an early spring1 and the woods were filled with wild-flowers1 anemones and violets mostly2 these we gathered1 and arranging them in small bunches1 stuck the stems through little slits cut in cards or pieces of heavy paper1 as they are sometimes fastened in books when pressed4 ,underneath the bouquet we wrote the name of the person for whom it was intended1 with some friendly message appropriate to the season1 and signed our own names2 then we carefully folded each in writing paper1 taking pains not to crumple the flowers1 and enclosing them in envelopes1 sent them to their destination through the mail4 ,any kind of flowers can be used for these ,easter cards1 and instead of putting the stems through slits in the card1 they may be tied to them with narrow ribbon4 ,a card to be sent only a short distance should be put in a box just deep enough to leave room for the flowers1 and fastened in some way to keep it from moving about2 in this way it will reach its destination sweet and fresh4 ,to those who can paint their ,easter cards we have no suggestions to offer1 for they have an unlimited supply of designs at their command1 and with their power of decoration1 may turn almost anything into an ,easter card1 from a piece of satin ribbon1 upon which they sketchily paint a spray of flowers1 to an elaborate picture4 ,a few suggestions are here given which our younger readers may like to carry out1 as the cards we describe are easily made1 and adapted to amuse the children4 8,stepping through the ,white ,house0 the first card is called1 and it represents a little chicken breaking through its shell4 ,the pattern of the chicken is given in the diagrams4 ,fig4 #g1 the head and neck1 is cut from yellow flannel2 ,figs4 #h1 #i1 and #aj1 the main part and fragments of shell1 are of white paper1 and ,fig4 #aa1 the feet1 of black paper4 ,these are pasted to a tinted card1 as shown in illustration4 ,the eye and bill are made black with ink or paint4 ,little ,quakeress4 ,illustration3 ,the ,little ,quakeress4 ,half an egg-shell1 with the face and hair painted on it1 forms the head4 ,the cap is made of white tissue paper cut in four strips2 one1 for the crown1 is six and a half inches long1 and a little over one and a half wide2 another1 for the brim1 is four and a half inches long and one inch wide2 while the strings are each three and a half inches long1 and one and a half wide4 ,the crown is plaited in the centre1 the brim folded lengthwise through the middle1 and sewed to the crown4 ,the strings are fastened on either side of the cap1 and crossed in front2 then the cap is pasted on the head1 the surplus paper folded back1 and the whole glued on a card4 ,the ends of the strings are also fastened to the card1 forming a ,quaker kerchief4 ,illustration ,illustration ,illustration3 ,lawn-,tennis with ,our ,own ,net4 ,,chapter ,v4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,lawn-,,tennis ,,net4 ,,let us see2 it was that old medical gentleman1 ,galen the ,greek1 who first wrote upon tennis1 speaking of the sport as healthy exercise1 was it not8 ,well1 girls1 it really does not matter much to us whether he was the first to write it up and the ,greeks the first to play it1 or whether the game originated in ,france in the fifteenth century1 as some claim4 ,what we want to know is1 can we all learn to play tennis8 ,does it cost much8 ,what kind of gowns and shoes must we wear8 ,and is it an enjoyable game8 ,there is no doubt1 we think1 of its being a right royal pastime1 as it has been called both the 8king of games0 and the 8game of kings20 the latter because it was enjoyed by princes and nobles--so much enjoyed1 that in both ,england and ,france edicts were published forbidding the common people to play it4 ,girls1 do you wonder if they always had the choice of courts1 and so never took part in the fun of spinning the racket in the air while the adversary called out 8rough0 or 8smooth20 or whether they played as we do1 taking their defeats pleasantly and wearing their honors gracefully1 while always doing their very best8 ,they must have played well1 for it is said that ,louis ,,xi41 ,henry ,,ii41 and ,charles ,,ix41 were experts1 and that ,henry ,,viii4 of ,england was extremely fond of the sport4 ,we can easily learn to play this most popular and exhilarating of games4 ,but we must be suitably clothed in order to thoroughly enjoy it and receive all the benefit the recreation brings to both mind and body4 ,flannel seems to be the best material for a tennis suit--it is so soft and yielding1 and so well adapted for a defence against either cold or heat4 ,then1 make your tennis gown of flannel2 the skirt in plaits1 without drapery2 the postilion basque of ,jersey cloth1 soft and elastic1 matching the skirt in color4 ,sew the skirt of your gown on a sleeveless waist1 made of lining or muslin4 ,the ,jersey will fit nicely over this1 and you can play better and feel far more comfortable than when the weight is allowed to drag on the hips4 ,for it is nonsense to attempt to take part in any athletic game unless you can have perfect freedom of action2 in short1 you should be so dressed as to be utterly unconscious of your clothing4 ,illustration3 ,an ,old ,game4 ,either crochet a ,tam ,o',shanter hat or make one of the dress material1 as these are not so apt to fall off while running as a straw hat4 8,last1 but not least10 come the shoes4 ,of course1 rubber-soled shoes are the best4 ,but if these are not to be had1 remove the heels from an old pair of ordinary shoes1 and they will do very well2 heels roughen and cut the courts4 ,the actual cost of a lawn-tennis set need only be the price of the rackets and balls1 and rope and cord necessary when you learn ,how to ,make a ,lawn-,tennis ,net1 which is not difficult4 ,first procure two pieces of cotton rope1 three-sixteenths of an inch in size1 each thirty-four feet long1 costing about twenty-five cents apiece4 ,then one and a half pound of hammock twine or macrim cord1 ,no4 #bd1 which will not cost more than fifty cents4 ,next1 two lengths of cotton rope for guy-ropes1 each five feet1 price1 both included1 ten cents2 making the total amount #a4aj for a strong1 firm1 tennis net which will prove serviceable and last many a season4 ,illustration3 ,stake4 ,illustration3 ,peg4 ,illustration3 ,runner4 ,illustration3 ,runner and ,guy-rope4 ,illustration3 ,the ,fid4 ,the other materials necessary are all home-made4 ,these consist of two stakes1 each five feet long 7,fig4 #ab74 ,any kind of a strong pole1 when sharpened at one end and a notch cut at the other1 will answer the purpose4 ,four pegs1 each one foot long 7,fig4 #ac74 ,these may be easily made of old broomsticks4 ,four runners 7,fig4 #ad71 each five inches long1 one and a quarter wide1 and about half an inch thick1 with holes bored near each end large enough to allow the guy-rope 7,fig4 #ae7 to pass through4 ,a fid or mesh-stick of any kind of wood 7,fig4 #af71 about a foot or ten inches long1 with circumference measuring three inches4 ,a hammock-needle 7,fig4 #ag71 nine or ten inches long and one wide1 which may be bought for ten cents1 or whittled out of a piece of ash or hickory by some kind brother4 ,tassels are not necessary1 though it is much better to have them1 as they make the top line of the net more distinct and add to its appearance4 ,make about forty bright-colored tassels of worsted1 or bits of flannel cut in very narrow strips1 three inches long1 allowing ten or twelve strips to each tassel4 ,commence your tennis net by first threading the needle2 take it in the left hand1 and use the thumb to hold the end of the cord in place while looping it over the tongue 7see ,fig4 #ah72 pass the cord down under the needle to the opposite side1 and catch it over the tongue4 ,repeat this until the needle is full4 ,illustration3 ,hammock-needle4 ,illustration3 ,fig #ai ,illustration3 ,fig #bj ,illustration3 ,needle ,threaded4 ,illustration3 ,knots4 ,next1 take a piece of rope thirty-four feet long1 and make a long loop in one end1 tying the knot so that it can readily be untied again4 ,throw the loop over some convenient hook or door-knob 7,fig4 #ai7 with the knot at the knob or hook4 ,tie the cord on the needle to the loop1 place the fid or mesh-stick under the cord close to the loop 7,fig4 #bj71 with the thumb on the cord to hold it in place 7,fig4 #be71 while you pass the needle around the mesh-stick1 and1 with its point toward you1 pass it through the loop from the top1 bringing it over the mesh-stick4 ,this will make the first half of the knot 7,fig4 #ba74 ,pull this tight1 holding it in place with the thumb while you throw the cord over your hand1 which forms the loop as seen in ,fig4 #bb4 ,then pass the needle from under through the loop1 pulling it tight to fasten the knot4 ,hold it in place with the thumb1 and repeat these movements for the next knot4 ,fig4 #bc shows a number of these knots finished4 ,a in ,fig4 #bc is a knot before it is drawn tight2 ,b in ,figs4 #ba1 #bb1 #bc is the string that runs to the needle1 ,c is the rope1 and ,d is the mesh-stick4 ,about two hundred and sixty-four of these knots or meshes will make the net the regular length1 thirty-three feet4 ,illustration3 ,fig #bd ,in knitting across1 the meshes will accumulate on the fid2 shove them off to the left1 a few at a time1 to make space for others4 ,when the desired number of meshes are finished to form the first row1 shove them all off the fid1 as shown in ,fig4 #bd4 ,begin the next row by again placing the fid under the cord 7,fig4 #bd74 ,take up the first mesh1 drawing it close to the mesh-stick1 hold it in place with the thumb while throwing the cord over your hand1 pass the needle on the left-hand side of the mesh from under through the loop 7,fig4 #be72 pull this tight1 and you will have tied the common knitting-knot4 ,repeat this with all the loops until the row is finished4 ,when it becomes necessary to thread or fill the needle1 tie the ends of the cord with the knot shown in ,fig4 #bf1 which1 when properly tightened1 cannot slip4 ,wrap each end of the cord from the knot securely to the main cord with strong thread1 to give the net a neat appearance4 ,continue netting until the net is three feet wide4 ,then untie the rope1 and spread the net by sliding the knots apart1 and fasten the second rope to the bottom of the net by tying the rope securely to the first mesh with the cord on the needle2 then carry the rope and cord to the next mesh1 hold the rope1 cord1 and mesh firmly in place1 and throw the cord over your hand1 passing the needle down through the mesh under the rope and cord out through the loop 7,fig4 #bg74 ,pull this tight1 and continue in like manner1 knitting each successive mesh to the rope until the net is all fastened on4 ,turn back the end of the rope and wrap it down neatly with strong string 7,fig4 #bh74 ,in the same way secure the other end1 and also the ends of the first or top rope4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #be4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bf4 ,this completes the lawn-tennis net proper4 ,the bright tassels can now be tied at intervals along the top of the net1 and four pieces of twine fastened on each end of the net at equal distances apart4 ,these are for tying the net to the poles 7,fig4 #bi74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ag ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ah ,to erect the lawn-tennis net1 plant the two poles firmly in the ground a little over thirty-three feet apart1 tie the net to the poles1 then drive in the pegs1 two to each pole1 about five feet from the pole 7,fig4 #cj72 slide a runner on each end of the two guy-ropes by first threading the rope through one of the holes in the runner1 then pass the rope over the side down through the other hole and fasten it with a knot 7,fig4 #ae74 ,next tie around the notch in the top of the poles the guy-ropes1 with runners attached1 and slip each loop made by the runner over each peg 7,fig4 #ca71 allowing the rope to fall in the groove ,a near the top of the peg2 tighten the rope by pushing up the runners4 ,the stakes are thus held in position by ropes running out to the pegs in the ground 7,fig4 #cj74 ,illustration3 ,fig #bg ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cj4--,the ,home-,made ,net4 ,now we understand how to make and erect a lawn-tennis net2 but what shall we do about the court8 ,of course1 that must be all ready before we can set up the net4 ,we must now learn how to lay out a ,lawn-,tennis ,court4 ,the best ground for this is turf1 though it may be of asphalt1 or earth mixed with fine gravel2 sometimes wood is used4 ,the diagram on page #fd 7,fig4 #cb7 shows the construction of a lawn-tennis court for two1 three1 or four-handed games4 ,lay out the court with a hundred-foot measuring-tape1 by marking the lines with whitewash1 chalk1 paint1 or plaster-of-,paris4 ,first the side line1 seventy-eight feet1 ,,ab4 ,this gives you one side of your court4 ,then the base line1 thirty-six feet1 ,,ac1 which1 with their parallel lines ,,cd and ,,db1 form the boundaries of a court for four-handed games4 ,now lay off the side lines of the single court1 ,,eg and ,,fh1 which are parallel to the others and four and a half feet inside of them4 ,divide the court across the centre by the net1 fastened to the poles ,o and ,p4 ,the lines ,,ef and ,,gh are called base lines4 ,twenty-one feet from the net1 mark the service lines1 ,,mn and ,,tv4 ,then make the central longitudinal line1 ,,ij1 and the court is complete4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ca ,now everything is prepared for the game4 ,hold your racket firmly1 and try to keep the ball flying over the net1 back and forth1 as often as possible4 ,for the guidance of those who have had no opportunity of learning to play lawn-tennis the following rules are given1 as adopted by the ,united ,states ,national ,lawn-,tennis ,association4 ,first1 however1 we would say that it is not necessary always to have an umpire or a referee1 as spoken of in the ,rules for ,lawn-,tennis4 ,,the ,,game4 #a4 ,the choice of sides1 and the right to serve in the first game1 shall be decided by toss2 provided that1 if the winner of the toss choose the right to serve1 the other player shall have choice of sides1 and vice versa4 ,if one player choose the court1 the other may elect not to serve4 #b4 ,the players shall stand on opposite sides of the net2 the player who first delivers the ball shall be called the server1 and the other the striker-out4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cb ,,lawn-,,tennis ,,court4 #c4 ,at the end of the first game the striker-out shall become server1 and the server shall become striker-out2 and so on1 alternately1 in all the subsequent games of the set1 or series of sets4 #d4 ,the server shall serve with one foot on the base line1 and with the other foot behind that line1 but not necessarily upon the ground4 ,he shall deliver the service from the right to the left courts alternately1 beginning from the right4 #e4 ,the ball served must drop between the service line1 half-court line1 and side line of the court1 diagonally opposite to that from which it was served4 #f4 ,it is a fault if the server fail to strike the ball1 or if the ball served drop in the net1 or beyond the service line1 or out of court1 or in the wrong court2 or if the server do not stand as directed by law #d4 #g4 ,a ball falling on a line is regarded as falling in the court bounded by that line4 #h4 ,a fault cannot be taken4 #i4 ,after a fault the server shall serve again from the same court from which he served that fault1 unless it was a fault because he served from the wrong court4 #aj4 ,a fault cannot be claimed after the next service is delivered4 #aa4 ,the server shall not serve till the striker-out is ready4 ,if the latter attempt to return the service he shall be deemed ready4 #ab4 ,a service or fault1 delivered when the striker-out is not ready counts for nothing4 #ac4 ,the service shall not be volleyed1 i4e41 taken1 before it has touched the ground4 #ad4 ,a ball is in play on leaving the server's racket1 except as provided for in law #f4 #ae4 ,it is a good return1 although the ball touch the net2 but a service1 otherwise good1 which touches the net1 shall count for nothing4 #af4 ,the server wins a stroke if the striker-out volley the service1 or if he fail to return the service or the ball in play2 or if he return the service or the ball in play so that it drops outside of his opponent's court2 or if he otherwise lose a stroke1 as provided by law #ah4 #ag4 ,the striker-out wins a stroke if the server serve two consecutive faults2 or if he fail to return the ball in play2 or if he return the ball in play so that it drops outside of his opponent's court2 or if he otherwise lose a stroke as provided by law #ah4 #ah4 ,either player loses a stroke if he return the service or the ball in play so that it touches a post of the net2 or if the ball touch him or anything that he wears or carries1 except his racket in the act of striking2 or if he touch the ball with his racket more than once2 or if he touch the net or any of its supports while the ball is in play2 or if he volley the ball before it has passed the net4 #ai4 ,in case any player is obstructed by any accident1 the ball shall be considered a let4 #bj4 ,on either player winning his first stroke1 the score is called #ae for that player2 on either player winning his second stroke1 the score is called #cj for that player2 on either player winning his third stroke1 the score is called #dj for that player2 and the fourth stroke won by either player is scored game for that player1 except as below3 ,if both players have won three strokes1 the score is called deuce2 and the next stroke won by either player is scored advantage for that player4 ,if the same player wins the next stroke1 he wins the game2 if he loses the next stroke the score returns to deuce2 and so on1 until one player wins the two strokes immediately following the score of deuce1 when game is scored for that player4 #ba4 ,the player who first wins six games wins the set2 except as follows3 ,if both players win five games1 the score is called games all2 and the next game won by either player is scored advantage game for that player4 ,if the same player wins the next game1 he wins the set2 if he loses the next game1 the score returns to games all2 and so on1 until either player wins the two games immediately following the score of games all1 when he wins the set4 ,but individual clubs1 at their own tournaments1 may modify this rule at their discretion4 #bb4 ,the players shall change sides at the end of every set2 but the umpire1 on appeal from either player1 before the toss for choice1 may direct the players to change sides at the end of every game of each set1 if1 in his opinion1 either side have a distinct advantage1 owing to the sun1 wind1 or any other accidental cause2 but if the appeal be made after the toss for choice1 the umpire can only direct the players to change sides at the end of every game of the odd or deciding set4 #bc4 ,when a series of sets is played1 the player who served in the last game of one set shall be striker-out in the first game of the next4 #bd4 ,the referee shall call the game after an interval of five minutes between sets1 if either player so order4 #be4 ,the above laws shall apply to the three-handed and four-handed games1 except as below3 #bf4 ,in the three-handed game1 the single player shall serve in every alternate game4 #bg4 ,in the four-handed game1 the pair who have the right to serve in the first game shall decide which partner shall do so2 and the opposing pair shall decide in like manner for the second game4 ,the partner of the player who served in the first game shall serve in the third1 and the partner of the player who served in the second game shall serve in the fourth2 and the same order shall be maintained in all the subsequent games of the set4 #bh4 ,at the beginning of the next set1 either partner of the pair which struck out in the last game of the last set may serve1 and the same privilege is given to their opponents in the second game of the new set4 #bi4 ,the players shall take the service alternately throughout the game2 a player cannot receive a service delivered to his partner2 and the order of service and striking out once established shall not be altered1 nor shall the striker-out change courts to receive the service1 till the end of the set4 #cj4 ,it is a fault if the ball served does not drop between the service line1 half-court line1 and service side line of the court1 diagonally opposite to that from which it was served4 #ca4 ,in matches1 the decision of the umpire shall be final4 ,should there be two umpires1 they shall divide the court between them1 and the decision of each shall be final in his share of the court4 ,,odds4 ,a bisque is one point which can be taken by the receiver of the odds at any time in the set except as follows3 7a7 ,a bisque cannot be taken after a service is delivered4 7b7 ,the server may not take a bisque after a fault1 but the striker-out may do so4 ,one or more bisques may be given to increase or diminish other odds4 ,half fifteen is one stroke given at the beginning of the second1 fourth1 and every subsequent alternate game of a set4 ,fifteen is one stroke given at the beginning of every game of a set4 ,half thirty is one stroke given at the beginning of the first game1 two strokes given at the beginning of the second game2 and so on1 alternately1 in all the subsequent games of the set4 ,thirty is two strokes given at the beginning of every game of a set4 ,half forty is two strokes given at the beginning of the first game1 three strokes given at the beginning of the second game2 and so on1 alternately1 in all the subsequent games of the set4 ,forty is three strokes given at the beginning of every game of a set4 ,half court3 ,the players may agree into which half court1 right or left1 the giver of the odds shall play2 and the latter loses a stroke if the ball returned by him drops outside any of the lines which bound that half court4 ,,the ,,balls4 ,the balls shall measure not less than #b-ae_/cb inches1 nor more than #b inches in diameter2 and shall weigh not less than #a-ae_/af oz41 nor more than #b oz4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,the ,may-,pole ,dance4 ,,chapter ,,vi4 ,,may-,,day4 ,ho6 the merrie first of ,maie ,bryngs the daunce and blossoms gaie1 ,to make of lyfe a holiday4 ,,in the merry heart of youth the old song still finds an echo1 and this day1 with its relics of pagan customs1 celebrating1 in the advent of spring1 nature's renewed fertility1 is a festival full of fun for the children4 ,some of the ceremonies of ,may-day1 handed down from generation to generation1 were brought to ,america in old colonial days by the ,english1 but owing1 perhaps1 to the stern puritanical training of most of the early settlers1 the customs did not thrive here as in the mother country1 and many of them have died out altogether4 ,may-day is one of the many holidays still celebrated1 that originated among the pagans ages ago1 and it is said that the practice of choosing a ,may-queen and crowning her with flowers is a remnant of the ceremonies in honor of ,flora1 the goddess of flowers1 which were held in ,rome the last four days of ,april and the first of ,may4 ,there was1 at one time1 a very pretty custom observed in ,merrie ,england of fastening bunches of flowering shrubs and branches of sycamore and hawthorn upon the doors of those neighbors whose good lives and kindly habits were thus recognized by their friends4 ,the maids and matrons of ,england formerly had a way of their own of observing the day4 ,on the first of ,may they would all go trooping out with the earliest rays of the morning sun1 to bathe their faces in the magic dew1 which glistened upon the grass once a year only1 and was supposed to render the features moistened with it beautiful for the next twelve months4 ,when the writer was a wee little girl there lived next door to her home two old maiden ladies1 who always kept a bottle of ,may-dew among their treasures4 ,although the ladies in question had long since passed that period when maidens are supposed to be lovely1 superstitious persons might have found confirmation of a belief in the power of the dew1 when they looked upon the sweet and kindly faces of these old maids4 ,faith in the fabled efficacy of ,may-dew will probably lose its last adherents when the two old ladies1 very aged now1 leave this world2 but other pretty customs1 from which all the superstitious elements seem to have departed1 should not be allowed to die out1 and we intend this chapter on ,may-day sports as a reminder that ,may-day is a holiday and should be fittingly celebrated by the older girls as well as the little children1 who1 in these times1 seem to be the only ones to remember the day4 ,may-day ,sports4 ,a ,may-day custom1 and a very pretty one1 still survives among the children in our ,new ,england ,states4 ,it is that of hanging upon the door-knobs of friends and neighbors pretty spring-offerings in the shape of small baskets filled with flowers1 wild ones1 if they can be obtained2 if not1 the window-gardens at home are heavily taxed to supply the deficiency4 ,when the dusky twilight approaches1 it is time for the merry bands of young folks to start out on this lovely errand of going from house to house1 leaving behind them the evidence of their flying visit in these sweetest of ,may-offerings4 ,silently approaching a door1 they hang a ,may-basket upon the knob and1 with a loud rap1 or ring of the bell1 scamper off1 and flee as though for life4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cc4 ,illustration3 ,the ,straw ,basket4 ,these little ,mayers are sometimes pursued1 but few are ever caught1 for the recipients of the baskets know that to capture a child1 carry her into the house and treat her to sweetmeats1 usually dear to the youthful palate1 will not compensate the little prisoner for being held captive and thereby missing the fun going on among the other children4 ,how to ,make ,may-baskets4 ,the dainty little baskets which are used by the ,mayers are generally of home manufacture4 ,they are made of almost any material1 and in a variety of shapes4 ,some1 constructed of card-board1 are covered with crimped tissue-paper1 or with gilt1 silver1 or colored paper4 ,they are never large unless flowers are plentiful1 and even in that case a small basket is prettier4 ,our first illustration represents a ,may-basket made of straws4 ,fig4 #cc shows the frame of this basket1 for which three straws seven inches long are required2 these are sewed together1 two and one-half inches from the bottom1 forming a tripod4 ,for the sides eighteen straws are necessary1 six on each side1 of graduating lengths2 the three top straws being five inches long and the lowest ones three and one-half inches4 ,these are sewed to the frame1 log-cabin fashion1 one upon another4 ,the bottom of the basket is made of a three-cornered piece of card-board cut to fit2 three straws1 two and one-half inches long1 hold the base of the frame in position4 ,a handle formed of three ribbons finishes off this ,may-basket very prettily2 a ribbon is tied to each corner of the basket2 the other ends meeting form a bow1 as shown in the illustration4 ,birch-bark ,baskets are quite appropriate for wild flowers1 and one in the shape of a canoe can be made from a strip of bark six and one-half inches long and four inches wide4 ,fig4 #cd gives the pattern of this basket4 ,the dotted lines show where the ends are to be sewed together2 a ribbon sewed to each end of the canoe serves for a handle4 ,card-board ,baskets1 cut after the pattern ,fig4 #ce1 can be covered with gilt1 silver1 or crimped tissue-paper as desired2 paper lace or fringe is sometimes placed around the edges of baskets of this kind1 as a border to rest the flowers upon4 ,the card-board basket shown in illustration is joined together by button-hole stitching of colored-silk floss2 slits are cut in two sides and a ribbon slipped through1 the ends of which are tied in bow-knots to hold them in place4 ,illustration3 ,fig #cd4 ,the ,birch-bark ,basket4 ,may-day ,combat4 ,this game1 although suggested by the ceremonies which1 according to ,waldron1 usher in the month of ,may in the ,isle of ,man1 is entirely new and bids fair to become popular1 as it combines the elements of beauty1 sentiment and mirth4 ,a number of young people separate into two parties1 each having its queen2 one the ,queen of ,may1 the other ,queen of ,winter4 ,the ,may-queen and her attendants should be decked with flowers1 ,winter and her retinue being without decoration4 ,equipped with the appropriate implements of warfare between the two seasons1 namely1 a wreath of flowers for spring and a ball of raw cotton1 or wool1 representing snow1 for winter1 the contending forces draw up in opposing lines1 the space between being about twelve feet4 ,each line is headed by its respective queen1 who holds her missile in her hand4 ,illustration3 ,the ,card-board ,basket4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ce4 ,the game is commenced by the two queens simultaneously tossing the wreath and ball to someone in the opposite line1 whose name is called as the missile is thrown4 ,should the person to whom it is thrown fail to catch it1 she is made prisoner and must do battle on the other side1 being released only when she succeeds in catching the missile belonging to her own party4 ,when the wreath and ball are caught1 they are instantly tossed back to the opposite rank1 and so the game goes on4 ,hostilities must cease when prisoners are being taken or released1 to be recommenced when both sides announce themselves ready4 ,if either queen is captured she is ransomed by the return of all the prisoners taken on her side2 should she have no prisoners to release1 the game is ended4 ,if the ,may-queen and her forces are defeated1 they must strip off their floral decorations and give them to the victors1 who1 decked in these trophies1 become the representatives of ,spring1 and the ,queen of ,winter is made ,queen of ,may and is crowned by her vanquished and dethroned opponent4 ,the former ,may-queen and her retinue1 after offering their congratulations1 must serve as attendants on the triumphant queen and do her bidding4 ,when the ,may-queen proves victorious the programme is reversed1 and ,winter and her party become the subjects of ,may4 ,the ,may-pole4 ,an old writer1 speaking of the ,may-games held in ,england1 says1 8,their cheefest jewell is their ,maie-poole10 and to leave the ,may-pole out of our list of ,may-sports would indeed deprive the day of one of its most important and prettiest features4 ,the appropriate place for the ,may-pole is1 of course1 out of doors2 yet the climate in most of our ,northern ,states is so changeable and uncertain it may be found necessary for comfort to hold the festivities in the house1 and in that case the following directions for erecting the pole in a room of moderate dimensions will be found useful4 ,how to ,erect a ,may-pole in the ,house4 ,a ,may-pole from ten to twelve feet high is as tall as the ceilings of most rooms will admit4 ,the pole should be round1 smooth1 and about five inches in diameter at the base1 growing gradually smaller toward the top4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cf4 ,for its support a wooden box is necessary1 the average size being three feet long1 two feet wide1 and one foot high4 ,remove the top of the box1 and directly in the centre of it cut a hole large enough to admit the pole4 ,take two sticks1 two inches wide1 and long enough to fit lengthwise in the box1 and two shorter ones fitting the box crosswise1 and nail them securely in the position shown in ,fig4 #cf1 driving the nails from the outside of the box4 ,slip the pole through the hole which has been cut in the top1 and then stand it in an upright position between the four sticks in the centre of the box 7,fig4 #cg74 ,be sure that the pole stands perfectly straight2 then1 before nailing down the top1 fill the box with sand1 bricks1 or stones1 packing them tightly around the pole2 this will give sufficient weight to prevent its tipping4 ,nail the top on1 and cover the box with moss or green cloth1 and bank it up with flowers4 ,how to ,dress a ,may-pole4 ,in olden times the ,may-poles were painted in alternate stripes of yellow and black1 but a white pole is prettier and shows the decorations to better advantage4 ,tack the ends of eight or ten variously colored ribbons1 one and one-half inch wide1 around the pole near the top4 ,for a pole ten feet high the ribbons should be four yards long4 ,around where the ribbons are fastened on1 suspend a wreath of flowers1 as shown in ,fig4 #ch4 ,decorate the extreme tip of the pole with gaily colored streamers1 or small flags4 ,may-pole ,dance4 ,an even number of persons are required for this dance2 half the number take the end of a ribbon in the right hand and half in the left2 they then stand facing alternately right and left4 ,when the dance commences1 each dancer facing the right passes under the ribbon held by the one opposite facing the left2 she then allows the next person going to the left to pass under her ribbon1 and so1 tripping in and out1 under and over1 the ribbons are woven around the pole4 ,after continuing for a while1 according to the above directions1 the dancers separate into two equal divisions1 and each party1 independent of the other1 plaits a strip which hangs loosely from the pole4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cg4 ,in performing this variation the two parties stand on either side of the pole1 and all those facing the right pass on in that direction1 going in and out as at first1 until the last person going to the right has passed the last person going to the left in her division2 then1 transferring the ribbons to their other hands1 they all turn and reverse the order4 ,thus they continue1 going back and forth until the plait is about a foot in length1 when another change is made by the two parties joining forces again2 this time1 all those facing the left proceed in that direction1 passing under the ribbons of all the others who are going to the right1 thus forming two circles1 one within the other4 ,after going twice around the pole in this order1 the dancers composing the inner circle take the outside and the others pass beneath their ribbons1 again circling the pole twice2 then1 after going through the first figure once more the dance may be ended1 or the whole order may be reversed1 and the ribbons1 in that way1 be unplaited again4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ch4 ,an appropriate song1 with words set to a dancing air1 should be sung by those taking part in the ,may-pole dance4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,,summer ,illustration ,,chapter ,,vii4 ,,midsummer ,,eve4 ,,in the minds of most of us1 midsummer is associated with dry1 dusty roads1 parched vegetation1 the shrill cry of the locust1,a the shriller notes of the mosquitoes1 and the hum of myriads of other insects2 but1 girls1 midsummer does not come at this time3 astronomy fixes the date at ,june #bast1 the longest day of the year1 when the leaves are still glossy green with the fresh sap circulating through their veins1 giving them that healthy1 juicy look so refreshing to the eye1 and the heat of the sun has not yet dried to a white powder the firm country roads over which we delight to wander4 ,ages ago the ,pagans used to celebrate the day with rejoicing1 because old ,sol's bright face had broken loose from the clouds of winter1 and the rain and mists of spring4 ,they symbolized the revolution of the season by rolling great wooden wheels down the hill-sides2 sometimes attaching straw to the outer circle and setting fire to it at night1 making a miniature midnight sun as it dashed down the steep incline4 ,the people also believed that ill-luck rolled away from them with the fiery wheel1 and to this day you will see ,fortune or ,misfortune represented as travelling1 like an acrobat at a circus1 upon a wheel4 ,illustration3 ,midsummer-eve ,party4 ,all the elves1 brownies1 and fays were supposed to be on hand at midsummer night1 and it is this old superstition that ,shakespeare has so beautifully illustrated in his 8,midsummer ,night's ,dream40 ,it was on midsummer eve that the supposed invisible seeds of the fern could be gathered which rendered the fortunate possessor invisible whenever he chose to carry them about with him4 ,among other strange and some quite pretty superstitions1 there is a tradition that a coal1 found attached to the roots of the mugwort or plantain on midsummer eve1 will keep away misfortune and insure good luck to the finder4 ,the girls of to-day who1 although advanced enough to discard the superstitious element1 can appreciate the poetic ideas symbolized by these ancient rites1 may take hints for the entertainment of themselves and friends from the old belief in the mysteries and charms of midsummer eve4 ,games can be invented1 and pretty keepsakes and souvenirs exchanged upon this night1 that will translate ancient paganism into modern good feeling and fellowship4 ,the ,new ,fern-leaf ,game4 ,some one who has charge of the games shows to the assembled girls and boys a fern-leaf1 and explains to them the legend connected with it1 and the power of the seed to render the possessor invisible4 ,next she blindfolds them all2 then1 choosing one from among them1 she removes the bandage from the player's eyes without allowing the others to know who has been selected to be the bearer of the magic fern4 ,after giving the fern-leaf into the keeping of the chosen one1 she places the latter in the centre of a ring formed by the rest of the players1 who take hold of hands and circle round2 then1 still holding hands1 they forward to the centre and return2 letting go hands1 they forward again1 this time the fern-bearer joins in the ranks4 ,once more the ring is formed and they circle round1 singing these lines3 ,round goes the wheel1 ,round goes the year1 ,for woe or for weal1 ,midsummer is here4 ,to the one who finds ,the seeds of the fern1 ,misfortune and evil ,to good luck will turn4 ,at the word 8turn10 each player seizes another and cries out1 8fern1 fern60 at the same time removing the handkerchief from the eyes4 ,to the one who really has captured the magic fern a pretty card or silk badge1 bearing a pictured fern and some appropriate motto1 is given1 as a token that the entire company wish all possible good luck to the possessor4 ,the ,plantain ,test4 ,to test fortune in this way1 fill a large pan or bowl with clean dry sand2 provide as many plantain-plants as there are players1 and to the roots of all but one tie1 with a narrow ribbon1 a bonbon which contains within its wrapper a verse indicating that the wrong plant has been chosen4 ,to the one reserved from the rest attach a small piece of coal1 or charcoal1 wrapped in a bonbon paper which also encloses a verse describing the magic powers of the coal4 ,place all of the plants in the sand1 making them look as though growing there4 ,all this should be prepared before the party assembles1 that no one may know to which plant the coal is fastened4 ,when the appointed time arrives1 explain to the company that to the root of one of the plants in the bowl is fastened a coal which1 according to old superstition1 will secure to the finder perfect health for life4 ,then let each person in turn pull from the sand one of the plants4 ,the one who finds the coal should be heartily congratulated1 as she is supposed to have gained the good will of fortune and to be exempt from all the ills that flesh is heir to4 ,the plantain is not difficult to secure1 as it grows in almost every grass-plot1 much to the annoyance of those who take pride in their lawns4 ,should the name be unfamiliar to some of our readers1 the accompanying illustration will help them recognize the weed4 ,illustration3 ,magic ,plantain4 ,a pretty charm for the watch-chain can be made of the coal which is to bring the finder such good luck1,b by having it cut to a proper size and shape1 and a gold or silver band put around it4 ,this will make it a souvenir1 carrying out the old idea that the magic coal should be worn upon the person to bring the coveted good fortune4 ,rhymes to be enclosed in the paper with the magic coal3 ,where my roots are intertwined ,lo1 the magic coal you find4 ,buried deep beneath the sand1 ,waiting for your favored hand1 ,i have held it free from harm2 ,take1 and wear the mystic charm4 ,from the lightning's deadly stroke1 ,from the fire it may invoke1 ,from all illness1 pain1 and strife1 ,may it guard thee safe through life4 ,rhymes to be enclosed in bonbons tied to the roots of plantains which do not bring good luck3 ,though ye seek1 ye seek in vain ,fortune's favor thus to gain1 ,for ,i bring to you no coal ,to write your name on ,fortune's roll4 ,pity 'tis you thought it best ,to pick out me from all the rest1 ,for no root of mine comes near ,the coal that brings good fortune here4 ,chance capricious1 captures choice2 ,fickle ,fortune favors few2 ,when deaf to love1 or reason's voice1 ,what makes you think she'll favor you8 ,i am no messenger of fate1 ,you find this out1 alas6 too late2 ,i bring no magic coal with me1 ,from pains and ills to set you free4 ,any bright girl can scribble off little jingles of this sort that will do very well for the plantain test1 or appropriate quotations may be selected for the purpose4 ,fortune's ,wheel4 ,just where ,fortune will fail each member of the company present is discovered in the following game3 ,the entire party forms into a circle1 standing about two feet apart2 then a wheel or hoop is started around the inside of the ring1 and kept going by each one giving it a gentle push with the hand1 sending it to the person next in the circle4 ,as the wheel goes around the players sing these lines1 pronouncing a word as each player touches the wheel1 as if counting out4 ,fortune's wheel we speed along ,the while we sing our mystic song4 ,bring happiness1 fame1 power1 and wealth1 ,true love1 long life1 good friends1 and health1 ,success in music1 poetry1 art1 ,and with it all a merry heart4 ,when the wheel drops at the feet of anyone as a gift of ,fortune is being sung1 or if they fail to strike it as it passes1 or1 striking1 they send it into the centre of the ring instead of to their next neighbor1 it denotes that ,fortune will withhold that special gift from them1 and they must leave the circle1 for good luck has deserted them4 ,the game continues until only one player remains1 and this person1 who has succeeded in keeping the wheel moving1 is ,fortune's favorite1 and will possess all the gifts the mythical ,goddess can bestow4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,starfish ,portire ,,footnotes3 ,a ,cicada1 commonly known among children as the locust4 ,b ,cannel coal is the best to use1 for it is hard1 will take a high polish like jet1 and can be carved with a pen-knife4 ,,chapter ,,viii4 ,,sea-,,side ,,cottage ,,decoration4 ,,simply to enter a house is enough to start some people to planning how it can1 might1 or should be decorated4 ,the love of beauty seems to be inherent in the feminine character1 and it is the nature of most girls to make their surroundings as beautiful as circumstances will permit4 ,those who have taste and ability for decoration can see no barren or homely room without being seized with the desire to banish its uncomeliness1 and substitute grace and beauty in its stead4 ,the ordinary cottage at the sea-shore is a boon to such natures1 for it is peculiarly well adapted to amateur decoration4 ,its ceiled walls offer plain1 even1 flat tinted surfaces for any kind of ornamentation1 and the absence of plaster makes it possible to drive nails wherever it is desirable to have them4 ,during a summer spent in one of these cottages on the coast of ,maine1 its many possibilities in the way of decoration were revealed1 and personal experience has demonstrated that even the plainest of these temporary abiding-places is capable of being greatly beautified in a short time1 and with materials usually close at hand1 being obtainable from the fishermen and from the sea itself4 ,the windows first claim our attention in any house and our little cottage is no exception to the rule4 ,with1 or without1 the regulation shades1 windows should always be draped2 the formality of their straight lines and angles can be subdued in no other way4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,ring4 ,illustration3 ,looping for ,curtains4 ,light1 airy curtains are suitable for summer1 and the prettiest1 most graceful window-drapery imaginable can be made of ordinary fish-net4 ,an oar for a pole2 rings made of rope 7,fig4 #ci72 the looping formed of a rope tied in a sailor's knot2 and a wooden hoop1 such as is used to attach the sail to the mast on a sail-boat 7,fig4 #dj7 are all that are necessary for the completion of this nautical curtain4 ,small rings screwed into the oar1 with corresponding hooks in the window-frame just above the window1 will hold the oar securely in place4 ,the looping should hang from a hook fastened in the wall near the window4 ,the illustration given here will aid the imagination in picturing the effect of a window treated in this simple manner4 ,another pretty curtain may be made of unbleached cotton1 with bands of blue at top and bottom covered with the ever-decorative fish-net4 ,gray linen curtains1 with strips of the net set in as insertion at top and bottom1 will also be found extremely pretty and serviceable2 or they may be composed of strips of linen and net1 of equal width1 running the length of the curtain4 ,made up in either way the effect is excellent4 ,illustration3 ,sea-side ,cottage ,window4 ,from window-drapery we will turn to that suitable for the door-ways4 ,portires1 in a room where the prevailing tints are gray and light wood-color1 should not present too violent a contrast to those subdued tones4 ,a curtain of wood-brown1 neither too dark nor too light1 will give the needed strength and decision1 without destroying the harmonious coloring4 ,one can be quickly and easily made of brown canton flannel and decorated with dried starfish1 as shown in the illustration of the starfish portire4 ,the starfish are soft enough to admit of being sewed to the curtain1 and they should be placed with the underside out1 as that is much prettier than the back1 showing as it does two shades of color4 ,a heavy rope with a knot at each end1 stretched taut across the door-way and held in place with two hooks1 will answer for a pole1 and the drapery can be hung from it with iron rings4 ,if the rope is very heavy the ends will have to be parted into strands before the knots can be tied4 ,figs4 #da and #db show the manner of tying the knot and fastening the end of a moderately heavy rope4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,tying ,knot4 ,illustration3 ,fastening ,end of ,rope4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,book-shelves4 ,illustration3 ,row-boat ,book-shelves4 ,book-shelves made of half of a flat-bottomed row-boat is not only an appropriate piece of furniture for a cottage by the sea1 but also a very useful one4 ,the fact of its shape allowing it to occupy a corner makes it a welcome addition to the furnishing1 since there are so few things adapted to fill that angle4 ,fig4 #dc shows half of boat with cleats nailed on to hold the shelves1 which must be made to fit the boat4 ,the shelves1 when resting on the cleats1 are secure enough1 and need not be fastened in any other way4 ,if the book-shelves1 when finished1 are painted black1 unvarnished1 they will have the appearance of being ebonized4 ,the evidence of a womanly presence in the shape of a dainty work-basket always gives a home-like look to a room1 and when this useful trifle happens to be prettily designed it contributes not a little to the decorations4 ,the standing work-basket represented here is manufactured of a crab-net1 with the handle removed1 fastened to a tripod stand4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,crab-net ,work-basket4 ,the tripod may be made of bamboo1 or any kind of straight sticks about the length of a walking-cane4 ,upon one of the sticks two notches must be cut2 one exactly in the centre1 and the other at one side just below 7see ,fig4 #dd74 ,the second stick needs but one notch1 which should match the upper one on the first stick 7,fig4 #de74 ,the third stick has no notches4 ,to fasten them together1 ,fig4 #de must be laid across ,fig4 #dd as in ,fig4 #df1 and the two fastened together with screws4 ,the third stick must then be placed across the others1 fitting in the two upper notches2 this must be secured with two screws1 one passing through each of the other sticks 7,fig4 #dg74 ,illustration3 ,crab-net ,work-basket4 ,the stand when finished should be painted black1 and the crab-net1 which has previously been gilded1 fastened in place by tying it on to each stick with a cord and tassel made of rope and gilded4 ,notches cut in the sticks1 about three inches from the top1 will afford a resting-place for the cord and keep it from slipping4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of ,hat-rack4 ,illustration3 ,hat-,rack4 ,the hat-rack1 which our drawing represents1 makes an excellent and convenient hall-decoration4 ,the materials used in its construction are a small mirror1 which can be procured at any country store2 four boards1 whose length and breadth depend upon the size of the mirror2 two oars1 with one-third of each handle sawed off2 one dozen large-sized nails1 or small spikes1 and a piece of rope about twelve feet long4 ,the frame is made by nailing the boards together as shown in illustration1 placing the end-boards on top4 ,the opening left in the centre should be one inch smaller than the mirror4 ,when eight of the spikes have been driven into the frame at regular distances the mirror must be fastened on the back with strips of leather or sail-cloth1 as shown in diagram 7,fig4 #dh74 ,the diagram also shows how the oars are held in place and the rope attached4 ,the knot in which the rope is tied is called a true-lover's knot1 and can readily be fashioned by studying the diagram4 ,small nails driven through the rope where it crosses the back of the oar will keep the loops from slipping out of place4 ,the remaining four spikes are to suspend the hat-rack from1 and must be driven into the wall so that two will hold the top loop1 and the others the extreme upper corners of the side loops4 ,the frame and oars may be painted black and the spikes and ropes gilded1 or the whole will look well painted yellow or brown4 ,a handsome screen can be made in the following manner3 ,procure a nice1 firm clothes-horse1 saw off the legs close to the bottom cross-piece1 then cover the whole neatly1 on both sides1 with dark green cambric4 ,next tack smoothly on one side of each fold light-brown wrapping-paper1 which comes quite wide1 and may be bought by the yard4 ,for the border use dark-green canton flannel cut in strips eight inches wide4 ,tack this around each fold of the screen with gimp-tacks1 and paste the inside edges smoothly over the paper4 ,the decorations of the screen shown in the illustration are composed entirely of products of the sea4 ,two panels are shown4 ,one is decorated with sea-weed1 dried starfish1 and shells4 ,sea-weed and shells also are used on the other1 but a group of horseshoe crabs take the place of the starfish4 ,sea-weed of various kinds suitable for this use can be found along the coast1 and they may be gathered and dried in this way4 ,loosen the sea-weed from whatever it is attached to1 and while still in the water slip a piece of stiff paper beneath it and lift it out4 ,quite a number can be carried on the same paper1 but they should be taken home as soon as possible and placed in a tub of fresh water4 ,the tub will give the larger kinds room to spread out1 when a smaller vessel would cramp and rumple them4 ,on sheets of paper1 of the kind used for the screen1 carefully lift each sea-weed out of the water1 and with a small camel-hair brush straighten the parts that are too much folded1 and separate those that lie too closely together4 ,should a plant be very much crumpled when taken out1 quickly replace it in the water and try again4 ,illustration3 ,marine ,screen4 ,when they have all been satisfactorily spread on the paper and have become partially dry1 they must be pressed by laying the paper which holds the sea-weed on a piece of blotting-paper or folded newspaper1 and over it a piece of linen or fine cotton cloth2 then over that another piece of blotting-1 or news-paper2 then again the paper with sea-weed1 and so on2 when all are finished the entire heap should be placed between two boards with a moderately heavy weight on top4 ,when the sea-weed is quite dry--which it will be in three or four days--it will be found that some varieties will cling closely to the paper on which they have been spread1 while others can readily be removed4 ,do not try to separate the first-mentioned kind from the paper1 but with sharp scissors neatly trim off the edges around the weed2 the paper underneath being the same as that of the screen on which it is to be pasted1 it will not show4 ,the other sea-weed can be taken from the paper and fastened to the screen with mucilage4 ,illustration3 ,horseshoe ,crab ,bag4 ,before commencing the decoration some idea of the design1 or the effect to be produced1 should be decided upon2 then with deft fingers the articles used can be glued in place4 ,when the glue is dry the whole must be given a coat of white varnish4 ,this will help to hold things in place1 and will also keep the sea-weed from chipping off4 ,an odd little bag for holding fancy work is made of two large horseshoe crab shells1 with a satin bag fastened between them and tied at the top with a bow of ribbon4 ,the main part of the bag can be of cambric the color of the satin1 cut to fit the shells1 the puff showing at the sides being of the satin4 ,illustration3 ,vase4 ,illustration3 ,candlestick4 ,a pretty little vase can be made of the shells of three sea-urchins1 of graduating sizes1 placed one upon another1 the smallest on top4 ,the small hole in the bottom of the largest one should be filled up with damp plaster-of-,paris--which will harden very quickly4 ,the other two shells must have the small holes enlarged to the size of the one at the top2 they can then be joined together with the plaster1 and the vase be used for flowers or vines4 ,a sea-urchin and good-sized starfish make the prettiest kind of a candlestick1 and the addition of a brass-headed tack on every point but one of the starfish gives it a nice finish and furnishes feet for it to stand on2 the point left without a foot forms the handle by which it may be carried4 ,the tacks should be stuck into the fish first1 and then the sea-urchin fastened on with plaster-of-,paris4 ,not more than ten minutes are consumed in making a candlestick of this kind1 and it will be found to be quite as useful as it is pretty and unique4 ,the walls of the cottage can be decorated in many ways with the beautiful ornaments the sea furnishes4 ,over one of the doors in the cottage alluded to at the beginning of this chapter there was an ornamentation that looked exactly like wood-carving1 but was only a group of starfish arranged and tacked on the wall in a decorative form4 ,the fish being nearly the exact color of the background1 the deception was almost perfect4 ,if the walls of a room are divided off into panels1 and each panel decorated in the manner described for the screen1 the effect will be most exquisite4 ,on entering such a room one might almost imagine oneself to be a mermaid1 and this a lovely chamber beneath the sea4 ,so much can be done by one's own hands it depends greatly1 if not entirely1 upon the taste or time one is willing to devote to it what this sea-side habitation shall be2 whether the little cottage shall be in harmony with its surroundings1 seemingly a part of the place1 or whether it shall be only a cheap frame-structure1 looking as though it belonged in a country town and had been carried to the coast in a capricious gale of wind1 with decorations1 if it has any1 inappropriate and unsuited to the sea-shore4 ,how to ,dry ,starfish4 ,collect the most perfect specimens of all sizes1 wash them in fresh water1 and then spread on a board in a dry place 7not in the sun7 and leave them undisturbed for a few days1 or until thoroughly dried4 ,how to ,polish ,shells4 ,wash your shells in clean1 fresh water2 procure a small quantity of muriatic acid and have in readiness two-thirds as much water as acid4 ,place the shells in a basin1 pour the water upon them1 then the acid2 let them remain a few minutes1 then take them out and wash again in clear water4 ,rub each shell with a soft woollen cloth4 ,a fine enamelled surface can be given by rubbing them with a little oil and finely powdered pumice-stone1 and then with a chamois-skin4 ,to bleach fresh-water shells to a snowy whiteness1 wash them perfectly clean and then put them in a jar containing a solution of chloride of lime1 place the vessel in the sun1 and1 when the shells are sufficiently bleached1 remove and wash them in clear water4 ,polish them in the manner before described4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,ix4 ,a ,,girl',s ,,fourth ,,of ,,july4 ,,decorations are seen here1 there1 and everywhere4 ,how beautifully the flags and streamers look as they wave in the breeze4 ,all the houses and streets are gay with bunting4 ,we listen with a thrill of patriotic excitement to the national airs played by bands of music as the different parades pass our doors4 ,the spirit of independence fills the very air we breathe4 ,whiz6 zip6 bang6 go the firearms4 ,the noise is enchanting and the smell of powder delightful4 ,this is our grand national holiday1 the glorious ,fourth1 when all the ,united ,states grows enthusiastic1 and in various appropriate ways manifests its patriotism4 ,illustration3 ,the ,fourth of ,july ,party4 ,the celebration1 commencing in the early morn and lasting until late in the evening1 gives ample time for fireworks1 games1 and illuminations4 ,and the girls can take active part in1 and enjoy these martial festivities1 help to decorate the house and grounds1 and in the evening do their part toward the illumination4 ,then there are the beautiful daylight fireworks to be sent off1 and games to be played2 all adding to the enjoyment and making up their celebration of ,independence ,day4 ,although ,interior ,decoration for the ,fourth of ,july has not been considered as necessary as the decoration for the outside of the house1 still it is appropriate and used to some extent1 especially when the house is thrown open to guests4 ,then1 with a little thought and care the home may be decked and adorned in the most attractive manner4 ,if you chance to be the happy possessor of the portrait of some revolutionary ancestor1 let this form the centre of your decorations4 ,bring forward any relics of the colonial times and make them hold a prominent place1 for all such things are historical and of great interest1 though of course they are not essential4 ,strips of bunting1 cheese-cloth1 or tissue-paper1 in red and white and blue are necessary1 and must do their part in adding to the gayety of the scene4 ,these can be arranged in festoons1 and made into wreaths1 stars etc41 to be used as ornaments on the wall4 ,there is nothing1 perhaps1 more appropriate for decoration than flags1 though it requires some ingenuity to decorate with our ,american flag on account of the blue being in one corner4 ,however we will try4 ,take two flags without staffs and baste them together as in ,fig4 #di1 bringing the blues side by side2 pleat up the top of each to the centre and you will have ,fig4 #ej with the stripes at the bottom running from end to end4 ,now take two more flags reversed1 the stripes being at the top the stars at the base1 and pleat them in the centre1 it gives the same idea in another form4 ,for this style of adornment use the flags which may be had at any dry-goods store2 they come by the bolt1 cost but a few cents each1 and are much softer and fold better than the more expensive glazed ones4 ,other modes of draping the stars-and-stripes will suggest themselves3 place the 8colors0 in different positions until some good design is found1 and you will enjoy it all the more for having made the combination yourself4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #di ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ej ,tiny flags fastened to the chandeliers1 and pinned in groups on the curtains give to the room quite a holiday appearance4 ,this is for the daylight4 ,in the evening we will have ,in-door ,illumination1 which can be made very brilliant by simply using a number of lighted candles4 ,should you desire to have it more elaborate1 the words ,liberty and ,independence can be printed on the windows by cutting the letters forming the words from thick paper and gumming them to the window-panes1 so when the room is lighted they will show plainly from the outside4 ,you may also make of tissue-paper a ,liberty-bell1 ,goddess of ,liberty1 ,american ,eagle1 and flags4 ,gum these on the edges and fasten them to the windows2 place a bright light behind them and the tints of the paper will shine out in all their brilliancy4 ,the ,goddess of ,liberty's face1 the feathers on the eagle1 and the lettering on the bell must all be drawn with a paint-brush and ink or black paint4 ,in making any or all of these1 it will be of great assistance if you secure a picture of the object to copy from4 ,having provided for the inside of the house it now behooves us to turn our attention to ,out-of-door ,decoration consisting principally of flags raised on poles1 hung from windows1 and disposed in numerous and various ways4 ,the many devices representative of our country may be used with good effect4 ,thus1 a large ,united ,states shield can be made of colored paper or inexpensive cloth tacked on a piece of card-board1 cut in the desired shape1 and the shield suspended from the window flat against the house1 as a picture is hung on the wall4 ,other emblems can be manufactured in the same way4 ,small trees or tall bushes covered all over from top to bottom with flags and streamers look beautiful1 and all the gayer1 when the wind blows1 causing them to wave and flutter4 ,fasten the flags and streamers on the tree with string4 ,some girls think that the ,illumination in the ,open ,air is best of all1 for then they can give their fancy free play1 and create all sorts of odd and novel designs4 ,the bright-colored ,chinese lanterns are very decorative4 ,suppose we begin with these4 ,fasten securely here and there1 on the lawn1 large paper ,japanese umbrellas in upright positions4 ,this is accomplished by binding the handles of the umbrellas securely to poles which have been sharpened at one end1 and planting the pointed end of the poles firmly in the ground4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ea ,illustration3 ,fig4 #eb ,from every other rib of the umbrella suspend a lighted ,chinese lantern by a wire long enough to prevent any danger of setting the little canopy on fire4 ,the effect produced is both novel and pretty4 ,a popular method of arranging the lanterns is stringing them on wires1 stretched from house to house1 or from tree to tree1 so forming1 as it were1 a fringe of lights4 ,again1 they may be placed at intervals on the ground1 fastened to trees or hung on the piazza1 some in groups of twos or threes1 others singly1 these being of many odd shapes and sizes4 ,piazzas are very good sites for the display of colored umbrellas1 which may hang1 inverted1 from the ceiling1 with a tiny lighted ,chinese lantern suspended from each rib4 ,let me repeat1 be careful not to have the wires so short that the light is in dangerous proximity to the umbrella4 ,another pleasing illumination is to make a large flag of colored-paper with strong pieces of tape pasted along both top and bottom1 the ends of the tape extending beyond the flag4 ,tie the tape to two trees1 poles1 or pillars of the porch1 and place a light back of the flag1 to bring out the colors clearly and distinctly4 ,illuminated tents are made by placing poles in the fashion of ,fig4 #ea1 and using large flags1 low-priced colored cloth or strong paper as a covering1 ,fig4 #eb4 ,the corners are tied down to pegs in the ground1 and1 when two or three candles are set in the tent1 the effect is very pleasing4 ,all young people delight in the noise and excitement of ,fireworks1 and here are some pyrotechnics which any girl can easily make4 ,they are daylight fireworks1 and most of them may be sent off from a balcony or window1 and all with no danger of fire or burns4 ,one of the simplest to try is the ,parachute4 ,illustration3 ,parachutes4 ,cut a piece of tissue-paper five inches square1 twist each corner and tie with a piece of thread eight inches long1 ,fig4 #ec2 wrap a small pebble in a piece of paper and tie the four pieces of thread securely to the pebble1 ,fig4 #ed4 ,this makes a light airy little parachute1 which1 when sent out from the window1 will1 with a favorable wind1 sail up and off over the house-tops4 ,make a number of parachutes in different colors and send them off one after another in succession4 ,next we will have what we call ,thunderbolts ,illustration3 ,thunderbolts fashioned of bright-colored tissue-paper4 ,cut the paper in pieces four inches wide and eight inches long4 ,then cut each piece into strips reaching about one-third of the length of the piece of paper 7,fig4 #ee71 pinch the uncut end of the paper together and twist it tightly so that it will not become undone 7,fig4 #ef74 ,open the window and throw these out a few at a time4 ,they will turn heavy end down and dart off with the fringed end fluttering4 ,now and then they will waver a moment in one spot1 and then dart off in another direction2 so they go whirling1 zigzagging and bowing as if they were alive4 ,something different from these are the comical little ,whirls1 made by cutting circular pieces of writing- or common wrapping-paper into simple spiral forms 7,fig4 #eg74 ,the centre of the spirals are weighted by small pieces of wood1 or other not too heavy substance gummed on the paper4 ,illustration3 ,whirls4 ,when a number of these are freed in mid-air the weight will draw the spirals out1 and present a curious sight1 as with serpentine motion they all come wriggling and twisting toward the ground 7,fig4 #eh74 ,in these paper fire-works1 we know of nothing prettier than the ,winged ,fancies1 consisting of birds and butterflies4 ,the birds may be cut out of wrapping-paper1 measuring seven and a half inches long and ten inches from tip to tip of the wings 7,fig4 #ei71 a burnt match stuck in and out of the neck1 will give the bird sufficient weight4 ,when tossed from a height these paper swallows fly and skim through the air in the most delightful birdlike fashion4 ,both birds and butterflies are folded through the centre lengthwise1 then unfolded and straightened out1 this helps to give them form and they fly better4 ,the patterns here given are possibly not as graceful in shape as could be made1 but the writer drew the patterns from the best fliers among an experimental lot of winged fancies1 having found them better than others that could boast of more beauty4 ,illustration3 ,the ,bird4 ,butterflies are made of bright colored tissue-paper cut from the pattern 7,fig4 #fj71 and have short pieces of broom-straws as weights4 ,these also should be lightly thrown from a height1 when they will flutter and fly downward1 sometimes settling on a tree or bush as if seeking the sweets of flowers1 and appearing very bright and pretty as they float hither and thither on the air4 ,illustration3 ,the ,butterfly4 ,a ring of the ever-twirling ,pin-wheels is gay and attractive1 just the thing for the lawn on the ,fourth of ,july4 ,to manufacture one1 select a nice firm barrel-hoop1 and nail it securely on one end of a clothes-pole or broom-stick 7,fig4 #fa71 sharpen the other end of the pole to a point2 if the hoop seems inclined to split when nailing1 first bore holes with a gimlet or burn them with a red-hot nail or wire for the nails to pass through4 ,cover the barrel-hoop several inches deep with straw1 lay the straw on and tie it down with string4 ,prepare a number of pin-wheels by cutting squares of red and white and blue paper1 fold them twice diagonally through the centre and cut the folds up within a short distance of the middle4 ,turn over every other point to meet the centre1 pierce the four points and the centre with a pin1 then fasten the pin firmly to the end of a stick4 ,the pin must be left long enough to allow the paper to turn easily4 ,stick the straw wreath full of pin-wheels1 then plant the pole securely in the ground and you will have a ring of ,fourth of ,july pin-wheels which will look pretty all day long4 ,illustration3 ,pin-wheel4 ,be sure to place the wreath facing the breeze1 so the pin-wheels may be kept in constant motion4 ,reserve the ,bombs until the last4 ,they are simple in construction1 but quite startling when they go off4 ,fasten together two very stiff flat pieces of steel 7,fig4 #fb71 those sold for the back of dress-skirts work well1 and use a strong string many yards long to tie them with4 ,bring up the four ends of the steels and tie them with a slip knot 7,fig4 #fc71 in order that it may easily fly open4 ,place the cage thus formed in the centre of a square piece of tissue-paper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fb ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fc ,now cut strips of different colored tissue-paper1 four inches long1 and twist each piece at one end4 ,put these in the centre of the cage and bring up the four corners of the square of paper1 allowing the string to come out of the top4 ,twist the corners together and close up the small openings by folding over the edges of the paper4 ,this makes a bomb somewhat resembling a common torpedo enlarged to many times its original size4 ,pass the string through a screw-eye which has been screwed in the end of a flag-pole or broomstick1 and place the pole out of the window4 ,then drop the end of the string down to the lawn below4 ,fasten one end of the pole in the window by binding it firmly to a strong1 heavy chair1 or secure it in any other way most convenient so there will not be the slightest danger of its falling4 ,everything being ready1 descend to the lawn1 and pull the string so the bomb will rise slowly up to the pole4 ,when it is within a short distance of the screw-eye1 give the twine a sudden sharp jerk which will cause the bomb to come in contact with the pole with sufficient force to untie the slip-knot1 the elastic-metal ribs will fly back causing the bomb to burst and fill the air with bright shreds1 flying1 gliding1 and darting everywhere in the most eccentric manner1 making the air brilliant with floating colors4 ,let your ,fourth of ,july ,lawn ,party partake of the patriotic traditions1 and as far as possible help to celebrate our ,nation's birthday in an appropriate manner4 ,paper fire-works may form part of the entertainment1 it being optional with the hostess whether they come before or after the games1 or are interspersed between them4 ,the party opens with the signing of the ,declaration of ,independence4 ,to each guest is given a brown-paper bag1 and when all have assembled on the lawn1 the hostess steps forward facing the company1 and asks all to kindly keep quiet and listen for a few moments while she reads or repeats their ,declaration of ,independence1 she then reads3 ,we girls are1 and of right should be1 free and independent of all boys' sports1 having resources and amusements befitting the celebration of the ,fourth of ,july1 independent of all those belonging exclusively to boys4 ,then follows the signing of the same1 by each in turn writing her name beneath the declaration4 ,this accomplished1 the hostess gives the signal and each guest fills her bag with air1 by holding it close to her mouth1 gathering it tightly around1 and blowing into it1 then grasping it firmly in the right hand1 being careful not to let any air escape4 ,at another signal1 all simultaneously bring their hands forcibly and quickly together1 striking the paper bags with the left hand1 which bursts the bags and causes a report almost equal to that of pistols4 ,all the bags exploding at one time1 gives a salute worthy of the name and creates much merriment4 ,the salute may be varied by bursting the bags in quick succession1 so that it will sound something like a volley of musketry4 ,this introduction is followed by games to be played on the lawn4 ,for the new game of ,toss1 make nine disks of card-board1 painted or covered with paper1 red and white and blue1 three of each color4 ,place in the centre of the lawn a fancy waste-basket1 and let each player in turn stand at a distance of six feet from the basket4 ,it is better to have the station marked by a stone or stick1 at the place designated4 ,if played by sides1 two stations1 one on either side of the basket will be necessary4 ,the object of the game is to throw the disks into the basket1 and they are valued according to color2 red counts one1 white two1 and blue three4 ,if played by sides1 each side should play five rounds1 ninety being the highest possible tally for any one player4 ,this is an easy and pleasant game1 and may be played with or without sides4 ,the hostess keeps account1 and at the end of the game gives a knot of red1 white1 and blue ribbons as a prize to the one having the highest score4 ,we hardly recognize our old friends in the new and gigantic ,fourth of ,july ,jackstraws4 ,these are all in holiday attire1 and so much larger than any we have seen that they are even more attractive1 and afford greater amusement than those which we have hitherto enjoyed4 ,it does not take long to make them4 ,cover a number of light slender sticks1 three or four feet long1 with paper or cloth1 some red1 some white1 and others blue4 ,the colors count respectively1 red one1 white two1 and blue three4 ,provide another longer stick with a hook in one end to be used in taking the jackstraws from the pile4 ,stand the sticks up so as to meet at the top1 and spread out like a tent at the bottom4 ,each player then takes the hook in turn and tries to remove a jackstraw1 without shaking or throwing down any of the others4 ,the one scoring the highest1 wins the game and is entitled to the prize4 ,progressive games seem to be very popular1 and deservedly so1 as they possess an interest peculiarly their own4 ,here is a new and novel one1 called ,progressive ,mining4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fd ,it is played with flower-pots filled with sand or loose earth1 called mines4 ,a small flag on a slender staff is placed upright in the centre of each flower-pot 7,fig4 #fd74 ,the staff should be stuck down in the sand only just far enough to keep it steady in its position4 ,each player in turn removes a little sand from the mine with a stick called a wand1 taking great care not to upset the flag2 for the one causing the flag to fall loses the game4 ,the number of mines needed will depend upon the number of persons playing1 as one flower-pot is required for every two players4 ,each one taking part in the game1 is provided with a wand4 ,slender bamboo canes make excellent wands1 and may be decorated with red1 white and blue ribbons1 tied on the handles4 ,should the canes be difficult to procure1 then any kind of light slender stick will serve the purpose4 ,the hostess should prepare blank envelopes1 each containing a ribbon badge1 or score sheet1 of different colors1 two of each2 these are all numbered1 the figures being painted or pasted on the ribbons to designate the place to be taken1 thus two reds are marked #a1 meaning that they are to occupy the first or prize mine4 ,the blues are marked #b1 showing that they take the second mine1 and so on4 ,the last or lowest place is called the booby mine4 ,each badge should have a small pocket attached 7,fig4 #fe71 for holding stamps2 these are cut in any desired form from gold and silver paper1 which has previously been covered with mucilage on the under side1 like a common postage-stamp4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fe ,the hostess passes around the envelopes1 each guest takes one1 and upon opening it discovers where and with whom she is to play4 ,the preliminaries being settled1 and all having taken their places1 the hostess starts the game by ringing a little bell4 ,when one of the players at the prize mine upsets the flag1 the other calls out prize1 and if the flags have not already fallen in the other mines1 the couples play as quickly as possible until all the flags are down4 ,the winner at the prize mine fastens a gold stamp on her ribbon badge1 while the loser at the booby mine1 ornaments hers with silver seal4 ,the game is now rearranged1 the winner at the prize mine remains at her station1 and the loser goes down to the booby mine1 while all those winning at the other mines move up1 each one respectively to the next higher mine1 for it is only at the prize mine where the loser moves her place and the victor remains stationary4 ,when these details are settled1 the flag-staffs are again planted in the flower-pots and the signal given for a new game4 ,the player with the largest number of gold stamps on her score-sheet1 receives the victor's prize1 and the one having the most silver stamps is entitled to the booby prize4 ,the prizes are given when the game is ended4 ,they should consist of some pretty little article made by the hostess herself1 and1 if practicable1 appropriate to the day1 such as a delicate satin sachet in the form of a ,liberty bell1 with the lettering painted on it4 ,a pretty pin-cushion1 with a cover made of a miniature silken flag1 or a dainty pen-wiper in the shape of ,liberty's cap4 ,other more expensive gifts are not in good taste4 ,the booby prize should be something grotesque or comical4 ,as the mothers and sisters of #aggf took a full share in the hardships and trials of the ,revolution1 and actively assisted in gaining our independence1 it is eminently fit and proper that ,american girls should show their appreciation of such bravery and heroism by assisting in the annual celebration of our famous ,independence ,day4 ,fourth of ,july seems heretofore to have been considered altogether too exclusively a boy's holiday1 and it is with a hope of stimulating a renewed activity1 and awakening in the heart of every girl in the ,united ,states a sense of proprietary interest in the day1 that we suggest new methods of celebrating our national holiday4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,x4 ,,printing ,,from ,,nature',s ,,types4 ,,last summer we made some lovely impressions of flowers1 leaves1 and sprays2 then we tried landscapes and all sorts of beautiful designs4 ,it is really delightful and fascinating work4 ,you are led on and on1 always with a fancy to try something else to see how it will come out1 and seldom1 if ever1 is it a disappointment or failure1 a new interest being felt with every fresh print made4 ,moreover1 you are sure of having your picture original and the only one of its kind1 for as no two flowers or leaves are precisely alike1 so no print can be an exact copy of another4 ,and then it takes only a few moments for the work which could not be accomplished in thrice the time should a drawing be made of the same design4 ,let me tell you how to make an 8,impression ,album0 a book of printed flowers and leaves4 ,you who have houseplants will find it a delightful winter recreation1 a novel pleasure1 and you can enjoy the pretty work even more during your summer vacation1 with wild flowers at your command4 ,illustration3 ,making ,prints4 ,the 8prints0 are taken from the natural flowers or leaves themselves4 ,girls who have no knowledge at all of drawing or of printing can with little trouble make these ,impression ,albums1 and students of botany will find the work supplies valuable memoranda of leaves and plants1 as the print preserves details of the form1 fibre and veining of foliage and petal such as no drawing or photograph can4 ,the printing can be made wholly accurate1 giving all the minuti of construction4 ,illustration3 ,pink ,oxalis4 ,the tools required to make these print-pictures are simple1 and consist of a piece of glass1 a palette-knife or table-knife and some printers' ink which comes in small tin boxes and can be procured at any stationery store1 and a pad made of a ball of cotton tied in a piece of soft silk or satin4 ,illustration3 ,smilax4 ,illustration3 ,evergreen ,moss4 ,the printers' pad used by the writer for spreading the ink1 was manufactured of the satin lining taken from a gentleman's old hat1 and answered the purpose admirably1 being a good size1 measuring nearly four inches in diameter4 ,the album itself may be a common blank-book1 with every other leaf cut out1 in order to make room for the prints1 which are on pieces of blank unruled paper of uniform size1 and small enough to fit in the album and leave a margin all around the piece inserted1 so that the book when opened may be neat and attractive4 ,having all your tools at hand1 select the leaves you wish to print4 ,these must be free from dust or dew and perfectly fresh4 ,first1 with your knife1 place a small quantity of printers' ink on the piece of glass and smooth it as evenly as possible over the surface4 ,then press the printers' pad down lightly1 lifting1 and again pressing1 until the ink is evenly distributed on the pad2 next1 select a leaf and place it face1 or right side1 downward on a piece of folded newspaper2 press the inked pad down on the under side of the leaf1 which is now1 of course1 lying upward1 repeating the operation until the leaf is sufficiently covered with ink4 ,carefully place the leaf1 inked side down1 on the centre of the piece of paper you have previously cut for the album2 over this lay a piece of common yellow wrapping-paper1 or any paper that is not too thick or stiff1 and rub the finger gently all over the covered leaf4 ,remove the outside paper and very carefully take up the leaf4 ,you will find an exact impress of the natural green leaf showing every one of the delicate fibres4 ,illustration3 ,skeleton ,geranium ,leaves4 ,the picture is now ready to be pasted in the album1 with a thin1 delicate paste1 touching only the corners4 ,it is a good plan to write under each leaf the name of the plant or tree from which it was taken1 with the date1 and such facts as you would like to recall4 ,very valuable botanical collections can thus be made4 ,flowers are more difficult to print than leaves1 owing to less 8relief0 in the films2 still they make charming pictures when successfully treated1 sometimes having the appearance of photographs of flowers with all the lights and shadows4 ,illustration3 ,a ,winter ,landscape4 ,printed from ,nature's ,type4 ,when printing flowers1 proceed in the same manner as with the leaves4 ,sweet peas1 roses1 daisies1 wild carrot1 clover1 and verbenas1 all make beautiful impressions which look like photographs4 ,grasses of various kinds also print well4 ,in making a spray1 it is best to have a definite idea of the form you desire it to take4 ,if possible secure as a copy a natural spray of the kind you wish to print4 ,then first print all the leaves in the positions they are to occupy1 and connect them by drawing in the branch with pen and ,india-ink4 ,illustration3 ,maple ,leaves4 ,printed from ,nature's ,type4 ,the ,winter ,landscape is printed from dried twigs1 grasses1 and little leafless plants1 so arranged as to resemble trees and shrubbery4 ,only have a little confidence and you can make etchings from nature4 ,should you not understand drawing or composition1 do not be discouraged2 obtain a picture to copy1 and then hunt up little plants and soft twigs as nearly as possible corresponding in shape and character to the trees in the copy2 in this way you can produce very creditable landscapes4 ,botanical impressions maybe used for 8fancy work0 by being printed on satin1 and the decorated satin made up as though it were painted or embroidered2 patches for silk quilts have been prettily decorated by this process4 ,the printings also make beautiful patterns for outline work1 much truer to nature than those made in any other manner and afford infinite variety for 8borders0 and 8corners40 ,even satin dresses can be beautifully ornamented with impressions of leaves instead of the 8hand painting0 so long in use4 ,you can1 of course1 see that should several colors of printers' ink be used1 beautiful combinations and pleasing variety would be obtained1 and that probably some unique and novel decorations would be secured4 ,letter-paper ornamented with a delicate design printed from nature's types is very dainty and pretty1 and in many other forms can these simple and beautiful decorations be used4 ,then bring leaves and blossoms from the woods or door-yard1 and half an hour may be delightfully spent in printing 8impressions0 which will teach a lesson in botany1 while the great variety of leaf forms1 difference in texture1 fibre1 veining and finish cannot fail to attract your attention and call forth your admiration4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,corn ,roast4 ,,chapter ,,xi4 ,,picnics1 ,,burgoos ,,and ,,corn-,,roasts4 ,,traces of foreign ancestors are apparent occasionally in most of us1 true ,americans though we be4 ,it is perhaps a spice of gypsy blood in our veins that sets our pulses throbbing with pleasant excitement when1 seated in an old hay-wagon1 we go bumping and thumping down the road prepared for a delightful holiday4 ,with camp-kettle swinging beneath1 and coffee-pot stowed safely away within the wagon1 do we not feel able to provide as savory dishes for our picnic dinner as any concocted by the gypsies themselves8 ,surely no coffee is ever so delicious as that cooked over the camp-fire1 albeit it tastes somewhat smoky when prepared by hands inexperienced in the art of out-door cooking2 but if the fish we broil is a little burned1 and the baked potatoes rather hard in the middle1 who cares8 ,hearty1 healthy appetites1 which the early morning drive through the fresh1 exhilarating air has developed1 laugh at such trifles and dinner is voted a success in spite of sundry mistakes and mishaps in its preparation4 ,there are picnics and picnics4 ,when one drives out in a fine carriage to meet a fine company1 and partake of a fine lunch prepared by fine servants1 is one kind4 ,when one goes with a large party1 on a boat1 and takes a lunch of sandwiches1 cake1 pickles1 hard-boiled eggs1 etc41 which is spread on the grass at the landing and eaten as quickly as possible1 is another kind2 but the picnic most enjoyed by young people who are not afraid of a little work1 which is only play to them1 is the one where the raw materials for the dinner are taken and the cooking1 or most of it1 is done1 gypsy fashion1 by the picnickers themselves4 ,a pleasant innovation in the ordinary routine of a picnic is ,a ,burgoo4 ,thirty or forty years ago the men of ,kentucky1 in celebration of a holiday1 would get up what they called a burgoo4 ,in character it was very much like the clam-bake of to-day1 but instead of chowder1 or baked clams1 the company prepared and partook of a soup or stew made of almost everything edible4 ,early in the morning the party would meet at the appointed place and decide what each should contribute toward the making of this most delectable stew4 ,those who were fond of hunting would go forth in search of birds1 squirrels1 rabbits1 and game of all kinds1 with which the woods were filled4 ,some caught fish1 and others provided fowl1 pork1 vegetables1 and condiments4 ,as the ingredients were brought in1 those who had charge of the cooking prepared and dropped them into an immense pot which1 half full of water1 was suspended over a roaring fire4 ,when everything of which the stew was composed was cooked to shreds1 the burgoo was pronounced done1 and was served in tin cups1 and eaten with shell spoons1 made by splitting a stick and wedging a mussel-shell in the opening4 ,that this was a most appetizing feast ,i know from an old gentleman who has frequently attended the burgoos and partaken of the stew4 ,of course at a picnic composed of girls and boys1 it would not do to depend upon the game which might be shot and the fish which might be caught1 for the dinner1 but the burgoo should be adapted to the ways and means of the party1 and each member should provide something for the stew4 ,the following recipe will make enough for fifteen or twenty persons4 ,burgoo ,stew4 ,two pounds of salt pork1 the same of lean beef2 two good-sized chickens1 or fowls of any kind2 two quarts of oysters1 the same of clams2 twelve potatoes1 four turnips1 one onion1 two quarts of tomatoes1 and any other vegetables which may be obtainable4 ,make a bouquet of parsley1 celery1 and a very little bay-leaf1 thyme and hyssop1 tied together with thread4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ff ,put the beef1 fowl1 pork1 oysters1 clams and a handful of salt in a large iron kettle1 three-quarters full of water2 skim it before it begins to boil hard1 and add the other ingredients2 keep the kettle covered and boil until the bones fall from the meat4 ,serve hot with crackers4 ,wild game and fish may also be added to the recipe4 ,when a burgoo is decided upon1 it is best to prepare a light lunch to be eaten about eleven o'clock1 and have the heartier meal at four or five in the afternoon1 as it requires some time for the stew to cook4 ,our illustration shows four ways of suspending the kettle over the fire4 ,while the girls are preparing the ingredients for the stew1 the boys will build a fire in some such fashion as is shown upon page #ace1 and put the kettle on4 ,the best way to boil coffee is to make or build a kind of little stove of stones and mud1 and set the coffee-pot on top1 as shown in ,fig4 #ff2 this will prevent the smoky taste it is apt to have when placed directly on the fire4 ,a ,corn-roast4 ,during the season when green corn is plentiful1 there is no better way of having a real jolly time than by getting up a corn-roast4 ,it is not as elaborate an affair as the burgoo4 ,some green corn1 a long pole sharpened at one end1 for each member of the party and a large fire built in some open space where there will be no danger of causing conflagration makes us ready for the corn-roast4 ,several summers ago a gay party of friends from ,new ,york and vicinity took possession of and occupied for a few months a little cottage at a place on the coast of ,maine called ,ocean ,point4 ,illustration3 ,then ,the ,boys will ,build ,the ,fire ,in ,some ,such ,fashion and ,put ,the ,kettle on4 ,toward the end of ,august1 when all places of interest had been explored1 when the stock of shells1 starfish1 and such like treasures had grown beyond the accommodation of an ordinary trunk1 and the minds of the sojourners were beginning to be filled with thoughts of a speedy return home1 green corn1 for the first time that summer1 made its appearance4 ,this was hailed with delight1 and a farewell lark1 in the form of a corn-roast1 was promptly proposed and almost as promptly carried into execution4 ,the place selected on which to build the fire was a large rock jutting out into a little cove called 8,grimes ,cove40 ,here the party met about three o'clock in the afternoon1 each member bringing only such dishes as were considered necessary for his or her own use4 ,it is needless to say that the supply was not very plentiful1 many limiting themselves to a cup and spoon2 still as the supper was to consist merely of roasted corn1 bread and coffee1 these answered every purpose4 ,not only was the corn roasted on the ends of the long poles1 but bread was toasted1 and in true ,american fashion it was eaten piping hot4 ,one of the gentlemen1 much to the amusement of the rest of the party1 produced a piece of breakfast bacon1 which he fastened on to the end of his pole and toasted over the glowing embers1 declaring that it was better cooked in that way than in any other4 ,yes1 corn-roasts are great fun1 and they can be held almost any place where a large fire can be safely built4 ,it is best to allow the fire to burn down until it is a glowing pile of coals2 then sticking the sharp end of a pole into an ear of corn 7,fig4 #fg71 and standing as far from the fire as the length of the pole will permit1 it can be held close to the hot embers until thoroughly cooked2 then with butter and salt this roasted corn is excellent eating4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fg ,enough corn should be provided to allow several ears to each member of the party1 as mishaps are liable to occur1 and the tempting ear of corn may be devoured by the flames1 instead of the person for whom it was intended4 ,the poles1 about six feet in length1 should be as light as possible1 for if too heavy they will tire the hands and arms of those holding them4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,white ,clover ,design4 ,,chapter ,,xii4 ,,botany ,,as ,,applied ,,to ,,art4 ,,there is a book of most lovely designs open to everyone whose eyes are open to see4 ,grasses1 leaves1 blossoms1 and even buds and seed-vessels supply material for beautiful patterns4 ,we need not look far for suggestions4 ,truly 8that is best which lieth nearest2 shape from that thy work of art40 ,at your very doorway the wonders of botany may be studied4 ,carefully inspect the tree blossoms in the early spring2 the maple1 willow1 birch1 any in fact which happen to be convenient1 and you will find suggestions of rare designs4 ,clover1 plantain1 pepper-grass1 dandelions1 vines and twigs1 offer ideas which can be adapted to ornamental art4 ,a love of nature will quicken and stimulate the faculties2 take the flowers and plants for instructors1 and they will teach and guide you4 ,though there cannot be found an exact duplicate of any blossom or leaf1 still these may be conventionalized by arranging them in all sorts of symmetrical designs4 ,there is no mystery about the matter1 for all the designs are conceived upon the most simple of geometric laws4 ,we are now following in the steps of the old masters1 and an unlimited field of new combinations opens before us4 ,when making designs for this chapter1 the writer did not select the objects she thought would be most decorative1 but anything which chanced to fall in the way2 and what she has done you can do1 provided1 of course1 that you have ordinary skill with the pencil4 ,the ,peony ,leaf4 ,suppose you do not know how to draw at all6 ,even then you can design4 ,take the first thing you see1 which in this case happens to be a peony leaf 7,fig4 #fh74 ,that is1 assuming that you are seated by the side of the writer4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #fi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ga ,fig4 #gb ,fig4 #gc ,now watch6 ,we will pull it apart thus 7,fig4 #fi74 ,next with a pair of scissors1 a knife1 or fingers snip off the stems1 and group the leaves in any way we chose4 ,we will try this combination 7,fig4 #gj74 ,if you do not understand drawing1 we must fasten the leaves down upon a piece of paper as they are arranged1 and trace around them1 following their edges with a pencil until the outline is complete 7,fig4 #gj74 ,by simply repeating this figure at regular intervals we have a very pretty border design and one that is truly original1 for the writer had no more idea than you1 what was to be the result of this experiment4 ,in order to make the pattern exact1 draw lines as in ,fig4 #ga1 for a guide2 then draw the figure according to the foundation lines 7,fig4 #gb74 ,when finished1 erase the lines and the design stands a conventionalized peony leaf1 ,fig4 #gc4 ,by making a tracing of the first pattern1 you can repeat it any number of times4 ,it requires no great or peculiar genius to design well1 and it is a mistaken1 old-fashioned idea to suppose because you never have done any original work in art that you never can4 ,do not slavishly follow other people1 but believe that there is implanted in you the same elements that belong to those whose designs you admire1 then commence and design for yourself4 ,that you may have a start in your new art1 we will try something else1 a vegetable this time1 for here comes the green-grocery man with a basket full of as quaint decorations as are ever painted with bamboo-handled brush by the ,japanese4 ,a ,bunch of ,turnips4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gd ,bunch of ,turnips ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ge4 ,take the first bunch of vegetables on the top of the basket4 ,what are they8 turnips8 ,well that requires a little skill as a draughtsman1 but we will sketch this one and you can copy it 7,fig4 #gd74 ,now repeat it 7,fig4 #ge71 or place the bunches in a row and you will have another border design4 ,after a few experiments you will see that anything will make a decoration even the humble kitchen vegetables4 ,decorative ,lines4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gh4 ,fig4 #gf4 ,fig4 #gg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #gi4 ,illustration3 ,fig #hj ,figs4 #gf and #gg are simply graceful curves1 such as anyone can make with a pen or pencil1 and may be used in many ways3 cross them and they form ,fig4 #gh1 use this as half the design1 duplicating it for the other half and it gives ,fig4 #gi4 ,we now have graceful and beautiful foundation lines on which any vine or flower may be placed as ornamentation4 ,we will select the rose1 allowing the lines to form the stems and using as ornament the bud1 flower and seed-vessels1 remembering that one side must be an exact duplicate of the other 7see ,fig4 #hj74 ,with these curves invent new designs by placing them together in different ways1 and choose for decoration anything which may strike your fancy4 ,plant ,cross-section ,designs4 ,have you ever noticed how curiously some leaves are curled before opening8 ,watch them as they commence to expand and grow1 and you will be delighted with the great variety and unique designs formed by the folding and rolling of these leaf-buds4 ,cut a bud square across in the centre with a sharp knife1 and this will show the nicety of arrangment of the young leaves4 ,the leaf-bud of the sage 7,fig4 #ha71 rosemary 7,fig4 #hb71 apricot 7,fig4 #hc71 and still another variety of pattern 7,fig4 #hd71 are all singular natural designs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ha ,fig4 #hb ,fig4 #hc ,fig4 #hd ,the petals of flower-buds are also folded in many ways1 affording odd designs2 if cut in like manner as the leaves1 the cross-sections will be as beautiful4 ,fig4 #he1 the lilac bud1 and the oleander 7,fig4 #hf71 give some idea of these odd designs4 ,submit all kinds of buds to the test by cutting them in halves1 and carefully examining the two parts1 observe how nicely and orderly the leaves are folded together4 ,in this way you will find many natural ornamental patterns4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #he ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hf ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hg ,nor must we neglect the seed-vessels2 when these in their turn are cut open1 they present excellent designs4 ,fig4 #hg is a cross-section of the seed-vessel of the harebell4 ,other seeds will furnish queer forms and figures to be obtained in no other way4 ,flower ,sprays4 ,the common white clover with its trefoil leaf is very pretty1 and if a few sprays are placed together in a graceful manner it is surprising how readily they lend themselves to decoration4 ,experiment with these1 gather a few blossoms and leaves1 group them on the centre of a piece of paper1 and make an outline of the group2 then trace it off in order to repeat the copy at equal intervals from the central figure 7see illustration1 page #ach72 this makes a very simple and yet beautiful design for embroidery1 needle-work1 or wall-paper pattern4 ,in the same manner try grasses and different kinds of flowers4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hh ,conventional designs can also be formed by simply inclosing a natural spray in a geometrical figure4 ,fig4 #hh is a circle1 but a square1 triangle1 diamond1 oval1 or any geometrical figure may take the place of the circle4 ,changing the ,color of a natural object gives still another style of ornamental art4 ,a spray of flowers and leaves in one color on a background of different tint is an example4 ,the spray may be brown on a yellow background1 or a dull blue on white background1 either way it will be conventionalized4 ,so you see that by merely making natural objects all in one tint1 you can have a great variety of designs suitable for china1 embroidery1 wall paper1 and many other decorations4 ,it is instructive to examine the panels1 screens1 or painted china of the ,japanese4 ,there is a freedom and crispness about their ornamental art1 which is very attractive4 ,the method the ,japanese frequently employ is to diminish the size of the fruit or flowers while increasing the size of the leaves1 and vice-versa2 in this way they invent designs without losing the character of the object they copy1 and it is really a very simple1 yet effective method4 ,suppose you try and see what you can make with it4 ,the next time you have an opportunity1 notice how the ,oriental artists carry out this idea in their decorations1 and it will help you in making your designs4 ,burs4 ,the tenacious little burs found clinging to your dress after a country walk1 when grouped together are not without beauty4 ,fig4 #hi is formed of four of these burs placed at right angles making an ornament1 and when the ornament is repeated at regular intervals as in ,fig4 #ij1 it forms a border design4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #hi ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ij4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ia ,seeds with downy or feathery tails are well adapted for decorations2 three grouped together 7,fig4 #ia71 is a design of itself1 which may also be re-duplicated 7,fig4 #ib74 ,the horse-chestnut or buckeye is decorative1 and makes an odd design 7,fig4 #ic74 ,also the seed-vessel of the ,velvet-leaf or ,abutilon avicenn 7,figs4 #id and #ie74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ib4 ,the ,water-,lily4 ,in the illustration of the water-lily1 the writer has conventionalized it by curving the stem around the flower and duplicating the same1 always making the stem meet the next lily1 then inclosing the flowers in two straight lines1 so forming a water-lily border4 ,now1 girls1 you can realize how very simple it is to apply botany to art1 and make for yourselves new and original designs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ic4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #id4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ie4 ,the knowledge of plants is not only interesting but useful in connection with art1 in selecting and determining appropriate designs for wood-carving1 hammered brass1 or any kind of ornamentation or decoration4 ,the cross-section of some trees will furnish very good designs and the differently formed roots of plants and flowers will aid you in ornamental art4 ,so we find that ,nature offers us exquisite designs1 in many shapes and forms1 and we have only to stretch out our hand and take what we want4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #if4 8,beauty doth truly inhabit everywhere10 for 8it is mind alone that is beautiful1 and in perceiving beauty1 we only contemplate the shadow of our own affections40 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,a ,,door-,,step ,,party ,,quiet ,,games ,,for ,,hot ,,weather ,,chapter ,,xiii4 ,,door-,,step ,,party ,,and ,,quiet ,,games ,,for ,,hot ,,weather4 ,,in the ,state of ,kentucky1 in one of whose towns the writer's early childhood was spent1 the summers are long1 and frequently very hot spells occur when even in the early morning hours there is no refreshing coolness in the air4 ,as the sun rises higher and higher in the heavens1 its rays grow fiercer and fiercer1 until by afternoon1 the heat is so intense that few persons care to venture out of doors1 unless compelled by business or necessity to do so4 ,at dusk1 however1 after the heat of the day is spent1 and the air1 although not cool1 is a degree or two less hot1 the population of the town makes itself visible4 ,ladies and children clad in the thinnest of white and light colored muslin gowns1 emerge from the houses to sit upon piazza and door-step1 and there welcome the husband1 father1 and brothers of the family upon their return from business2 that business which is never neglected no matter what the thermometer may register4 ,after tea the door-steps are once more taken possession of1 and to enter the house again until ready to retire for the night1 is not to be thought of4 ,friends and neighbors making social calls are received and entertained informally upon the door-steps1 and sometimes when the party becomes too large for the steps to accommodate1 chairs are placed upon the pavement immediately in front of the door1 and no one feels1 while occupying one of these seats1 that the position is at all public or conspicuous4 ,hatless and bonnetless as all of the ladies and children are1 the warmth of the evenings making all head coverings and extra wraps unnecessary and uncomfortable1 the streets present a gay and fte-like appearance seldom seen in our eastern towns4 ,at least this is as it was when1 as one of the band of merry children1 ,i played 8,oats-peas-beans0 and 8,come ,philanders10 upon the sidewalk1 and ,i do not think these customs have changed much since then4 ,later1 when ,i and my young friends had outgrown the 8ring-around-arosy0 games1 we used to gather upon the door-step1 and there chatter away about the day's doings1 or whatever interested us at the time4 ,when tired of talking1 we would amuse ourselves by playing quiet games or telling stories4 ,sometimes the thoughtful mother of our young hostess would add to our enjoyment by serving some light refreshment1 such as ice-cream or fruit4 ,the greatest treat1 and the one most appreciated1 was when we were invited to partake of a great crisp frozen water-melon1 whose blood-red core1 sweet as sugar and cold as ice1 quickly melted away between the rosy lips of the little guests4 ,we were not always thus favored1 however2 the refreshments were ever a pleasant surprise1 but the pleasure of our evening was not marred by their absence4 ,the remembrance of what very pleasant times we used to have at these impromptu little parties1 urges me to devote some pages of this book to the description of a door-step party1 that by acting upon the suggestion1 others may enjoy them even as did that group of little ,kentucky girls4 ,now is just the time for a door-step party2 now when the beauty of the evening lures us from the lighted parlor to the shadowy piazza whose coolness is so attractive after the long1 hot summer day4 ,here soft breezes fan our cheeks1 and here1 perhaps1 the moonlight filtering through vine and trellis1 is carpeting the floor with lacy shadows1 and with its soft mysterious light is casting a glamour over all familiar things4 ,it is a modest little fte1 this door-step party1 a simple way of entertaining one's friends of a summer evening when the heat will not permit of the exertion of active games4 ,the delightful out-door surroundings give it a novel charm and make it entirely different from the frolics usually indulged in during the winter season4 ,because the entertainment is not noisy it need not be the less enjoyable1 and a party of bright1 merry girls will derive plenty of amusement and fun from the quiet games of a door-step party4 ,the following will give an idea of what games are suitable for an occasion of this kind4 ,five ,minutes' ,conversation is not exactly a game1 although there are rules which must be obeyed in order to make it interesting4 ,a programme with small pencil attached1 like the one shown in ,fig4 #ig1 should be given to each guest upon her arrival4 ,the engagements for five minutes' conversation are made by putting your name down on your friend's card opposite the time chosen for your conversation with her4 ,five minutes only are allowed for one conversation4 ,two or more consecutive engagements with one person are not allowable4 ,when engagements are made and programmes filled1 the hostess1 or anyone willing to be time-keeper1 must ring a bell giving notice that the conversation is to begin4 ,at the end of five minutes the bell is to be rung again1 when all talking must instantly cease1 the exchange of positions be quickly made1 and a new conversation be commenced4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ig ,the time-keeper should be strictly attentive to her duties1 for the bell must be rung regularly at the end of every five minutes4 ,the hour allotted to this new mode of conversation will pass very quickly1 and cannot become in the least tiresome1 as the time spent in talking to any one person is so very short4 ,blind-man's ,singing-school4 ,one of the party must be blindfolded to take the part of teacher4 ,the class composed of the rest of the players should sit in a line facing her4 ,the teacher informs her scholars that they will begin the lesson by singing the scales4 ,then the head girl1 or the one at the top of the line1 sings ah6 and the next1 ah6 a little higher or lower1 and so it goes down the line2 each one in turn uttering ah6 in any key or note she please2 in a high shrill voice1 or the deepest tone a girlish throat is capable of4 ,the teacher should listen attentively1 and when she thinks she recognizes a voice she must command the class to stop while she makes some criticism on the manner in which the note is sung1 at the same time calling the singer by name4 ,when one of the players is named correctly1 she must be blindfolded and become teacher1 while the former teacher takes her place in the class4 ,a general exchange of seats is made before the singing lesson recommences1 that the voices may not be guessed by the direction from which they come4 ,to give variety to this game the second teacher may direct the class to sing a song1 selecting some well-known nursery rhyme2 then1 beginning at the top of the line as before1 each player must sing the word which comes to her to supply4 ,it is the privilege of each teacher to direct the class to sing whatever she may choose1 either song or exercise4 ,a ,game of ,noted ,men1 is played in this way3 ,the hostess begins the game by saying1 ,i know a celebrated poet2 the first part of his name is very black1 and the last is an elevation4 ,whoever gives the right name1 which is ,coleridge 7coal1 ridge71 in her turn describes the name of some noted person4 ,she may choose ,shakespeare and say1 ,i give the name of a noted author and poet2 the first part is something people are apt to do when they are cold1 the last is a weapon of warfare4 ,there are quite a number of names which will do nicely for this game2 a few of them are-- ,wordsworth--words1 worth4 ,cornwall--corn1 wall4 ,howitt--how1 it4 ,milman--mill1 man4 ,shelley--shell1 lea4 ,washington--washing1 ton4 ,fillmore--fill1 more4 ,longfellow--long1 fellow4 ,when giving a name to be guessed1 the profession of the man1 whether poet1 author1 statesman1 or soldier1 must be given1 but nothing else should be told about him4 ,what will ,you ,take to the ,picnic8 can be played very nicely while the party are enjoying some light refreshments4 ,the hostess alone should be in the secret1 and these directions are addressed only to her4 ,commence the game by announcing that you propose to give a picnic1 that it depends upon what your guests will bring for lunch whether they will be allowed to attend1 and that each one must furnish two articles of food4 ,then ask the person nearest you1 ,what will you take to the picnic8 ,if the name of neither of the articles she mentions commences with the initial letter of her ,christian name or surname tell her she cannot go1 and put the question to the next person1 asking each in turn1 ,what will you take to the picnic8 ,for example1 we will suppose that the name of one of the party is ,susan ,davis1 and she says she will take crackers and lemons1 she cannot go1 as neither of her names commence with ,c or ,l2 but if she proposes to take salmon and doughnuts1 she will be doubly welcome1 since ,s and ,d are both her initials4 ,should she say sugar and cream1 she could go for one of her names commences with ,s4 ,continue to put the question to each player until all1 or nearly all1 have discovered why their proposed contribution to the lunch secures them a welcome1 or debars them from attending the picnic4 ,assumed ,characters4 ,in this game some well-known novelist is selected--,dickens1 for instance--and each player chooses one of his characters to personate1 telling no one her choice4 ,then one of the players relates the life as though it were her own1 and portrays with voice and gesture the character she has assumed4 ,of course no names must be mentioned4 ,the person who first guesses what character is being personated has the privilege of deciding who shall be the next to tell her story4 ,the game of ,assumed ,characters will prove to be very entertaining if each player does her part and makes her narrative as amusing and interesting as possible4 ,shadow ,verbs4 ,a white sheet is fastened tightly across a ,french window1 or doorway opening upon the piazza1 and a large lamp set behind it4 ,the company separates into two parties2 one enters the house1 while the other remains seated upon the piazza facing the suspended sheet4 ,the outside party chooses a verb which the others are to guess and perform4 ,when their decision is made they call the leader of the inside party and say1 8,the verb we have chosen rhymes with rake10 or whatever it may rhyme with4 ,the leader then joins her followers and consults with them what the first guess shall be4 ,it is best to take the verbs which rhyme with the noun given in alphabetical order4 ,bake would come first for rake1 and if it is decided that they shall act this1 several of the party step before the lamp1 which casts their shadows on the sheet and1 without speaking1 go through the motions of making and baking bread4 ,if the guess is right 7that is if to bake was the verb chosen7 the spectators clap their hands2 if wrong1 they cry1 ,no1 no4 ,when they hear the no1 no1 the actors retire and arrange what to do next4 ,make1 quake1 take1 wake are all acted in turn1 until the clap of approval announces that they have been successful in guessing the verb4 ,then the actors take the seats vacated by the spectators1 who in their turn enter the house to become shadows and act the verbs chosen by the other party1 and the game goes on as before4 ,a little ingenuity on the part of the players in producing funny and absurd shadows makes the whole thing very laughable and causes great amusement4 ,there are an unlimited number of games that may be played1 but the object of this chapter is not so much to describe the games as it is to illustrate those that are appropriate to the quiet and delightful entertainment known as a door-step party4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xiv4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,hammock4 ,,underneath the spreading branches of the cool1 shady tree swings our hammock4 ,through the intertwining boughs the golden sunlight is sifted in bright little dashes on the leafy foliage below4 ,lying ensconced in its lacy meshes idly listening to the hum of the busy bumble-bees at work among the red clover1 or gazing up through the leafy canopy to the blue heavens where now and then fleecy white clouds float softly past1 or watching a flight of birds skim o'er the distant horizon1 who would not be lulled by the harmony of the summer day6 ,a delightful languor steals over us and we unconsciously drift into the land of dreams where perfect rest is found4 ,we awaken refreshed1 to again gently swing back and forth and vaguely wonder who could have first thought of this most delightful invention4 ,it is said that we owe the luxury to the ,athenian1 ,general ,alcibiades1 who1 in #dae ,b4,c4 first made the swinging bed4 ,the word hammock is taken from hamacas or hamac1 an ,indian word which ,columbus relates as being used by the ,indians to signify a hanging bed composed of netting4 ,what these uncivilized red men made with their rude implements1 we ought to be able with our modern facilities to accomplish very easily and quickly4 ,illustration3 ,home-made ,comforts4 ,illustration3 ,mesh-sticks4 ,it is not difficult to make a hammock2 anyone can soon knit one that is strong and comfortable1 and it should not cost more than fifty cents4 ,the materials required will be one hammock-needle about nine inches long 7this can be whittled out of hickory or ash1 or purchased for ten cents72 two iron rings two and one-half inches in diameter1 which will cost about five cents each2 two mesh-sticks or fids1 one twenty inches long and eight inches wide bevelled on both edges 7,fig4 #ih73 the other nine inches long and two and one-half inches wide1 bevelled on the long edge 7,fig4 #ii72 these you can easily make yourself from any kind of wood4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajj4--;,hammock ,needle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aja4--,the ,loop4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajb4--,small ,fid and ,loop4 ,one pound of ,macrem cord number twenty-four1 or hammock twine of the same number1 which can be had for less than thirty cents2 colored cord comes five cents extra4 ,wind the cord in balls1 as it is then more convenient to handle1 and begin making your hammock4 ,first1 thread the needle by taking it in the left hand and using the thumb to hold the end of the cord in place1 while looping it over the tongue 7,fig4 #ajj72 pass the cord down under the needle to the opposite side and catch it over the tongue2 repeat this until the needle is full4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajc4--;,first ,half of ,knot4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajd4--;,construction of ,knot4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aje4--;,a ,number of ,knots4 ,next1 make a loop of a piece of cord two yards long and fasten this to any suitable place 7,fig4 #aja7--;a door-knob will do very well2 then tie the cord on your needle three inches from the end to this loop4 ,place the small fid under the cord1 the bevelled edge close to the loop 7,fig4 #ajb74 ,with your thumb on the cord to hold it in place while you pass the needle around the fid1 and with its point toward you1 pass it through the loop from the top1 bringing it over the fid1 so forming the first half of the knot 7,fig4 #ajc74 ,pull this taut1 holding it in place with your thumb while throwing the cord over your hand1 which forms the loop as in 7,fig4 #ajd74 ,then pass the needle from under through the loops1 drawing it tight to fasten the knot4 ,hold it in place with your thumb1 and repeat the operation for the next knot4 ,fig4 #aje shows a number of these knots finished4 ,a is a loosened knot1 making plain its construction4 ,b1 in ,figs4 #ajc1 #ajd1 and #aje1 is the cord running to the needle1 and ,d is the fid4 ,when thirty meshes are finished shove them off the fid 7,fig4 #ajf71 as this number will make the hammock sufficiently wide4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajf4--,meshes4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajg4--;,commencing the ,second ,row4 ,commence the next row by again placing the fid under the cord1 and take up the first mesh1 drawing it close to the fid2 hold it in place with your thumb while throwing the cord over your hand2 pass the needle on the left hand-side of the mesh from under through the loop thrown over your hand 7,fig4 #ajg72 pull this tight and you will have tied the common knitting-knot2 proceed in like manner with all the loops in rotation until the row is finished4 ,when it is necessary to thread or fill your needle1 tie the ends of the cord with the fisherman's knot shown in ,fig4 #ajh1 which cannot slip when properly tightened4 ,wrap each end of the cord from the knot securely to the main cord with strong thread to give a neat appearance to the hammock4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ajh4--;,fisherman's ,knot4 ,continue knitting until thirty rows are finished4 ,then use the large fid1 knitting one row on the short side first1 next one on the long side4 ,this accomplished1 knit the meshes to the ring by passing the needle through it from the top1 knitting them to the ring in rotation as if they were on the mesh-stick or fid 7,fig4 #aji74 ,when finished tie the string securely to the ring1 and one end of your hammock is finished4 ,cut the loop on which the first row was knitted1 and draw it through the knots4 ,tie the end of the cord on your needle to the same piece used in fastening the end of the first needleful to the loop 7,fig4 #aaj71 and knit the long meshes to the other ring as described4 ,this completed1 the hammock is finished4 ,illustration3 ,on the ,ring4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aaj ,to swing it1 secure two pieces of strong rope and fasten them firmly to the iron rings1 the length of the rope depending upon the space between the two points from which you wish it to hang4 ,these should be if possible twelve or fifteen feet apart and at least ten feet high1 to give your hammock sufficient room to swing freely4 ,this suspended bed will furnish a welcome retreat when the weather is too warm to admit of games1 walks1 or other amusements4 ,then1 with some favorite book1 or if even reading is too much of an exertion1 simply to lie indolently in the hammock is a comfort1 so restful and quiet that the time quickly passes1 and we are made better and brighter for our short1 passive repose4 ,very decorative nets1 and useful ones of many kinds1 including fish-nets and minnow-seines1 are made with the same stitch as that used in the hammock4 ,the size of the mesh is regulated by the circumference of the fid1 and the twine used is fine or coarse1 according to the style of net desired4 ,barrel ,hammock4 ,when in the ,catskills last summer the writer saw for the first time a hammock made of a barrel4 ,it was painted red and looked very cheery and inviting hanging under the green boughs2 the two colors1 being complementary1 harmonized beautifully4 ,this hammock was made of a piece of strong rope twenty feet long threaded in and out of barrel staves1 and was substantial and durable4 ,the construction of such a hammock is very simple4 ,remove the top and bottom hoops and nails from a firm1 clean barrel4 ,then before taking off the remaining hoops draw a pencil-line around both ends of the barrel1 being careful to have the marking three inches from and parallel to the edges2 this is for a guide when making the two holes in each end of all the staves4 ,bore the holes with a five-eighth of an inch augur or a red-hot poker1 using the pencil-line as a centre2 leave an equal margin on both sides of the staves1 and at the same time enough space in the centre to preclude all danger of breakage4 ,illustration ,fasten the staves together by threading the rope through the hole from the out side of the first stave1 then across the inside of the stave down through the other hole 7see illustration74 ,continue threading until one side is finished1 then in like manner thread the other side4 ,knock off the remaining hoops and the staves will appear as shown at bottom of illustration4 ,tie the two ends of the rope together and fasten loops of rope on both ends2 these should be of sufficient length to conveniently swing the hammock4 ,when threading the staves let the rope be loose enough to leave a space of an inch or so between each stave when the barrel is spread out in the form of a hammock4 ,in this way you can have a serviceable hammock1 the cost of which will be about twenty-five cents and a little labor4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,grandmamma's ,dolls4 ,,chapter ,,xv4 7,,for ,,little ,,girls47 ,,corn-,,husk ,,and ,,flower ,,dolls4 ,,no such beautiful dolls as delight the hearts of the children of to-day1 ever peeped forth from the ,christmas-stockings of our grandmothers or great-grandmothers when they were little girls4 ,in those times there were not1 as there are now1 thousands of people doing nothing but making toys for the entertainment and pleasure of the little ones1 and the motherly little hearts were fain to content themselves with lavishing unlimited affection and care upon a rag1 wooden1 or corn-husk baby1 made and dressed at home4 ,since then almost every child tired of1 and surfeited with handsome and expensive toys1 has been glad at times to get grandma to make for her a real old-fashioned dollie which might be hugged in rapturous moments of affection without fear of dislocating some of its numerous joints1 or putting out of order its speaking or crying apparatus2 and might in times of forgetfulness be dropped on the floor and suffer no injury thereby4 ,such a doll is just the kind to adopt for the summer4 ,the fine ,french doll with its delicate wax or china face1 silky hair1 and dainty toilets1 is more suited to the elegances of the parlor than to the wear and tear of out-door life1 and everyone knows that summer holidays spent in the country are far too precious to be wasted taking care of anyone's complexion1 let alone a doll's2 so it is best to leave the city doll in her city home1 safe out of harm's way1 and manufacture1 from materials to be found in the country1 one more suited to country surroundings4 ,corn-husks1 corn-cobs1 and ordinary garden flowers can be made into dolls which1 although not quite so pretty nor so shapely as those produced from more costly material1 yet possess a charm of their own which the children are not slow to perceive4 ,little ,indian girls1 to whom store babies are unknown1 make the most complete and durable corn-husk dolls1 and the following directions tell just how to construct them3 ,illustration3 ,head ,commenced4 ,illustration3 ,the ,corn ,husk4 ,illustration3 ,corn-husk ,tied4 ,illustration3 ,head ,finished4 ,illustration3 ,head and ,arms4 ,provide yourself with the husks of several large ears of corn1 and from among them select the soft white ones which grow closest to the ear4 ,place the stiff ends of two husks together1 fold a long1 soft husk in a lengthwise strip1 and wind it around the ends so placed as in ,fig4 #aaa4 ,select the softest and widest husk you can find1 fold it across the centre and place a piece of strong thread through it 7as in ,fig4 #aab71 draw it in1 tie it securely 7,fig4 #aac71 place it entirely over the husks you have wound1 then bring it down smoothly and tie with thread underneath 7,fig4 #aad72 this will form the head and neck4 ,to make the arms1 divide the husks below the neck in two equal parts1 fold together two or more husks and insert them in the division 7,fig4 #aae74 ,hold the arms in place with one hand1 while with the other you fold alternately over each shoulder several layers of husks1 allowing them to extend down the front and back4 ,when the little form seems plump enough1 use your best husks for the topmost layers and wrap the waist with strong thread1 tying it securely 7,fig4 #aaf74 ,next divide the husks below the waist and make the legs by neatly wrapping each portion with thread1 trimming them off evenly at the feet4 ,finally1 twist the arms once or twice1 tie1 and trim them off at the hands4 ,the features can be drawn on the face with pen and ink1 or may be formed of small thorns from the rose-bush4 ,fig4 #aag shows the doll complete1 minus its costume1 which may be of almost any style or material1 from the pretty robe of a civilized lady to the more scanty garments of its originator1 the ,indian4 ,the doll is represented in full ,indian costume in ,fig4 #aah4 ,the war-paint and tomahawk are not necessary here1 as he is smoking a pipe of peace4 ,his apparel is composed of one garment1 which is cut from a broad1 soft corn-husk1 after the pattern given in ,fig4 #aai4 ,a narrow strip of husk tied about his waist forms the belt4 ,illustration3 ,head1 ,arms1 and ,body4 ,illustration3 ,finished ,doll4 ,his head-dress is made of small chicken feathers stuck at regular intervals into a strip of husk4 ,the corn-silk hair is placed on his head1 and on top of that one end of the head-dress is fastened with a thorn4 ,a small twig is used for the stem of his pipe1 and two rose-bush thorns form the bowl4 ,instead of using a thorn for his mouth1 a round hole is punched in the face and the stem of the pipe inserted4 ,illustration3 ,a ,real ,indian ,doll4 ,illustration3 ,the ,indian's ,dress4 ,mary ,jane4 ,here is another way of making a doll which is very easy and simple4 ,first find a young ear of corn1 one on which the silk has not turned brown2 then with a crab-apple for a head and a leaf of the corn to dress her with1 you have your material4 ,cut off squarely that end of the ear where the husks are puckered1 to join the stalk1 and carefully take the silk from the other end1 disturbing as little as possible the closely wrapped husks4 ,roll part of the leaf 7as indicated in ,fig4 #abj7 for the arms1 then with a small twig fasten the head to the arms2 stick the other end of the twig into the small end of the corn-cob1 and the doll is ready for dressing4 ,her bonnet is made of the leaf just where it joins the stalk 7,fig4 #aba71 and is fastened to her head with a thorn4 ,before adjusting the bonnet1 however1 the silk must be placed on the head to form the hair4 ,illustration3 ,material and ,parts of ,doll4 ,illustration3 ,mary ,jane4 ,make the scarf of part of the leaf 7,fig4 #abb71 fold it around the shoulders1 and secure it with thorns4 ,the features also are made of thorns4 ,when her toilet is complete1 you can but acknowledge that this rosy-cheeked little maid1 peeping from beneath her poke-bonnet1 is very cunning indeed4 ,flower ,dolls4 ,illustration ,the flower lady with the baby is made of a yellow gourd flower2 the small gourd attached1 which has just begun to form1 serves for her head2 a green gourd leaf is used for her shawl1 and her bonnet is made of a smaller leaf folded to fit her head4 ,the baby is a white gourd bud1 with a cap made of a leaf4 ,a small twig stuck through part of the lady's shawl1 through the baby1 and into the lady doll1 holds the child in place and makes it appear as though clasped in the mother's arms4 ,the features of both dolls are scratched on with a pin and then inked4 ,to make the lady stand erect1 a small twig is stuck into the heart of the flower1 and the other end into the top of a small paste-board-box lid4 ,the other flower doll is made of the common garden flowers4 ,the underskirt is a petunia2 a ,canterbury-bell forms the over-skirt and waist2 small twigs1 or broom-straws stuck through buds of the phlox1 are the arms1 and the head is a daisy with the petals cut off to look like a bonnet4 ,the features are made with pen and ink on the yellow centre4 ,a reversed daisy forms the parasol4 ,if the flowers named are not at hand1 those of a similar shape will answer just as well4 ,gaily dressed little ladies can be made of the brilliantly tinted hollyhocks1 and many other flowers can also be transformed into these pretty though perishable dolls4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xvi4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,fan4 8,that graceful toy whose moving play ,with gentle gales relieves the sultry day40 ,a ,,fan is only a pretty trifle1 yet it has been made rather an important one4 ,to manage a fan gracefully was some time ago considered very essential by fair dames of society1 and in the dainty hand of many a famous beauty it has played a conspicuous part4 ,queen ,elizabeth regarded it with so much favor that she was called the 8,patron of ,fans10 and she made a rule that no present save a fan should be accepted by ,english queens from their subjects4 ,although held in such high esteem1 it is only since the influx of any and every thing ,japanese that we have had fans in such profusion1 and have discovered how effective they are when used for decorative purposes4 ,a brilliantly tinted fan is of equal value in giving just the right touch of color to a costume or the decorations of a room1 and this chapter will show how the girls can make the fans themselves1 and have for use or for the adornment of their rooms those of various shapes1 sizes1 and colors4 ,the first fan represented here is made in the form of a butterfly4 ,the principal articles necessary for its manufacture are a strip of smooth1 brown wrapping-paper1 stiff enough to keep its folds1 and two sticks for handles4 ,the ribbon which1 in the illustration1 ties the handles together looks pretty1 but is not indispensable2 an elastic band1 or one made of narrow ribbon1 slipped over the sticks will do as well4 ,illustration3 ,butterfly ,fan4 ,the paper must be twenty-eight inches long and five and one-half inches wide4 ,in order to fold it evenly it should be ruled across with lines one-half inch apart1 as shown in diagram of butterfly 7page #agi74 ,when the paper is prepared the pattern can be copied from the diagram1 which is half of the butterfly4 ,by counting the lines and using them as guides for obtaining the proportions1 an exact reproduction of this pattern can be made4 ,the outlines being drawn1 the paper must be plaited1 one fold on top of another1 until twenty-seven plaits have been laid4 ,smoothing out the paper again1 the butterfly should be painted with water-colors in flat1 even tints4 ,illustration3 ,diagram of one-half of ,butterfly ,fan4 ,the lower part of diagram is the body of the insect and is of a light-brown color1 also the space just below the head1 which is surrounded by a strip of black4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abc4 ,fig4 #abe4 ,folded ,fans4 ,illustration3 ,handle4 ,the head and eyes are black1 the eyes having a half-circle of white to separate them from the head4 ,the main part of the wings are a brownish purple1 next to which comes a border of very dark purple with light-blue spots4 ,the outer border is light yellow4 ,when the paint is quite dry the extra paper at the top of the butterfly is to be cut away4 ,again the fan must be plaited in the folds already formed1 and the plaits fastened together at one end with a strong needle and thread1 as shown in diagram 7,fig4 #abc74 ,fig4 #abd shows the shape of the handles1 two of which are required2 they should be about nine inches long1 one-third of an inch wide1 and one-eighth of an inch thick4 ,a handle must be glued to the last fold at each end of the fan 7see ,fig4 #abe74 ,the fan should be kept closed until the glue is dry1 when it may be opened and used at pleasure4 ,illustration3 ,the ,mikado ,fan4 ,our next sketch is that of the ,mikado fan1 and represents a ,japanese lady who1 with her fan held aloft1 is making a bowing salutation4 ,this fan is made of the same paper as that used for the butterfly1 and is cut the same width2 there are1 however1 twenty-nine plaits instead of twenty-seven1 as in the other4 ,the diagram gives the pattern in two parts1 and the colors it is to be painted2 the face and hands should be of a flesh-tint and the features done with black in outline4 ,the directions for putting together the butterfly apply as well to the ,mikado fan4 ,illustration3 ,pattern of ,mikado ,fan4 ,the third illustration shows a fan made in the shape of a daisy4 ,diagram on page #ahc shows a section of the pattern4 ,white paper should be used1 and it must be laid in thirty-four plaits1 which will give the flower fifteen whole and two half petals1 the half petals being at each end4 ,the tinted part of pattern indicates where it is painted yellow to form the centre of the daisy4 ,for a plain round fan no pattern is needed4 ,it is made simply of a strip of paper1 of the width used for the other fans1 and has about thirty plaits4 ,when fans of this kind are made of colored paper in solid tints they are very pretty4 ,pieces of bright1 figured wall-paper left from papering a room can be utilized1 and quite effective fans be made of them to use for decoration4 ,illustration3 ,daisy ,fan4 ,another style of fan is represented in our last illustration4 ,it is made of twenty slats of cardboard cut after pattern ,fig4 #abf4 ,these slats are joined together at the top and centre with narrow ribbon passed through the slits cut for it1 as shown in ,fig4 #abg4 ,over the ribbon where it passes through the top slits1 on the wrong side of the fan1 square pieces of paper are pasted1 which hold the ribbon down securely at these points4 ,the paper is pasted only at each end of the ribbon in the middle row4 ,it is best to leave one end of this ribbon loose until the fan is joined at the bottom2 then opening the fan1 and drawing the ribbon until it fits the fan smoothly1 it can be cut the right length and the loose end fastened down4 ,a ribbon is also used to hold the slats together at the bottom2 a bow at each side keeps them in place 7see ,fig4 #abh74 ,when a large fan for decoration is desired1 the slats should be about eighteen inches long1 two and a half inches wide at the top1 and one and a half inch wide at the bottom4 ,the fan may be larger still1 in which case it can be used as a screen to set before an empty fire-place4 ,for this purpose the slats have to be two feet long1 four inches wide at the top1 and two and a half inches wide at the bottom4 ,illustration3 ,pattern for ,daisy ,fan4 ,the proportions of the slats for a small hand-fan are eight and a half inches long1 one and a half inch wide at the top1 and one inch wide at the bottom4 ,the large fans should be made of heavier cardboard or pasteboard than that used for smaller ones4 ,illustration3 ,construction of ,cardboard ,fan4 ,colored cardboard1 which can be bought at almost any stationer's1 is the best to use1 but the slats of ordinary white cardboard may be covered with colored paper if more convenient4 ,these fans may be varied to suit the taste of the girls who make them4 ,instead of a solid color1 one can be made with alternate slats of red and white1 blue and yellow1 or any other colors that harmonize4 ,another may show all the tints of the rainbow1 and for use on the ,fourth of ,july one might display the red1 white1 and blue4 ,illustration3 ,cardboard ,fan4 ,some will look especially handsome if prettily painted4 ,a dark-red fan with a branch of dogwood-blossoms painted across it makes a charming wall decoration1 as does also one of light blue with pine-branch and cone painted in brown or black4 ,a gilt fan lightens up a dusky corner beautifully2 it can be curved around to fit the place1 and catching and reflecting the light at all angles1 as it does1 it is quite effective4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,,autumn4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xvii4 ,,all-,,hallow-,,eve4 ,,radiant and beautiful ,october1 whose changing color heralds the approach of winter1 gives us our first autumn holiday1 if ,halloween can now be called a holiday4 ,before the ,christian era1 in the days of the ancient ,celts and their priests1 the ,druids1 the eve of the first of ,november was the time for one of the three principal festivals of the year4 ,the first of ,may was celebrated for the sowing2 the solstice on the twenty-first of ,june for the ripening1 and the eve of the first of ,november for the harvesting4 ,at each of these festivals great fires were built on the hill-tops in honor of the sun1 which the people worshipped4 ,when ,christianity took the place of the heathen religion1 the ,church1 instead of forbidding the celebration of these days1 gave them different meanings1 and in this way the ancient harvest-festival of the ,celts became ,all-,hallow-,eve1 or the eve of ,all-,saints-,day1 the first day of ,november having been dedicated to all of the saints4 ,illustration3 ,kaling4 ,for a long while most of the old customs of these holidays were retained2 then1 although new ceremonies were gradually introduced1 ,hallow-,eve remained the night of the year for wild1 mysterious1 and superstitious rites4 ,fairies and all supernatural beings were believed to be abroad at this time1 and to exercise more than their usual power over earthly mortals4 ,because the fairy folk were believed to be so near us on ,halloween1 it was considered the best evening of the season for the practice of magic1 and the customs observed on this night became mostly those of divination1 by the aid of which it was thought the future might be read4 ,before proceeding further with this subject we desire our readers to appreciate and fully understand that we are far from wishing to inculcate any superstitious belief in the power of charms to forecast future events2 that we regard all fortune-telling as nonsense1 pure and simple1 and only insert it here1 as we would any other game1 for the sake of the amusement it affords4 ,although1 to make our descriptions more intelligible1 we announce the results of charms as facts1 we would not have it understood that they are to be taken as such4 ,nowadays1 so practical has the world become1 no fairy1 witch1 or geni could we conjure up1 were we to practice all the charms and spells ever known to soothsayer or seer4 ,our busy1 common-sense age allows no fairies to interfere with its concerns1 and these creatures1 who existed only in the belief of the people1 must needs vanish1 to return no more1 when that belief is gone4 ,a few fortune-telling games are all that now remain of the weird ceremonies that once constituted the rites of ,halloween1 and the spirit of this old heathen holiday is once more changed1 for it is now considered only an occasion for fun and frolic4 ,it was the custom for quite a number of years of some friends of the writer to give a ,halloween party on each recurring ,halloween2 and merrier1 jollier parties than those were1 it would not be easy to devise4 ,the home which opened wide its hospitable doors to the favored few on this night is a country-house1 large and spacious2 there is a basement under the whole lower floor1 which is divided into kitchen1 laundry1 and various store-rooms intersected with passages1 and this basement1 deserted by the servants1 was given up to the use of the ,halloween revellers4 ,the rooms and passage-ways were decorated with and lighted by ,chinese lanterns1 which produced a subdued glow in their immediate vicinity1 but left mysterious shadows in nooks and corners4 ,putting aside conventionality and dignity as we laid aside our wraps1 ready for any fun or mischief that might be on hand1 we proceeded down-stairs and into the kitchen1 where a large pot of candy was found bubbling over the fire4 ,this candy1 poured into plates half-full of nuts1 was eaten at intervals during the evening1 and served to keep up the spirits of those who were inclined to be cast down by the less pleasing of ,fortune's decrees4 ,with plenty of room and no fear of breaking or destroying anything1 which is apt to put a check upon frolics in the parlor1 the company could give full vent to their high spirits4 ,now in this room1 now in that1 again flitting through the dim passages and around dark corners1 each person seemed to be everywhere at once1 and although the party was limited to about twenty-five1 there appeared to be at least twice that number present4 ,bursts of merry laughter and little screams of pretended terror would announce1 now and then1 that some charm was being gone through with and someone's fortune being told4 ,all sorts of games were played1 and the variety of our entertainment made the evening pass very quickly4 ,all too soon the hands of the kitchen clock warned the guests that to reach home at a seasonable hour they must put an end to their ,halloween festivities4 ,a number of the following methods of telling fortunes were tried at these parties1 one might say with success1 for we certainly succeeded in accomplishing our main object1 which was1 to have a good time4 ,by ,melted ,lead we used to ascertain what the occupation of one's future husband would be4 ,the fortune is told in this way3 ,each girl1 in turn1 holds a door-key in one hand1 while with the other hand she pours the melted lead1 from an iron spoon or ladle1 through the handle of the key into a pan of cold water4 ,illustration ,in the fanciful shapes the lead assumes can be traced resemblances to all sorts of things4 ,sometimes it is a sword or gun1 which indicates that a soldier will win the fair prize2 again1 traces of a ship may be seen3 then the favored one is to be a sailor2 a plough suggests a farmer2 a book1 a professor1 or perhaps a minister2 and when the lead forms only drops1 it seems to mean that the gentle inquirer will not marry1 or if she does1 her husband will be of no profession4 ,nutshell ,boats foretell in a general way what their owner's future life will be4 ,they should be prepared beforehand in this manner3 ,split an ,english walnut directly in half1 remove the kernel1 and clear away any of the partitions which may remain in the shell2 then place a short piece of heavy cotton string in the shell and pour around it melted beeswax4 ,mould the wax into a cone shape around the string1 as shown in ,fig4 #abi1 allowing the end to come out at the top4 ,fig4 #acj shows what it is like when finished4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #abi ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acj ,the tapers first being lighted1 several of these little craft are launched at the same time1 by their respective owners1 upon the sea of life1 or1 in other words1 in a tub of water4 ,when a light burns steadily until the wax is all melted1 and the frail bark safely rides the waves 7which are occasioned by stirring the water with a stick1 or shaking the tub from side to side71 a happy life is predicted1 and a long one4 ,when two boats come in contact1 it means that their owners will meet and have mutual interests some time during their lives4 ,if one boat crosses another's path1 it denotes that their owners will do the same4 ,if two boats come together and continue to sail about side by side1 their owners will in some way pass much of their lives together4 ,when a boat clings closely to the sides of the tub1 refusing to sail out into the centre1 it shows that its owner will be a stay-at-home4 ,touching often at the side of the tub is indicative of short voyages2 and extended travel is predicted when a boat seldom touches the tub4 ,it depends a good deal upon the fancy and imagination of those testing their fate how the antics of the little fleet are interpreted1 and the meanings given to the movements of the boats create no end of fun4 8,three ,luggies40,c 8,in order1 on the clean hearth-stane1 ,the luggies three are ranged1 ,and ev'ry time great care is ta'en ,to see them duly changed40 ,the three bowls1 or dishes1 one containing clear water1 one milky1 and the other nothing at all1 are placed in a row on the hearth-stone or table1 and the girl wishing to try her fortune is blindfolded and led up to where the dishes stand4 ,she is then told to put her left hand into one of the bowls4 ,if she dips her fingers in the clear water1 she will marry a bachelor2 if in the milky water1 a widower2 and if into the empty bowl1 it is a sure sign that she will live in single blessedness all her days4 ,this ceremony must be gone through with three times1 and the hand be dipped twice in the same bowl1 in order to make the prediction of any value4 ,roasting ,nuts is the charm by which the friendship of anyone may be tested4 ,the applicant for knowledge on this point names two nuts1 one for her friend and the other for herself1 and then places them side by side upon the grate1 or a shovel held over the fire4 ,if they burn quietly1 it is prophetic of a long and happy friendship kept up by both parties2 but if in roasting they burst with a loud report and fly apart1 they are decidedly uncongenial1 and should not seek much intercourse4 ,the movements of the nuts while heating are closely watched1 for the tempers of the persons for whom they are named is said to be thus revealed4 ,kaling is a mode of telling one's fortune not as well known1 perhaps1 as the foregoing methods4 ,the ceremony is carried out in the following manner3 ,two girls are blindfolded and started off on the path to the kitchen-garden and cabbage-patch1 where each pulls up the first stalk she finds4 ,they then return at once to the house1 where the bandages are removed and the mysterious stalks examined4 ,according to the state of the stalk1 so will be the gatherer's fate4 ,if it is straight or crooked1 large or small1 so will the future husband be2 if it has a pleasant taste1 or the reverse1 the character of the person will correspond1 and the quantity of earth clinging to the roots denotes whether their riches will be little or great4 ,when there are no cabbages at hand1 almost any other garden vegetable will answer2 and if there be objections to going out-of-doors1 vegetables of various kinds1 such as turnips1 beets1 and parsnips1 may be placed on a table1 and the persons blindfolded can choose from them4 ,no doubt the charm will work as well with the plants upon a table as when they are pulled from a kitchen-garden4 ,the ,magic ,mirror1 which is simply a hand-glass on ordinary occasions1 and gains its mysterious power only on ,halloween1 divulges1 under certain conditions1 the delightful secret of how many bits of good-fortune will fall to one's share during the ensuing year4 ,the conditions are that the person wishing to know how bright her prospects are shall go to an open window or door from which the moon is visible1 and1 standing with her face in-doors1 hold her mirror so that the moon will be reflected in it4 ,the number of moons she sees there betokens the number of times something pleasant will happen to her before the advent of another ,halloween4 ,three ,tin ,cups partially filled with water are balanced on the small ends of three funnels1 which are placed in a row on the floor1 about two feet apart4 ,over these cups1 one after another1 each member of the party must leap in turn4 ,whoever succeeds in leaping over all three cups without knocking any of them off will make an early marriage4 ,the person who knocks over one will marry when not so young4 ,the marriage of the one who tips over two cups will be deferred until late in life1 and she who leaps none of them safely will not be married at all4 ,to guard against wet feet very little water should be put in the cups--only enough to make the players careful about tipping them over4 ,the ,ring ,cake is always an object of interest at ,halloween parties4 ,the cake itself is made like the ordinary kind1 but before it is baked a plain gold ring is hidden in the dough1 not to be taken out until the cake is cut and it falls to the share of the fortunate person in whose slice it happens to be found4 ,the ring is sometimes put in a flour-cake1 which is simply flour packed into a cake-mould so firmly that when it is turned out it retains the shape of the mould and can be sliced off with a knife4 ,each member of the party cuts her or his own section of flour1 and whoever secures the ring1 it is confidently stated1 will be the first of the group to marry4 ,some ,halloween games apparently have no particular meaning attached to them1 but seem to be devised for the purpose of creating as much fun as possible4 ,bobbing for ,apples is1 perhaps1 familiar to most of our readers1 but we give a description of it here for the benefit of the few who may not know the game so well4 ,in a large tub full of fresh1 cold water several apples are placed1 and it is the object of the participators to take them out of the water with their teeth4 ,as the rosy-cheeked1 tempting fruit bobs about within easy reach1 it looks simple enough to secure a prize2 but the apples are so round and slippery1 so aggravatingly illusive1 that1 unless you thrust your head and neck beneath the cold water1 regardless of consequences1 and drive an apple to the bottom1 the feat cannot be accomplished4 ,the girls can seldom be induced to try their luck in this game1 but usually content themselves with looking on1 immensely enjoying the frantic endeavors of the boys to succeed at any cost4 ,the ,apple and ,candle ,game is another favorite sport for ,halloween1 and is played as follows3 ,from the ceiling is suspended a stout cord1 the lower end of which is securely tied to the centre of a stick about a foot and a half long4 ,on one end of the stick is fastened an apple1 on the other a lighted candle4 ,the string is set in motion1 swinging back and forth like a pendulum1 and the contestants for the prize stand ready1 each in turn1 to make a grab for the apple1 which must be caught in the teeth before it can be won4 ,frequently the candle is caught instead of the apple1 which mishap sends the spectators off into shouts of merriment2 but although funny1 it is at the same time a little dangerous to catch a lighted candle in one's teeth1 and we would suggest that a bag made of cheese-cloth1 or like thin material1 be filled with flour and tied to the stick in place of the candle4 ,when the person essaying to snatch the fruit is struck in the face with the bag1 and is covered with flour instead of the glory anticipated1 as much mirth will result as can possibly arise when the old and dangerous practice of using a candle is clung to4 ,the ,ghostly ,fire should not be lit unless all of the party have strong nerves1 for the light it produces is rather unearthly1 and may affect some members unpleasantly4 ,we1 at our ,halloween parties1 never omitted this rite1 however1 its very weirdness proving its strongest attraction4 ,salt and alcohol were put in a dish1 with a few raisins1 and set on fire4 ,as soon as the flame leaped up we clasped hands and gayly danced around the table1 upon which burned our mystic fire4 ,the laughing eyes and lips looked in strange contrast to the pale faces of their owners1 from which the greenish light had taken every vestige of color4 ,the dance was not prolonged1 for it was our duty1 before the fire was spent1 to snatch from the flames the raisins we had put in the dish4 ,this can be done1 if one is careful1 without as much as scorching the fingers1 and ,i never knew of anyone burning themselves while making the attempt4 ,trying for a ,raisin is a very laughable performance4 ,the raisin1 which must be a good-sized one1 is strung on and pushed exactly to the middle of a soft cotton string about one yard long4 ,two aspirants for the prize then take each an end of the string1 which they put in their mouths and commence to chew1 taking it up as fast as they can--the raisin falling to the share of the person who succeeds in reaching it first4 ,a ,lighted ,candle is again used in a game which is exceedingly amusing4 ,the candle is placed upon a table in full view of everyone2 then one of the players is blindfolded1 turned around several times1 and set free to seek for the candle and blow out the light1 if possible4 ,to see girls1 with their hands clasped behind them1 going crazily about the room1 blowing at anything and everything1 is very ludicrous4 ,they seldom find the candle1 and even when the table is reached it is difficult to blow in such a direction as to extinguish the flame4 ,the ,fairy's ,gifts are suggested as a new and original ending of a ,halloween frolic4 ,the ,fairy ,godmother1 in ,mother ,hubbard costume1 carries a large basket under her cloak or shawl4 ,she enters the room and announces that she has a certain number of gifts which she proposes to distribute among the company4 ,after cautioning all that the contents must be kept secret1 she passes to each person a folded paper4 ,on one is written 8,wealth10 on another 8,honor10 on the third 8,fame10 etc41 and some of the papers are left blank4 ,those whose papers contain the names of gifts are then blindfolded1 preparatory to receiving their behests4 ,the first is led up and made to kneel before the ,fairy ,godmother1 to whom she repeats these words3 ,most gracious ,fairy1 the gift you give ,i shall treasure and keep as long as ,i live4 ,then the paper containing the name of the gift is handed the ,fairy1 who reads it aloud very solemnly3 8,wealth0--and1 turning to her basket1 she takes from it a new dust-pan1 to which is attached a ribbon-loop1 at the same time reciting these lines3 ,your choice is bad when you intrust ,your happiness where moth and rust1 ,in time1 turn all your wealth to dust4 ,from a paper-bag the ,fairy pours a small amount of dust over the kneeling girl1 and hangs the dust-pan around her neck4 ,the next person who has drawn a prize is then brought forward and the performance is repeated1 only altering the ,fairy's speech4 ,for 8,honor10 she will say3 ,your honor crowds shall loud declare1 ,but in your heart1 no crowd is there1 ,you'll find1 like ,falstaff1 8honor's air40 ,the present here is a pair of bellows1 from which the ,fairy blows a blast on the bowed head before her as she utters the word air4 ,the bellows1 like the dust-pan1 are hung by a ribbon around the recipient's neck4 ,for 8,fame10 the ,fairy gives a wreath of roses1 and says1 as she adjusts the crown3 ,when ,fame doth weave a laurel-wreath1 ,he weaves this subtle charm beneath2 8,for every evil thought that's born ,the laurel grows a prickly thorn2 ,but where pure thought and love reposes1 ,the laurel-wreath's a wreath of roses40 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,buckeye ,portire4 ,,footnote3 ,c ,dishes4 ,,chapter ,,xviii4 ,,nature',s ,,fall ,,decorations1 ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,use ,,them4 ,,these beautiful decorations are free to all who care to possess them4 ,every autumn comes to us laden with ornaments which no skilled workman can rival4 ,the graceful golden-rod1 so rich in color1 sways and bends over the low stone walls1 and in the fields wild flowers of all kinds grow in great profusion4 ,white1 spreading wild carrot1 yellow and white daisies1 light and dark purple asters1 and sumach1 with its varied hues1 give color to the landscape on our bright fall days4 ,there are also the queer-shaped pods and feathery1 silky seeds peculiar to some wild plants2 among others the poor 8vagabond thistle10 which has donned its robe of glistening white1 although some of its tribe still wear their faded purple gowns4 ,the latter may be gathered for thistle-puffs1 and all the objects mentioned can be used in home decorations4 ,we cannot pass by unnoticed the brown milk-weed pods1 for within the shells1 full well we know1 are hidden the silvery1 downy seeds which make such pretty milk-weed balls4 ,here1 too1 we notice the rich coloring of bark as well as foliage1 the bright scarlet berries contrasting with the brown1 yellow1 and green leaves4 ,the vine1 once a fresh green1 is now changed to deep crimson2 even the tiny leaves of the wild strawberry and some grasses have touches of red on their edges4 ,how the rich coloring of autumn differs from the delicate tints of spring1 when the promise was made in bud and leaf1 which is now realized in the bountiful harvests6 ,having such a wealth to glean from1 we scarcely know what to take first2 but for decorations to last only a few hours it would be difficult to imagine anything more brilliantly appropriate than ,fresh ,autumn ,wild ,flowers and small branches of brilliant fall leaves4 ,at the time of this writing wild flowers are very popular2 one of our daily papers records a wedding which recently took place1 where the display of wild flowers was beautiful in the extreme4 ,curtains of wood-ferns were caught back with golden-rod1 and a bower of holly and oak was fringed with clusters of scarlet bitter-sweet berries4 ,daisies were also used in abundance1 while the beauty of the little church was enhanced by the masses of white blossoms and oak-branches4 ,this idea can be used advantageously in decorating the house for evening parties and receptions1 or afternoon teas and coffees4 ,have the flowers and foliage in masses1 the effect is much better2 and if you gather very large1 hardy ferns with their roots attached they will make exceedingly graceful decorations1 and placed in water or wet sand they will remain fresh for days4 ,when golden-rod is gathered in its prime it will keep nearly all winter without fading4 ,do not put it in water2 all that is necessary is to keep it dry4 ,the rich brown cat-tails should be treated in the same manner2 these must be gathered at their best1 before they are too ripe4 ,bitter-sweet berries will last for months and retain a bright red4 ,the old-fashioned honesty1 with its white1 satiny pods1 keeps perfectly for any length of time4 ,the wild rose-bush in the fall is decked with seed-coverings1 which closely resemble scarlet berries2 these will last for many weeks4 ,the wild clematis1 with its festoons of hazy fluff1 will keep for a long time1 and always looks well when thrown over and on the top corner of a portire and allowed to hang naturally down a little on one side1 or arranged in a similar manner over the tops of windows1 doors1 pictures1 or wherever it will look graceful4 ,it should hang out of harm's way1 as it is brittle and easily broken when dry4 ,illustration3 ,a ,young ,decorator4 ,for entertainments1 the more elaborate and bountiful the decorations of fresh wild flowers the more beautiful will the house appear2 but for every-day life during the cold weather1 when we have only the dried fall plants1 we may almost make up for the lack of fresh flowers by using judgment and taste in arranging the dried ones4 ,though wild flowers are beautiful1 you must use taste in their arrangement and not mingle them together promiscuously1 but make a judicious selection1 for where a light bunch of golden-rod would be the very thing needed to give color to a particular spot1 should the dark cat-tails be placed there the effect might be lost4 ,there are places where some high1 stiff decoration would look best1 and others where the soft1 swaying clematis seems to belong4 ,as with everything else1 so with our decorations1 we must seek to have harmony4 ,who has not admired the dark-brown1 glossy buckeyes and horse-chestnuts1 and wondered what use could be made of them8 ,children love to gather them and come home with their pockets and baskets full1 only to play with them for awhile1 and then the pretty dark balls1 each marked with a spot of light cream-color1 are thrown away or lost4 ,now1 the next time the buckeyes are collected save every one and make a ,buckeye ,portire4 ,the writer assures you that you will find it much easier to do this than she did to make a picture of the curtain1 for it is difficult with a pen-and-ink drawing to give an idea of the richness of color in the handsome hangings these horse-chestnuts make when properly fashioned into a portire for hall or doorway4 ,two full bushels of buckeyes will be needed to make a curtain two yards and a half long and one yard and a quarter wide4 ,take a very large1 long needle and a strong1 waxed thread a little longer than you desire to have your curtain1 make a large knot in the end of the thread1 and commence to string your buckeyes in the same way as stringing beads or buttons4 ,continue until the thread in the needle is exhausted1 then tie the thread in a large knot close to the last buckeye1 leaving a length of three inches of thread4 ,make your other strands in the same way4 ,when all are finished1 fasten as many small screw-eyes in a straight line on a curtain-pole1 or a rustic pole if desired1 as there are strands of buckeyes1 and tie securely to each screw-eye one string of buckeyes4 ,when all are fastened on1 your portire is finished and ready to be hung4 ,this is easily accomplished if the pole used is a regular curtain-pole1 as they always come with brackets2 but should your pole be rustic1 it must be supported by bands of strong birch-bark1 or leather1 as in ,fig4 #aca4 ,our illustration shows over the portire a ,illustration3 ,birch-,bark ,support for ,pole4 ,panel of ,fall ,decorations4 ,these also look handsome over windows and doors1 and you are at liberty to use ornaments of all styles1 for the panels are placed where there is no danger of anything coming in contact with them to break off the decorations or mar their beauty4 ,any kind of board will do for the panel1 rough or smooth1 as you like4 ,paint the board a pure white1 then decide on your ornaments1 which may be a chestnut-branch with bursting burs attached1 sprays of common wayside velvet-leaf with clusters of pods clinging to them1 a piece of black-berry vine with its twigs1 thorns1 and dried berries1 or branches of buckeyes with some of the nuts falling from their horned shells4 ,select according to your fancy1 and gild the decorations chosen1 then tack them on the panel4 ,it is best to place the ornaments on the board while the paint is soft and wet1 for then it will help to fasten the decoration more securely2 if the paint be put on thick where the ornaments are to be placed1 they will lie partially embedded in the paint1 and when it dries they will appear as if carved from the wood4,d ,a white and gold panel made in this way is very pretty and inexpensive4 ,the fall decorations also enable us to make a very effective ,louis ,quinze ,screen4 ,illustration3 ,hinge for ,louis ,quinze ,screen4 ,illustration3 ,hoops ,fastened ,together for ,louis ,quinze ,screen4 ,for this it is necessary to have two small wooden hoops1 such as children roll along the streets2 fasten these together with a strong piece of white tape1 two or three inches wide1 cut the end of the tape bias1 tack this on the side of one of the hoops1 bring it around between and over the other hoop1 and tack it again1 repeat the operation and the hinge will be finished 7,fig4 #acb74 ,if you look at the hinge on a wooden clothes-horse you will understand how to make one4 ,fig4 #acc shows the hoops fastened together4 ,now cut two pieces of coarse1 strong cotton cloth1 a little larger around than the hoops1 and place one of the pieces smoothly over one of the hoops2 tack it down1 driving the tacks in far apart1 and so that they can be easily extracted2 if the cloth wrinkles1 keep changing it until the surface is perfectly even2 when this is accomplished carefully tack the covering securely down1 keeping it smooth and without wrinkles4 ,in like manner tack the remaining piece of cloth on the other hoop4 ,next get four broomsticks and cut a notch on each one1 at exactly the same distance from the top1 for the hoops to fit in4 ,then measure where you wish the hoops to be placed and cut another notch on each stick a certain distance from the bottom2 all the sticks must be of the same length and have the notches cut in the same places1 so each one may be a duplicate of the others4 ,mark the hoops where the sticks are to fit1 and then fasten them firmly on with small screws4 ,make the screen strong1 so that there will not be any danger of its coming apart4 ,give each cloth a sizing of common flour-paste on both sides1 then scrape off all the paste with a knife2 in this way the cloth will be starched and prepared to receive the paint4 ,when the screen is thoroughly dry1 sew a branch across one of the disks and some waxed fall leaves in the places where they would naturally lie on the branch2 when these are securely attached1 decorate the other disk with something different2 acorns can be used if cut in halves2 but never place any ornaments on the screen which will not lie flat1 for if they stand out they will be broken off or injured by persons passing and brushing against them4 ,now give the screen a coat of white paint all over1 including the branch and leaves1 but do not paint the hinge4 ,set the screen away until it is perfectly dry1 then gild the branches and leaves1 connecting the latter with the twigs by painting a line of gold between the two4 ,gild a ring around each pole near the top and another near the bottom1 and cover the edges of the hoops where the cloth has been fastened on by tacking white gimp around each one1 using fancy brass-headed tacks and placing them at equal distances apart2 this completes the ornamental screen4 ,illustration3 ,louis ,quinze ,screen4 ,should you desire it1 the screen can be painted black or any other color1 and the decorations bronzed instead of gilded4 ,the bronzes come in different shades1 and the color of real bronze can be easily copied4 ,a ,panel of ,field-,corn ,as an ornament for the dining-room is very decorative and easy to make4 ,when the corn ripens1 select some nice1 firm1 golden ears1 with husks and without2 then break off pieces of cornstalk and group them together1 as in the illustration2 cover a board of requisite size with a piece of old black velvet2 if you have no velvet1 paint the board black1 and after tying the corn firmly together1 tack it securely on the board1 and the dark background will bring out the many yellow tints of the decoration beautifully2 fasten two screw-eyes in the back of the board1 by which to attach the wire1 and the panel will be ready to hang on the wall4 ,the corn can also be fastened to a rough board of the desired size and the panel and decoration bronzed1 using green bronze for the background and portions of the group1 while all the edges and prominent points should be of copper-colored bronze4 ,early in ,november the many varieties of gourds ripen1 and their odd and fantastic forms seem like nature's suggestions of the unique in ornamentation4 ,so suggestive are they that it needs but little originality to make them into many useful and beautiful articles4 ,as a decoration for looping over the poles of portires1 and for holding back draperies1 these ,ornamental ,gourds are convenient4 ,they must first be allowed to become perfectly dry2 then they can be made into tasselled festoons4 ,take six mock-oranges1 which imitate so closely our real oranges in color1 size1 and form1 and cut a hole about the size of a silver dime in the top and bottom of each one2 then shake out the seeds4 ,to make the openings in the gourds1 first bore a small hole with the point of a large needle1 then twist the needle around and around until it will easily pass through4 ,next1 carefully enlarge the opening with a sharp penknife until it is of the stated size4 ,make a rope two yards and a half long of ,persian colored wools or worsted2 on the end fasten a slender tassel1 six or seven inches long1 made of the same worsted2 now string one of the bright orange-gourds on the rope down against the tassel1 which should be large enough to prevent the gourd from slipping off2 make another similar tassel1 and attach it to the rope about twelve inches from the first one1 and thread another gourd on the rope1 bringing it down against the second tassel2 proceed in like manner with the remaining gourds1 making a tassel for each one1 and you will have a decoration unlike any to be found elsewhere4 ,we are all more or less familiar with the ,gourd-,dippers so common in the ,south1 where1 in olden times1 scarcely a spring bubbled in a rustic nook that was not supplied with its drinking-gourd4 ,these dippers are made by sawing an opening in the large part of the gourd1 scraping out the contents1 and making the inside as smooth as possible with sand-paper4 ,they need no ornamentation4 ,the kind of gourds resembling flattened globes can be made into graceful and unique ,bowls4 ,the gourds must be sawed into two parts1 with the inside of each sand-papered1 and flowers painted1 with oil-colors1 on the outside4 ,after they have thoroughly dried1 give a coat of white varnish to both the inside and outside4 ,a pretty ,bonbon-,box can be fashioned of one of these gourds4 ,saw off the top1 which will serve as a lid1 and fasten it to the bowl with narrow ribbons tied through holes at the back of each2 line both lid and box with satin by gluing it along the edges with stiff glue put on sparingly1 and cover the raw edge of the satin with chenille2 this is also put on with a little glue4 ,do not allow the chenille to interfere with the closing of the box1 but place it along the inside edge of the box and lid4 ,another form is the ,bottle-,gourd4 ,ornament this with ivy-leaves painted as if twined around bowl and neck1 and when the paint is dry varnish the gourd all over2 if you wish it for use as well as decoration1 saw off the top about two or three inches deep1 shake out the seeds1 then fit a cork in the piece cut off1 and so glue it in that the cork may extend an inch downward to fit in the bottle4 ,the large egg-shaped gourds look well as ,vases4 ,illustration3 ,wire ,twisted for ,feet of ,gourd-,vase4 ,illustration3 ,foot ,bent ,down4 ,illustration3 ,finished ,wire ,feet for ,gourd-,vase4 ,illustration3 ,ornamental and ,useful ,gourds4 ,select a deep-colored gourd1 saw off the top and scrape out the inside2 then varnish the vase and mount it on feet of twisted wire1 made according to ,fig4 #acd2 bend down the feet1 as in ,fig4 #ace1 when the wire will be formed into ,fig4 #acf4 ,to fasten this on the vase1 first bore holes in the bottom of the gourd1 then sew the feet firmly on1 passing the needle through the holes previously made and bending the wire a little to fit to the gourd4 ,gild the wire feet1 and your vase is finished4 ,another way is to save the top sawed off1 fasten an ornament of twisted wire on the top of it1 and then1 after making the vase as the one just described1 add bands of gilded cardboard made to fit the gourd1 fastening them to the vase with glue4 ,handles can also be fashioned of cardboard and sewed to the upper band before it is glued to the vase1 as in the illustration4 ,there are many other ways of utilizing gourds1 but we will leave it to your ingenuity to think up new and pretty conceits4 ,pine-cones1 large and small1 acorns1 and balls from the sweet-gum tree1 can be used as ,small ,decorations4 ,never try to fasten them by the natural stems1 for these will soon break off1 but place in each one a small screw-eye1 and when tied in groups they form ornaments for waste-baskets and fancy baskets of all kinds4 ,we have seen chandeliers with gilded cones hanging from the different points1 and being the identical color of the chandelier1 they seemed of the same metal1 and added novelty and grace to its appearance4 ,there are some varieties of the tree-fungi which make dark1 rich-colored ,brackets4 ,use heavy cardboard or thin board as a covering for the back2 have this fit the fungus perfectly1 and fasten it securely in position with very stiff glue or nails4 ,paint the back the same color as the fungus1 and on either side of the upper edge place screw-eyes by which to fasten up the bracket4 ,many of the curiously formed galls and oak-apples to be found on different trees can also be employed as ornaments4 ,nothing can be finer than our brilliant autumn season1 which is said to be more beautiful in this than in other countries1 with its crisp mornings and bright sunny afternoons4 ,when the weather is too lovely to remain in-doors1 and all nature invites us out1 then is the time to gather our fall decorations4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,the ,little ,brown ,squirrel4 ,,footnote3 ,d ,for this work the staple-tacks used for tacking down matting will be found very convenient4 ,,chapter ,,xix4 ,,nutting-,,parties4 ,,off they go with bright1 laughing eyes and glowing cheeks1 each one carrying a light little basket or fancy bag slung carelessly on her arm4 ,the girls are full of life and spirits as they walk briskly along toward the woods in the delightful fall weather1 talking and laughing in a happy1 thoughtless fashion1 now telling where the best nuts are to be found1 the shortest route to take1 or where the prettiest walks lead1 and again lingering or stopping to admire the many wonderful beauties of autumn4 ,leaving the road they enter the woods1 where the dry leaves rustle pleasantly beneath their feet1 and in some places the gold and brown leaves through which they walk lie ankle-deep4 ,all this is fully enjoyed by the party as they proceed on their way discussing the best place for lunch1 which consideration is quite important1 as it is necessary1 if possible1 to be near a clear1 cool spring2 otherwise the water must be transported4 ,arriving at the selected spot about noon1 all bring forward their baskets and bags to contribute the contents to their 8nutting-dinner40 ,soon the white cloth is laid and the tempting feast spread1 when the hungry but merry maidens gather around to relish their repast in the forest1 where1 all about1 are seen sure signs of coming winter4 ,the airy dining-hall is carpeted with the softest moss1 and the gorgeous coloring of the surrounding foliage is far more beautiful than the most costly tapestry1 while the sky forming the roof is of the serenest blue4 ,now and then the sound of falling nuts is heard as they drop from the trees4 ,this is music in the ears of the girls1 and they hurry through their lunch1 collect the empty baskets1 and are soon busy gathering the glossy brown chestnuts1 which are thrashed down from the branches by some of the party1 who use long poles for the purpose4 ,down comes the shower of nuts and burs1 and away the party scamper to patiently wait until it is over1 as the prickly burs are things to be avoided4 ,some wise girls have brought tweezers to use in pulling open these thorny coverings4 ,others have their hands well protected by heavy gloves which cannot easily be penetrated with the bristling spikes4 ,it does not take long to fill their bags1 and the one who first succeeds in the feat receives the title of 8,little ,brown ,squirrel40 ,then all the others1 for the rest of the day1 obey her wishes4 ,nor is this difficult1 for their ,little ,brown ,squirrel is blithe and gay1 generous and kind1 and does all in her power to render her subjects happy4 ,as they turn their faces homeward the girls plan for another nutting-party to come off soon1 for they wish to make the most of the glorious ,indian summer1 which belongs1 we claim1 exclusively to our country1 and which may last a week or only a few days4 ,the chestnuts are brought home1 where in the evening some are eaten raw1 others have the shells slit and are then roasted or boiled1 making a sort of chestnut festival1 as in the ,north of ,italy1 only of course on a very much smaller scale1 for there the peasants gather chestnuts all day long and have a merry-making when the sun goes down4 ,this harvest lasts over three weeks and is a very important one to the dark-eyed ,italians1 who dry the nuts and grind them to flour1 which is used for bread and cakes during the barren season4 ,the harvest in the ,apennines is quite an event1 as the trees are plentiful1 the fruit is good1 and the people gladly celebrate the season4 ,our thin1 white-shelled shag-bark hickory-nut is peculiarly ,american1 and many a nutting-party have found its delicate and agreeable flavor very welcome when1 gathered around a large rock1 they crack a few to sample their fruit before returning home4 ,these nuts are only cooked by covering the kernels with hot candy1 and thus prepared1 they make a delicious sweetmeat4 ,illustration3 ,blossom and ,fruit of the ,chestnut-,tree4 ,when cracking hickory-nuts1 hold each nut firmly by the flat sides1 bringing uppermost one of the narrow sides2 strike this and the nut will open so that the halves fall out1 or may be easily extracted1 and occasionally the kernels will come out whole4 ,we have seen quaint little figures1 with the heads made of hickory-nuts1 the pointed end forming the nose1 and the eyes and mouth marked with ink1 giving a comical expression to the peaked face4 ,the neat little three-cornered beech-nut is easy and pleasant to gather1 making a desirable change for the 8nutters0 after going for other kinds1 and the trees with their beautiful foliage render the scene very attractive4 ,but not more so than do the lofty and stately walnut-trees with their rich1 brown fruit encased in such rough shells1 whose outside covering is so juicy that1 unless we are very cautious1 it will stain our hands its own dark color4 ,the black-walnut tree 7,j4 nigra7 is indigenous to the ,united ,states1 and we are informed that a celebrated specimen is still standing at ,roslyn1 ,l4 ,i41 where the seed was planted in #agac4 ,the tree measures twenty-five feet in circumference at three feet from the ground4 ,butter-nuts1 so significant during our civil war1 also belong to ,america2 the meat1 though quite oily1 is sweet and agreeable4 ,butter-nuts will repay anyone for gathering them1 though1 like the walnut1 the outer husk is apt to stain the fingers2 but this may be avoided by wearing gloves while handling the fruit4 ,the cross-sections of the shells1 when properly polished1 make pretty ornaments4 ,although we are all fond of the round little hazel-nut1 they do not seem to be as plentiful as could be wished1 and it is seldom we have the pleasure of going hazel-nutting1 yet when the opportunity occurs1 it is rare sport and an event to be talked of afterward4 ,nuts are to be found in all portions of the country1 and the varieties depend upon the section in which you live4 ,rules for ,nutting-,parties4 #a4 ,in selecting the members of a nutting-party be careful to choose only those on whom you can safely depend for cheerfulness1 kindly feeling1 and a willingness on their part to do all in their power to assist1 should occasion arise1 in letting down the bars of a fence1 going for water1 or anything which might happen to require their services4 ,illustration3 ,pea-,nut ,vine and ,fruit4 #b4 ,decide by majority any case of controversy in regard to destination1 the best place and way of crossing a brook1 which route to take1 or in fact any question concerning the comfort and pleasure of the party1 until the 8,little ,brown ,squirrel0 wins her title4 ,then she rules absolutely and settles all questions according to her best judgment1 giving council and friendly advice to those who ask it4 ,all differences being referred to her1 the decision is considered final1 and the party must obey when their ,little ,brown ,squirrel directs4 #c4 ,the one who gathers the greatest quantity of nuts in a given time wins1 and receives the above much-desired title4 ,the standard of measure being previously decided upon by the party1 the time may be either long or short1 as desired4 #d4 ,the badge given to the successful competitor may consist of fall leaves or nuts tied with a brown ribbon4 ,this she keeps in remembrance of the delightful day spent nutting in the woods when she was a ,little ,brown ,squirrel4 ,select1 if possible1 a day in ,indian summer for your nutting-party1 and it is well to wear a gown that will not easily tear1 catch the dust1 or spot--not that these accidents are always to be met with on such excursions1 but they might happen1 and we must be on the safe side1 so that no thought or anxiety need be given to the clothing4 ,if your party contemplates a series of nutting-picnics1 propose that they shall go for different varieties each time4 ,this will add novelty and zest to the excursions2 and should the distance in some cases be too great for a walk1 secure a vehicle with a good reliable driver1 and the ride will be particularly enjoyed4 ,this mode of travelling procures another change in the programme1 which should be as varied as you can make it4 ,let the plates for your dinner be of wood or paper1 to avoid the necessity of carrying them home4 ,a table-cloth made of large sheets of white paper is a good substitute for damask1 and after doing service the paper may be thrown away1 leaving your baskets entirely empty to be filled with nuts4 ,there grows a nut1 highly prized1 that is never gathered by nutting-parties4 ,nor could they see it if they examined every tree throughout the country4 ,yet it flourishes in this climate1 and may be seen any day at the fruit-stores and corner-stands4 ,the shells of these furnish odd fancies for little trifles made by girlish fingers4 ,cut in the shape of slippers and glued to a card1 they seem suitable for a wood-nymph1 and the card is used as a birthday or menu card4 ,strung together with needle and thread1 and dressed in costume with black thread for hair1 they make quite a good-looking ,japanese4 ,glued on a twig and marked with ink in representation of the birds1 they look not unlike owls perched on a limb4 ,when divided in halves the shells are transformed into tiny boats with tissue-paper sails4 ,this nut boasts of four names3 gouber1 pindar1 ground-nut1 and the familiar name of pea-nut4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xx4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,a ,,telephone4 ,,hello6 ,hello6 ,what is it you say8 ,you can really make a telephone8 ,what fun6 ,how far will it work8 ,you think it can be heard a long distance8 ,very good4 ,could we manage to construct such a one8 ,how1 pray tell us8 ,the answer which came back over the line we give in a more concise form1 as follows3 ,the best way to make a simple telephone is to procure two round1 medium-sized tin baking-powder boxes1 and remove the bottoms with a pair of pinchers2 then soak two pieces of ,whatman's drawing-paper1 or any other strong paper1 in a basin of water for a few moments1 and when thoroughly wet take them out and place one smoothly over the end of each box4 ,fasten these down by winding a waxed cotton twine securely over the paper and box1 and tying it tightly 7,fig4 #acg74 ,this done1 allow the drums to become wholly dry1 when they should be firm1 even1 and without wrinkles4 ,next cut away that portion of the paper which stands out1 frill-like1 beyond the string1 and paste a narrow strip of paper around over the twine 7,fig4 #ach74 ,wax a piece of string of the desired length1 and with a large needle or pin carefully punch a hole in the centre of each drum2 thread one end of the waxed string through one of the holes and make a large knot in the end1 then cautiously pull the string until the knot rests on the inside surface of the paper4 ,connect the other box to the string in like manner1 so that the twine will have a box fastened on each end4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #acg ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ach ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aci ,the telephone is now ready for use2 and if the distance is short1 the line may be stretched taut from point to point4 ,but should the space be great1 supports will be needed and loops must be made of the twine and fastened at intervals on trees1 corners of the houses1 or any available points1 with the connecting cord passed through these loops 7,fig4 #aci71 which act as supports4 ,keep the course of the waxed string as straight as possible1 and1 as far as practicable1 avoid sharp angles4 ,this style of telephone we know1 from personal experience1 works perfectly at the distance of fifty yards1 and doubtless it will do as well when the line is stretched much farther4 ,be particular1 in selecting the tin baking-powder boxes1 to have them round and even2 if they are old and battered the experiment may not prove satisfactory4 ,we find the telephone very useful and convenient1 besides affording any amount of amusement and fun2 with its aid we converse with acquaintances1 even though they be at a distance4 ,the friendly little instrument carries the voice all along the slender line to the very ears of our best friend1 and we can chat away as freely and almost as easily as if side by side4 ,what a comfort to be able1 when seated in your own room1 to listen to the voice of some companion1 living perhaps blocks away1 and it is such a pleasure1 too1 to have questions answered immediately1 which is impossible in communications made by letter4 ,nor is this a pleasure to be enjoyed at rare intervals1 for as long as the telephone lasts it can be used at any time for a short or long talk1 as one may feel inclined4 ,the consultations1 the plans1 the sport1 and merriment to be had with the telephone can scarcely be appreciated by one who is not the happy possessor of such an instrument4 ,illustration3 ,listening4 ,when the weather will not permit of a walk or a visit1 the telephone brings us1 if not face to face1 at least within speaking distance of those to whom we desire to talk4 ,there are many other easy methods of making telephones4 ,they can be manufactured as described without waxing the string1 or the boxes may be used unaltered1 in which case the tin bottoms serve as drums1 and the holes for the string are made in the centre of each by driving a small tack through4 ,with these instruments the voice cannot be sent a great distance1 but when only a short line is needed they succeed very well4 ,more complicated telephones are made with the drums of bladder and the line of soft1 flexible wire4 ,though good and serviceable1 they are more difficult to make and require more time and labor4 ,illustration3 ,speaking4 ,the two beef-bladders used for such a telephone must first be blown up1 tied1 and left about thirty hours1 or until they are stretched1 but not dried4 ,when in proper condition1 cut off the necks and portion of the ends1 then soak them in warm water1 and they will become very pliable and light in color4 ,having previously prepared two square pieces of board by very carefully cutting out a perfect circle in the centre of each1 about as large as a medium-sized pie-pan or a tea-plate1 place the bladders smoothly but not tightly over the openings1 allowing the outside of the bladder to come on the bottom1 and fasten it all around the circle1 a little distance from the edge1 with tacks so driven in that they may be easily removed4 ,try the drums with your finger2 if they stretch evenly they are correct1 if they wrinkle1 change them until they stretch perfectly smooth4 ,then tack a piece of firm tape securely around the edge of the circle1 and cut off the bladder reaching beyond the tape4 ,next fasten four feet of soft1 flexible wire to a large-sized gutta-percha button by threading it through the two opposite holes in the centre of the button2 pass the other end of the wire through the middle of the bladder1 bringing the button flat against its surface4 ,after attaching a weight of about seven pounds to the end of the wire1 place the drum in the sun until perfectly dry4 ,proceed with the other in the same manner1 and when both are well dried1 fasten one on each end of the line and attach the drum-wires to the principal wire by loops2 then stretch it firm and tight4 ,this telephone will also need loops for supports1 which should be of wire4 ,when the instrument is carefully and properly made it will carry the voice three or four miles or more1 giving every word and tone distinctly and clearly4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxi4 ,,how ,,to ,,draw4,e ,,would you like to learn to draw1 to sketch from nature8 ,don't you think that it would be delightful to be able to take out your pencils and paper and copy some scene you want to remember1 or produce a likeness of any bird or animal which strikes your fancy8 ,many will say1 8,i'd like it very well1 but ,i can't draw40 ,you can write1 can hold a pencil1 and trace lines upon the paper2 and if you can do this1 you can draw a little4 ,a girl who can learn anything can learn to draw if she will give the same attention to it that she gives to other things4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adj ,now we are not going to talk about copying pictures which someone else has already drawn1 for there is not much satisfaction in making imitations of other people's work2 it is much more gratifying to make the original drawings ourselves2 but to do this we need some direction4 ,the reason it is easier to copy a picture than to draw the real object is because the lines to be copied are all laid out on the flat surface of the picture2 but to draw the object we must find out where to trace the lines for ourselves4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ada ,for instance1 suppose we are to draw a flower-pot and plant4 ,if we have the picture before us1 we can readily see where all the lines are placed upon the paper1 but in viewing a real plant and pot we are apt to become confused in trying to discover the directions and proportions of the lines4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adb ,therefore we must learn to see things as they appear1 not as they really are4 ,this may seem strange to you1 because one is apt to think that a thing must appear as it is2 but let us look into the matter4 ,we will take a square box 7,fig4 #adj74 ,now1 we know that all the sides are the same size1 that the top is as large as the side1 and that one side is as large as another2 but if you try to draw it so1 you will find it impossible1 because1 although you know that the top and sides are the same size as the front1 they do not look so1 and you draw things as they look1 not as they really are4 ,what would our cube look like if we tried to make the sides ,k and ,h just like the side ,i8 ,why1 like ,fig4 #ada4 ,don't you see that would be no box at all8 ,take another example4 ,we all know that a man's leg is longer than his arm1 but it doesn't always appear so4 ,measure the arms and legs of ,fig4 #adb1 and you will see by actual measurement the arms are longer than the legs1 and yet it looks right1 because the legs are projected toward you2 in other words1 the legs are fore-shortened4 ,the great secret of drawing from nature is to train the eye to see a real object just like a picture4 ,now let us return to our flower-pot again4 ,we will suppose we are drawing from a real flower-pot and plant4 ,we determine how large we will make our sketch1 and begin operations by drawing a vertical line 7a straight upright line74 ,along this line we will mark out the proportions of the plant and pot1 as in ,fig4 #adc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adc ,we may easily discover that the plant is longer than the pot4 ,this can be done by holding the pencil upright before the eye at arm's length1 as in ,fig4 #add1 so that it will cover the pot1 and measuring by the thumb the height of the pot1 then raising the arm so as to cover the plant1 and comparing the measurement of the pot with the plant4 ,the lines drawn from the eye 7,fig4 #add7 show how the pencil makes the measurement on the object4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #add ,after settling the question of the height of the flower-pot and plant1 we will mark the measurements on the line4 ,and now we will draw in the pot1 leaving the straight line through its centre4 ,on observing the plant we will see that it is not exactly straight1 and here again the straight line will be of assistance4 ,by holding up our pencil1 which represents the straight line1 we will discover that the main stem of the plant leans considerably to the left4 ,guided by the line1 we can get the curve of the stem about right4 ,now we sketch the stem4 ,along the straight line we again measure the distance from the top of each leaf and flower to the pot1 as in ,fig4 #ade4 ,we can see several leaves1 each reaching a certain height4 ,observing the same plan of measurement1 we find that the top of the lowest leaf is about the same height from the pot as the height of the pot itself1 and again from the top of the lowest leaf to the top of the plant measures the same distance4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ade ,by drawing another vertical line just touching the right side of the pot1 we find that it touches the extreme edge of the leaf4 ,thus we find the exact situation of the leaf4 ,by the same method we find the right places for the other leaves and flowers1 and after we know just where they belong1 we draw them in1 and find that we have produced a very creditable outline from nature4 ,we need not confine ourselves to one or two guiding lines in sketching an object2 in fact1 we may use as many straight lines as will help us to get the correct proportions2 not only vertical and horizontal lines1 but slanting lines will also assist us in most cases4 ,the sketch of a dog 7,fig4 #adf7 will give an idea of the way to employ all lines necessary in sketching from nature4 ,a few words will be all that is necessary to explain this illustration4 ,there lies the dog on the floor1 and we seat ourselves at a little distance from it with pencil and paper4 ,we will start off with a horizontal line 7,a72 then we can form some idea as to whether the little dog lies along a straight line1 or in case the bottom line slants1 how much it slants4 ,then draw the vertical line 7,b ,e74 ,now suppose we hold our pencil upright1 in such a position as to touch the back of the knee-joint of the foreleg1 we will find that it passes through the middle of the dog's back1 as represented by the line 7,b ,e72 so we have found the places for these parts4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adf ,another horizontal line 7,c ,d7 drawn above the first will touch just over the right eye1 pass through the middle of the left ear1 through the middle of the neck1 cut off the foreleg1 and run along the top of the two hind legs1 passing through the knee of the left one4 ,this will show us that the top of the right eye1 the ear1 and the top of both hindlegs are on a line4 ,it will also help us to get the proportions above and below the line2 then by drawing a line from ,d to the point ,f on the horizontal line ,a1 we find that the lower edges of the left hind and fore legs are on the same line1 which1 if extended a little farther down1 will touch the edge of the dog's mouth4 ,with these lines to guide us we cannot go far astray in our proportions4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adg ,one of the chief difficulties in following this method of drawing from nature is to hold our measuring-stick exactly vertical or horizontal4 ,this difficulty can be overcome by providing yourself with a ,t-square 7,fig4 #adg7 and attaching to it1 at the point ,p1 a string with a weight tied on the other end so that it will hang plumb4 ,by using this we can be sure whether we hold it straight or not1 for in case we tip it too much on one side or the other the string will swerve from the middle of the upright stick4 ,of course1 whenever we hold the ,t-square perfectly straight1 the string will fall straight down the middle of the upright1 and the top of the ,t will then give us a true horizontal line4 ,a little thought and practice will lead you to thoroughly understand this method1 and when you really understand it you will have an unerring guide to assist you4 ,of course1 as the eye and hand become more trained1 with practice and observation1 the work will become easier1 and you will not need the ,t-square4 ,in beginning the practice of drawing from nature1 we had better confine our first efforts to things that will stand still1 for without a practised hand it will be almost impossible to sketch a restless subject2 but if we attempt to do so1 we should follow the methods before taught as nearly as possible4 ,now1 suppose we step out of doors in search of something to sketch4 ,the first moving object our eyes rest upon is a goose1 and we decide to use him as a model4 ,but he is so restless1 will not keep still an instant4 ,first we have a front view1 then a side view1 and again he turns his back upon us4 ,if we really must have his picture1 the only way is to catch him and tie him up4 ,yet even now he is a difficult subject1 twisting and turning1 and bobbing his head about4 ,determined on sketching him1 however1 we observe the position in which he remains the longest time1 or assumes oftenest1 and begin our work4 ,we first note the general proportions4 ,is his body as thick as it is long8 ,is his neck as long as his body8 ,are his legs nearest the head or tail8 ,is the head as long as the neck8 ,what part reaches the highest1 or what part the lowest8 ,we hastily but carefully consider these questions and determine in our own mind the answers1 for we must get an idea of the proportions before we begin our sketch4 ,now we draw a horizontal line along our paper1 and then hold up our pencil horizontally1 so that it will answer for a straight line drawn across the body of the real goose 7,fig4 #adh74 ,this will represent the horizontal line on the paper4 ,noticing then the directions the outlines of the goose take from the horizontal line 7represented by the pencil71 we sketch them in on the paper1 remembering that one of the most important things is to get the right directions of the lines4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adh ,observe that in ,fig4 #adi the line ,g is directed to too high a point1 and makes the body too thick and out of proportion4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #adi ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aej ,in sketching it is best to make all lines straight instead of curves1 for in this way we are more likely to get the right directions4 ,our first rough sketch of the goose ought to have something of the appearance of ,fig4 #aej1 and as we work it up more carefully it will become as nicely rounded as we could desire4 ,one of the most common faults a beginner is apt to commit is to try to do too much1 either by choosing too great a subject1 such as a large landscape1 or by putting too many little things into the composition4 ,take care of the large things1 and the little things will take care of themselves4 ,if our subject be a clump of trees at some distance1 we should not attempt to draw in separate leaves1 but endeavor to get the true shape of the tree1 simply indicating the leaves by a few lines4 ,neither must we attempt1 in our first sketches1 to put in all the shadows we see2 the strong principal ones are all that are necessary4 ,a background of hills and trees should be merely suggested by a few lines1 because the light striking upon them gives a very light appearance4 ,draw as simply as possible4 ,ten pictures are spoiled by putting in too much work1 where one is spoiled by too little4 ,don't be discouraged4 ,every effort will show improvement1 if you really put your mind and heart in your work4 ,as for ,materials1 a sheet of drawing-paper1 a ,no4 #b lead-pencil1 and a piece of soft rubber are all you really need to commence with4 ,later it will be well to have a drawing-pad and several more pencils4 ,illustration ,,footnote3 ,e ,the material for this chapter is from an article written by ,professor ,frank ,beard for ,harper's ,young ,people4 ,by permission of ,harper ,brothers4 ,,chapter ,,xxii4 ,,how ,,to ,,paint ,,in ,,water-,,colors4 ,,there is a certain charm in water-color painting--a charm distinctly its own--which lies1 as ,penley says1 8in the beauty and truthfulness of its aerial tones40 ,without this quality a water-color1 as a water-color1 is a failure4 ,this transparency of effect does not depend alone upon the manner of painting or the colors employed1 but much rests with the paper we use4 ,in the days when our mothers and grandmothers were taught painting at school1 the finest1 smoothest cardboard was thought necessary2 but we have since learned that the flat1 smooth paper tends decidedly toward producing a flat1 smooth effect in the picture painted upon it1 while the rough1 uneven surface of the paper now in use helps to produce depth and atmosphere4 ,therefore it is always best to have rough paper to paint upon4 ,we give below the ,materials for ,water-,color ,painting4 #a4 ,a block of rough drawing or water-color paper4 ,it is better to buy it in blocks than by the sheet1 as it is much more easily handled1 and is always ready for use4 #b4 ,brushes4 ,the best brushes are made of sable1 and although costing more to begin with1 it is really more economical to purchase them than to choose the less expensive camel's-hair2 for the sable are by far the most satisfactory1 and will last much longer4 ,three or four brushes are sufficient4 ,as ,devoe ,co4 number them1 they should range between ,no4 #c1 which is small enough for ordinary painting1 and ,no4 #ai1 for clouds1 backgrounds1 etc4 #c4 ,colors4 ,a tin sketching-box of moist colors1 which also contains a palette1 is very useful1 but the colors can be bought separately in tubes or pans4 ,water-color painting seems by its qualities to be especially adapted to flowers and landscapes1 and as this is to be a chapter1 not a book1 on water-colors1 we will confine ourselves to the principal points to be observed in these two departments1 and will commence with the ,flowers4 ,few oil-paintings1 however well executed1 give the delicate1 exquisite texture of a flower as nearly as water-colors4 ,the semitransparency of a rose-petal1 the juicy1 translucent green of the young leaf1 it is difficult to truthfully represent in other than these colors1 whose essential quality is transparency4 ,to preserve this transparency of color1 everything about the painting must be kept exceedingly neat4 ,the brushes must be thoroughly washed before using them for a different tint from that already upon them1 and plenty of water1 changed frequently1 is necessary4 ,having arranged your materials conveniently upon a table1 place your paper so that it will lie at an angle slanting toward you1 not perfectly flat upon the table2 this can be done by putting books under the edge farthest from you1 thus raising it up4 ,stand the flowers you wish to copy in such a position that the light will fall upon them only from one direction and produce decided shadows2 the effect will then be much better than when the light is more diffused4 ,illustration ,always arrange your model exactly as you want to paint it1 and leave nothing to your idea of how it ought to look4 ,if you do not intend to have any background other than the white paper1 place something white behind your flowers4 ,if you want a colored background1 arrange the color you have chosen behind the flowers1 and paint it as you see it4 ,commence your work by sketching lightly1 as correctly and rapidly as you can1 the outline of your flower4 ,try something simple at first2 say a bunch of heart's-ease or pansies1 and when drawing them try to get the character of both flower and leaf4 ,observe how the stem curves where it is attached to the flower1 and at what angles the stems of the flowers and the leaves join the main stalk4 ,given character1 an outline drawing painted in flat tints will closely resemble nature2 without it1 the most beautifully finished painting will not look like the flower it is intended to represent4 ,illustration3 ,painting in ,water-,colors4 ,when your outline is drawn in1 dip your largest brush in clear water1 and go over the whole surface of your paper1 then place a piece of blotting-paper over the paper to soak up the water1 leaving it simply damp1 not wet4 ,if you are using tube colors1 have ready on a porcelain palette1 or ordinary dinner-plate1 these colors3 crimson lake1 cobalt blue1 indigo1 ,prussian blue1 and gamboge4 ,put in your lightest tints first1 leaving the white paper for the highest light2 then paint in your darker tints and shadows1 and get the effect4 ,if your flower is what we call the johnny-jump-up1 the lowest petal will be yellow4 ,paint this in with a light wash of gamboge1 leaving1 as we have said1 the white paper for touches of high light4 ,the two upper petals will probably be a deep claret-color2 this is made by mixing crimson lake and cobalt blue1 the crimson lake predominating4 ,the two central petals may be a bluish lavender1 and this color is made by mixing a little crimson lake with cobalt blue4 ,use plenty of water2 but do not let it run1 and keep the colors of the petals distinct4 ,paint the stems and leaves1 where they are a rich green1 with a mixture of gamboge and ,prussian blue1 and where they appear gray as the light touches them1 a pale wash of indigo will give the desired effect4 ,keep your shadows broad and distinct1 and your tints as flat as you can4 ,leave out details altogether in your first paintings1 and add them afterward only when you can do so without spoiling the effect4 ,when a tinted background is desired1 put it in quickly in a flat tint1 before commencing the flowers4 ,it is best not to bring the tint quite up to the outline1 as a narrow edge of white left around the flower gives a pleasant1 sketchy look to the painting4 ,landscapes4 ,in your first studies from nature keep to simple subjects1 and treat them simply1 without any attempt at elaboration4 ,choose1 for instance1 a picturesque corner of an old fence1 with perhaps a bit of field and sky for the background4 ,sketch in the principal features in the foreground in outline1 and indicate the horizon1 if it comes in the picture4 ,penley says1 in his 8,system of ,water-,color ,painting10 8,white paper is too opaque to paint upon without some wash of color being first passed over it10 and he recommends a thin wash of yellow ochre and brown madder1 which should be put all over the surface of the paper except on the high lights in the foreground1 which are best left crisp and white4 ,notwithstanding what ,penley says in this matter1 it must be borne in mind that some artists do not believe in successive washes1 but claim that the color desired should be put upon the white paper at once4 ,if the yellow tint is used1 let it become quite dry and then wash it over with a large brush and clean water2 then1 as in the flower painting1 soak up the water with blotting-paper2 the blotting-paper must also be quite clean4 ,while the paper is damp1 not wet1 begin with a blue tint--a light wash of cobalt will give it--and put in the sky in a flat tint2 bring the same color down all over your sketch except in the high lights4 ,the blue tint gives atmosphere and distance4 ,let your paper again become quite dry1 and then wash it over as before1 in clear water4 ,the process of laying on color and lightly washing over it afterward should be repeated several times1 8and the result will be a transparent aerial tone40 ,keep your extreme distance bluish1 your middle distance warmer in tone1 but not too strong1 and the principal objects in your foreground strong4 ,leave out small objects1 and with light and shade seek to obtain the effect4 ,keep your colors pure or your sketch will be dull4 ,contrast has much to do in producing strength and character4 ,phillips says that1 8in aiming at opposition of color1 we must select that which gives force to the foreground1 and consequently communicates the appearance of air in the distance4 ,thus1 if the general tone of the light be warm and yellow1 we should have blues and purples in the foreground2 if the lights be cool1 reds and yellows in the foreground give atmosphere to distance1 as neither of these colors in a positive state is found in the middle or remote distance40 ,the three principal contrasts are blue opposed to orange1 red to green1 and yellow to purple2 and 8a good first lesson in sketching in color will be to put in your shadows with color opposite to the object in light2 and by carrying out this principle of opposition throughout the scale you will obtain an endless variety of contrasts40 ,it is the general rule in most painting to have cool shadows to warm lights1 and warm shadows to cool lights4 ,we all know that a green picture is very disagreeable1 and although a green field is green1 it must not be made intensely so4 ,an untrained eye will not see how nature tones down the vivid color with shadows1 and softens it with the atmosphere2 but when the eye has learned to look at nature in the right way this difficulty will be overcome4 ,howard says1 8green must be sparingly used1 even in landscapes1 whose greatest charm consists of vegetation40 ,foliage in some form will present itself in almost every landscape1 and it is therefore necessary to have a few general principles to guide you in this important feature4 ,in sketching trees be sure to get the character of their trunks1 limbs1 branches1 and general form2 also the texture of the bark1 rough or smooth4 ,you will see that the foliage appears in layers1 one above another4 ,sketch in the outlines of the principal layers1 where they are tipped with light2 then go over the whole tree with a local color1 and afterward separate the light from shadow4 ,each mass is edged with light1 while its base is in shadow1 as a rule4 ,omit details1 and keep to your masses of light and shade4 ,if your tree is in the foreground1 leave the white paper for crisp touches of high light4 ,the tone of your fence will probably be gray1 but do not take it for granted that it is all gray2 look for other colors1 and you will find brown1 blue1 green1 and sometimes red4 ,put these in as you see them1 letting the edges melt into each other1 as they will do when the paper is damp2 but have each color pure1 and do not try to mix them4 ,painting from ,notes is not as difficult as one might imagine4 ,with a little practice it is easily learned4 ,the following directions will tell how to paint a sunset on the meadows1 from notes made at sunset on the meadows on ,long ,island4 ,illustration3 ,how to ,paint a ,sunset in ,water-,colors4 ,take a piece of ,whatman's rough drawing-paper1 or a kind that is termed egg-shell cartoon1 the size decided upon for your picture4 ,have ready a large dish of clean water1 brushes1 and paints4 ,draw a pencil-line along the centre of your paper for your horizon1 ,fig4 #aea2 then directly on the line paint a streak of vermilion4 ,put the color on quite damp1 and make it about half an inch broad1 extending one-fourth of an inch on either side of the horizon-line1 ,fig4 #aeb4 ,next1 quickly paint a yellow streak above and below the red one1 making each streak of the same size and parallel1 and leaving a little white paper between the different colors1 ,fig4 #aec4 ,with a clean brush dipped in clean water carefully moisten the paper between the streaks1 and allow the edges of the colors to mingle1 ,fig4 #aed4 ,before this has time to dry1 paint a blue streak above and below1 about half an inch from the yellow1 ,fig4 #aee2 then with the clean brush dampen the white paper between1 being careful not to get it too wet2 there should be just enough moisture to enable the colors to flow and mingle at the edges1 ,fig4 #aef4 ,this may be aided by holding the paper first one side up and then the other1 until the edges are evenly blended4 ,now1 before the horizon is quite dry1 while it is still damp enough to cause the paint to spread1 fill a brush with ,payne's gray1 which should be rather dark and not too wet1 touch the point of your brush here and there along the horizon1 now a little above and now a little below1 and you will find that the paint will spread and make excellent trees for the distance1 ,fig4 #aeg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aei ,when your work is dry enough to paint over without spreading the color1 mix some green and black1 and green and brown2 paint in the meadow1 using the color made of green and black for the extreme and middle distance1 the color made of green and brown for the foreground1 leaving spaces for streams and ponds1 and your sunset upon the meadow is finished4 ,a pretty little sketch it is1 too1 ,fig4 #aeh4 ,illustration3 ,leaf from an ,artist's ,note-,book4 ,a different composition can be made by proceeding as directed as far as ,fig4 #aef and then1 instead of putting in trees on the horizon1 hills running to points in the water can be painted in a flat tint with the ,payne's gray1 and a vessel with masts painted in the foreground1 as in ,fig4 #aei4 ,this also makes a pretty and effective little sketch4 ,fig4 #afj shows sunset notes taken while aboard a ferryboat in the winter of #ahhf-hg4 ,from these you can see just how the notes are made2 but you must make your own notes1 because what is perfectly intelligible to the writer of the sunset memoranda is an enigma to another person4 ,for example1 in ,fig4 #afj1 8,rose-tinted sky0 may mean almost any shade of red1 or blue and red mixed1 but 8,rose-tinted sky0 no doubt brings before the mind's eye of the writer of the notes the exact color of the sky at the time the notes were made4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,a ,study in ,oil4 ,,chapter ,,xxiii4 ,,how ,,to ,,paint ,,in ,,oil-,,colors4 ,,the difference between oil- and water-color painting lies in the fact that1 although especially well adapted to the portrayal of some subjects1 water-color has its limitations1 while with oil-colors any subject1 from the simplest study in still-life to the grandest conception of a great artist1 can be represented1 and no limit has yet been reached in its possibilities4 ,but there are first steps to be taken in all things1 and the greatest artist who ever lived had to make a beginning and learn the preliminaries of painting before he could produce a picture4 ,to these steps1 then1 we will turn our attention1 and the first will be the necessary ,materials4 ,the following list of colors1 with their combinations1 will be found sufficient for most purposes4 ,,yellows4 ,,reds4 ,,blues4 ,,greens4 ,yellow ,ochre1 ,vermilion1 ,permanent ,blue1 ,terre ,verte1 ,naples ,yellow1 ,light ,red1 ,cobalt1 ,emerald ,green1 ,light ,cadmium1 ,indian ,red1 ,antwerp ,blue4 ,light ,zinnober ,green4 ,orange ,cadmium4 ,venetian ,red1 ,burnt ,sienna1 ,rose ,madder4 ,silver ,white1 ,raw ,umber1 ,vandyke ,brown1 ,ivory ,black4 ,winsor ,newton's colors are acknowledged by most artists to be the best1 but the writer personally prefers ,german white1 as in her opinion it is not so stiff1 and mixes better with other colors than the ,winsor ,newton4 ,the ,easel may be simply a pine one1 which can be purchased from any dealer at the cost of about one dollar4 ,more elaborate easels are1 of course1 more expensive2 but as the merits of a picture do not depend upon the easel which holds it1 a common pine one will do4 ,the ,palette should be light in weight and not too small2 oiled and not varnished4 ,a very light-colored wood is not desirable2 one of walnut or cedar1 about eighteen inches long1 is the best to use1 and will cost from thirty to sixty cents4 ,brushes1 both of sable and bristles1 are used1 but we would advise a beginner to work with bristle brushes only1 for the first attempt should be to obtain a broad style of painting1 without the finished details which the sable brushes are used for4 ,about four different sizes of flat bristle brushes are needed to commence with2 there should be two of each size1 the largest one inch wide1 and the smallest not more than a quarter of an inch in width4 ,the ,palette-,knife is used for taking up color on the palette1 for cleaning the palette1 and sometimes for scraping a picture after its first painting4 ,it should be flexible1 but not too limber4 ,the cost will be from twenty-five cents upward4 ,oil-,cups are fastened on to the palette1 and are used for oil and turpentine4 ,the double ones range in price from eight cents to twenty4 ,the single ones1 without cover1 can be bought for five cents4 ,a ,paint-,box for holding colors1 palette1 and brushes will cost from one dollar and twenty-five cents up4 ,it is convenient to have one1 and necessary when going out sketching1 but for painting at home any kind of tin box will answer for the paints4 ,the palette can be hung up1 and the brushes put in a vase or jar1 handles downward1 which will keep them nicely4 ,mediums4 ,boiled linseed-oil or poppy-oil1 siccatif ,courtray1 and turpentine4 ,canvas4 ,in selecting canvas choose that of a warm-gray or creamy tone1 for it is difficult to give warmth to a picture painted on a cold-gray canvas4 ,the ,german sketching-canvas is quite cheap1 and does very well to commence on4 ,it is best to buy it on the stretcher1 as a girl's fingers are seldom strong enough to stretch the canvas as tight as it should be4 ,a very good sketching-canvas1 #ah #bd1 can be bought in ,new ,york ,city for twenty-five cents4 ,several clean pieces of old white cotton-cloth are necessary for wiping brushes1 cleaning knife and palette1 etc4 ,the ,light in the studio1 or room in which you paint1 should come from one direction only1 and fall from above4 ,this can be managed by covering the lower sash of the window with dark muslin1 or anything that will shut out the light4 ,a shawl will answer for a temporary curtain4 ,most artists prefer that while painting the light should come from behind over the left shoulder4 ,our advice to beginners in all the departments of art is the same3 commence with simple subjects4 ,your first study should be from still-life 7which means any inanimate object used for artistic study71 and let the object selected be of a shape that requires but little drawing2 for your aim now is to learn to handle your colors1 and it is not desirable to have your mind distracted by complicated drawing4 ,a vase placed on a piece of drapery1 which is also brought up to form the background1 is a good subject2 the drapery should be of one color1 and of a tone that will contrast agreeably with the vase and give it prominence4 ,arrange whatever object you have decided to paint so that it will show decided masses of light and shade2 place your easel at a sufficient distance from it to obtain the general effect of shape and color without seeing too much detail2 arrange your canvas on the easel so that you will neither have to look up nor down upon it1 but straight before you2 then sketch in the object you are about to copy in outline4 ,observe the edges of the heaviest shadows1 and draw them also in outline4 ,charcoal is better than a pencil for sketching on canvas1 as it can be easily rubbed off with a clean cloth if the drawing is incorrect4 ,when the sketch is finished1 dust off the charcoal lightly and go over the lines again with a camel's-hair brush and ,india ink4 ,setting the ,palette is a term used for arranging the colors in a convenient manner upon the palette4 ,the colors should always occupy the same position1 so that1 the places once learned1 you will never be at a loss to find the color you want4 ,fig4 #afa shows a convenient arrangement of colors1 as well as the position of the oil-cans4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #afa4--,manner of ,arranging ,colors on ,palette4 ,fill one of your oil-cans one-third full of turpentine1 to which add enough siccatif ,courtray to turn it the color of strong coffee4 ,dip one of your good-sized brushes in this mixture and scrape it off on the edge of the can1 that the brush may not be too wet2 then take up some burnt sienna on the brush and put it on your palette about an inch or so below the terre verte1 add some terre verte1 and mix the two with your brush4 ,lay in all the shadows of the vase1 or whatever object you are about to paint1 in a flat1 even tone with the color thus formed1 keeping it thin with the turpentine and siccatif4 ,mix a tint as near the required color as you can1 and go over the whole background without regard to light or shade2 cover all the background2 do not leave any white or bare canvas showing4 ,the general effect being thus obtained1 it is easier to see what colors are needed for further painting4 ,select a medium tint between the high lights and half-tones1 and paint in the lights of the vase in a flat1 even tint2 then go over the shadows again with a medium tone1 still keeping them in one flat1 even mass4 ,should you lose the outline at any time1 dip a rag in turpentine and wash off the paint that covers it4 ,having progressed this far1 the painting should be left to dry4 ,the turpentine and siccatif ,courtray have such drying properties that by the next day you may work again on the study4 ,begin the second painting by putting in the half-tints4 ,these unite the decided light and shade1 and should be dragged over their edges1 but not blended with them4 ,once more go over the shadows1 strengthening them and putting in the reflected lights4 ,add more color in the lights where it is needed1 and put in the high lights with clear1 crisp touches4 ,work on your background in this second painting4 ,indicate the shadows1 but do not make them strong1 except the one which will probably be cast by the object2 that can be strengthened1 as it helps to set the object out from the background and gives the idea of space4 ,do not make the background strong2 keep it toned down1 that it may not become too prominent4 ,drag the background a little over the edges of the vase1 or whatever it may be you are painting1 and then paint over it again with the colors of the vase4 ,do this while working around the edges of the vase1 or object1 to prevent its looking flat1 as if it were pasted on4 ,these directions are to be applied to painting any subject2 but after you have learned how to manage the colors and wish to really paint a picture1 the medium must be changed from turpentine and siccatif ,courtray to oil1 either linseed or poppy1 using the turpentine only for the first effect of shadow4 ,when oil is used it will require two or three days for the picture to dry4 ,many advise the use of but little oil1 and there are artists who dissapprove of any medium at all4 ,before commencing the second painting1 a coating of poppy-oil should be put all over the canvas with a large1 flat camel's-hair brush4 ,every bit should be covered without touching the brush twice to the same spot4 ,this softens the first coat of paint sufficiently to allow of its blending with the next4 ,if a raw potato be cut in half and rubbed over the painting before the oil is put on1 it will prevent the oil from crawling1 or separating into drops on the canvas4 ,do not use the same brushes for dark and light tints1 but keep them separate4 ,mix your tints on your palette1 the dark tint below the dark colors1 and the light tint below the light colors4 ,in putting away your work after painting1 be sure that the tops are screwed on to all your color-tubes1 and arrange them neatly in their box4 ,clean your palette with the palette-knife1 and then wipe it off with a rag4 ,dip your brushes1 one by one1 in turpentine and wipe them on a rag2 this removes most of the paint and makes them easier to wash4 ,warm1 not hot1 water should be used for washing the brushes4 ,the best way is to hold several brushes in the right hand1 their sticks being in an upright position1 dip them in the water1 rub them on a piece of common soap1 and then scrub them round and round on the palm of the left hand2 rinse them in clear water1 and wipe dry with a clean rag4 ,our limited space will not allow of our going more fully into the details of painting2 but we hope that these directions will give some idea of how to make a beginning as a painter in oil-colors1 and after you have made a start you will find two good professors at your elbow to help you along and encourage you--,prof4 ,judgment and ,prof4 ,experience4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxiv4 ,,how ,,to ,,model ,,in ,,clay ,,and ,,wax4 ,,an eminent artist once remarked within the writer's hearing that1 should he bring into his studio the first dozen boys he happened to meet on the street1 taking them as they came1 he would probably be able to teach at least half of them to model within six months1 whereas there might not be one of them who could be taught to paint at all4 ,possibly none of these boys would ever become great sculptors1 but they could learn to model moderately well4 ,if that is the case with boys1 who are apt to be so awkward and clumsy1 how quickly could a girl's deft fingers learn to mould and form the plastic clay or wax into life-like forms4 ,in some of the institutions for the blind1 deaf and dumb1 modelling is taught with great success4 ,quickly the sensitive fingers of the young inmates run over the object to be copied1 and skilfully they reproduce in their clay the form conveyed to them by touch alone4 ,it is pleasant to think that these silent little workers have this new pleasure added to their somewhat limited stock2 but at the same time the fact puts to shame some of us who1 having all our faculties1 the use of all our senses1 and not infrequently artistic ability in addition1 do so little with the talents intrusted to our care4 ,let us to work then1 girls1 and see if we cannot accomplish at least as much as our unfortunate sisters1 who have neither sight nor hearing to guide them4 ,illustration3 ,modelling in ,clay4 ,the great difficulty we encounter in learning to draw--which is representing things as they appear1 not as they really are--will not trouble us in this other department of art1 for in modelling it must be our aim to do precisely the reverse1 and reproduce an object exactly as it is1 not as it appears4 ,modelling1 besides its own worth1 is of value as an aid to drawing1 for it teaches form1 and the shadows on an object can be drawn more intelligently and correctly when it is known just what formations produce them4 ,a great deal can be done in modelling without the aid of a teacher4 ,so1 not waiting to look up a professor1 suppose we commence by ourselves and see what we can do4 ,it is very fascinating work1 and if a few failures are the result of our first attempt1 we need not be discouraged1 for what others can do1 we also can accomplish4 ,the writer has lately been initiated into the mysteries of this art1 and since1 as they say1 the person just graduated from a primary department is best fitted to teach in that department1 perhaps the hints given here may be better suited to the understanding of beginners than if they were written by a great sculptor1 who might forget that everyone does not know1 as well as he does himself1 the preliminary steps necessary even in accomplishing the grandest results4 ,instead of entering into the later and more artistically finished processes we will confine ourselves to the prelude or introduction to modelling2 and then1 girls1 with the object before you1 your only guide and instructor1 you must work out the rest for yourselves4 ,the first thing to do is to provide your ,materials1 and here is a list of all you will need3 #a4 ,clay1 such as is used by potters1 perfectly free from grit4 #b4 ,modelling-tools4 ,these can be bought at any artists' material store1 and the simplest ones might be made at home of hard wood4 ,only a few tools are necessary for a beginner2 ,fig4 #afb shows those most useful4 ,the fingers and thumbs are the best of all tools1 and a great deal can be done with them1 though for fine1 delicate modelling tools must be used4 ,illustration3 ,modelling ,tools #c4 ,modelling-stand4 ,a regular modelling-stand with rotary platform will cost from eight to twelve dollars and the expense may be an objection2 but the writer has found that an ordinary high office-stool with revolving seat makes a good substitute4 ,if the stool is not high enough it can be raised by placing on the seat a drawing- or pastry-board1 and on top of that a square wooden box about one foot high and broad enough to allow sufficient room for a good-sized head and bust4 #d4 ,basin of water and towel for washing and drying the hands4 ,how to ,manage ,clay4 ,clay costs1 near ,new ,york1 from one to three cents per pound1 and about fifty pounds will be required4 ,if possible buy it moist1 but if dry1 put it into an earthenware jar1 or anything that will hold water1 and cover with clear water4 ,let it remain until thoroughly moistened2 then with a stick stir the clay around as1 when a small girl1 you did the mud while making mud-pies1 until it is free from lumps and is perfectly smooth2 clear away from the sides of the jar and pile it up in the centre4 ,when it is dry enough not to be muddy and is still pliable1 it is in a fit condition to work with4 ,it is necessary to keep your hands perfectly clean and conveniences for washing them should be handy4 ,do not use muddy water or a dusty towel4 ,use any tools that will produce the result desired with the greatest ease2 a little experience will soon determine what they are1 but as a rule the largest are best4 ,when leaving unfinished work cover it with a damp cloth to keep it moist4 ,if you are working on a head1 and the features have been commenced1 stick a small wooden tool in the head just above the forehead to hold the cloth away from the face1 for it is liable to soften the nose and push it out of shape if it rests upon it4 ,illustration ,a frame made of laths 7,fig4 #afc7 covered with oil-cloth or rubber 7an old gossamer water-proof will be just the thing71 placed over the modelling1 will keep it better than the cloth1 as it excludes the air and prevents its drying 7,fig4 #afd74 ,when using the frame1 sprinkle your work by dipping a clean whisk-broom into water and shaking it over the clay4 ,remember1 the clay must always be kept moist and pliable and never allowed to dry4 ,if it does become dry and hard there is nothing to do but to put it back into the jar1 and go through the process of damping it again4 ,illustration ,keep your tools clean1 and do not allow the metal ones to become rusty1 as they will if carelessly left on the modelling-stand when not in use4 ,to avoid trouble of this kind it is best to put your tools in a box where they will be perfectly dry4 ,unless you wish to go through one of the writer's first experiences1 when she was obliged to let her tools lie in a pan of kerosene oil for two days1 and then clean them with knife-brick4 ,how to ,preserve ,modelled ,clay4 ,if terra-cotta clay is used1 it can be baked in a kiln1 which will1 while hardening1 turn it a fine buff terra-cotta color1 and make the object1 if well modelled1 ornamental enough for almost any use4 ,from the other clay1 plaster casts can be taken1 and the article reproduced in plaster as many times as desired4 ,hints for ,modelling a ,head4 ,always work from a model1 and it is best to try copying plaster casts before attempting to model from life4 ,illustration3 ,how to ,model a ,head4 ,place on the centre of your stand a wooden or tin box 7a cigar-box will do7 to form the base2 cover this with clay in the form of ,fig4 #afe1 and stick a support in the middle1 as shown in diagram4 ,the support may be a piece of kindling-wood eight inches long and about one inch thick4 ,build up the clay around this stick1 as in ,fig4 #aff1 and with your hands mould the clay1 piecing it out here1 and cutting off there1 until it bears some resemblance to a head1 as in ,fig4 #afg4 ,still using your hands1 get the general proportions of the head1 and then commence the features4 ,begin with the profile1 using tools when necessary1 and try for character without detail2 then turn the head a little and work from that point of view2 always look at your model from the same point of view as you do your work4 ,turn the head in the opposite direction and model the other side1 keeping the face evenly balanced4 ,continue turning your work little by little1 until each outline it presents is as near as you can get like the corresponding outline of your model1 and then work up the detail4 ,in modelling any object the same process1 of viewing the model from all points1 must be gone through with4 ,do not strive to obtain a likeness at first1 but be careful to have all of your outlines correct1 and the likeness will come of itself4 ,how to ,model in ,wax4 ,modelling-wax prepared at home is much better than any that can be purchased4 ,the following recipe is a very good one3 ,modelling-wax4 #a pound pure yellow beeswax4 pound corn-starch4 #d ounces ,venice turpentine4 #a ounce ,venetian red powder4 ounce sweet-oil4 ,put the wax on the stove in a saucepan and let it melt2 take off and pour in the turpentine4 ,never attempt to add this while the wax is near the fire1 as it is extremely dangerous4 ,it is a good idea1 when buying the ingredients1 to have the oil and turpentine put in the same bottle 7which should have a wide neck71 then they can be poured into the wax at the same time4 ,warm the bottle of oil and turpentine in hot water to soften before mixing with the wax4 ,keep stirring all the time4 ,pour in the corn-starch and ,venetian red4 ,when the corn-starch is dissolved the wax is ready for use4 ,illustration3 ,bas-relief ,figure in ,wax4 ,modelling-wax is much more expensive than clay2 it is used principally for small objects and those that require fine workmanship4 ,it is quite useful for sketchy work1 as it may be carried about almost like a sketchbook1 and being so much cleaner than clay1 it can be used even in the parlor without damage to table or carpet4 ,with the wax on a small board one can sit at a table and work very comfortably4 ,the tools for clay modelling may also be used for wax2 probably the smallest will be most useful4 ,illustration3 ,bas-relief ,head in ,wax4 ,as cold weather advances1 we like to pass the evenings in some agreeable occupation1 that may be carried on without disturbing the family group around the fireside4 ,for such occasions1 modelling in wax will make a pleasant pastime4 ,sitting quietly1 taking part in the general conversation1 or listening while someone reads aloud1 one may model the wax into many pretty forms to be preserved afterward in plaster1 or1 obtaining a profile view1 a likeness of one of the group may be done in bas-relief4 ,if a slate is used to work on1 it will make a good foundation1 and the head can first be drawn on it in outline and the wax built over it1 using the drawing as a guide4 ,the slate is smooth and firm1 and it is a good idea to use it as a foundation for all wax bas-relief1 especially when plaster casts are to be taken from the modelling1 for in that case the panel forming the background must be perfectly even4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,making ,plaster ,casts4 ,,chapter ,,xxv4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,plaster ,,casts4 ,,it is not at all difficult2 anyone can succeed in it who will take the pains to follow carefully the directions given here for making plaster casts4 ,without the knowledge of drawing or modelling you can in this way reproduce almost any article in a very short time4 ,casting in plaster is really so simple a process that even a child can soon learn to manage it nicely4 ,you will need a board1 about a foot and a half square1 upon which to work1 fifteen or twenty pounds of clay1 five pounds of plaster-of-,paris1 a cup of warm melted lard1 and several small wooden pegs2 these can be made of wooden tooth-picks or matches broken in two4 ,select an object with few angles and a smooth surface to experiment on2 a firm round apple will do4 ,rub the lard all over the apple until every particle is greased2 then lay it in the centre of your board4 ,take some clay and pack it around it just as high as the middle of the apple1 forming a square1 as in ,fig4 #afh4 ,smooth the clay off on the edges and stick pegs in diagonal opposite corners 7,fig4 #afh72 then with more clay build a wall close around the apple and its case1 making the sides one inch higher than the top of the apple 7,fig4 #afi74 ,put a cupful of clear water into a pan or dish1 and stir in enough plaster of ,paris to make it like batter2 pour the plaster over the apple1 filling the clay box to the top4 ,this makes a half mould of clay and a half mould of plaster4 ,illustration ,when the plaster is hard1 which will be in a very short time1 pull away your clay wall1 and take out the apple and half plaster mould together1 lifting the apple from its half clay mould4 ,remove the clay from your board and set the plaster mould containing the apple in the centre4 ,rub lard over the apple and upper edge of the mould1 build around it the clay wall1 as you did the first time2 roll a small piece of clay into a slender conical shape and stand it upright on top of the apple1 as in ,fig4 #afi4 ,this will make a hole through which to pour the plaster when filling the completed mould1 and it must stand high enough to reach above the top of the clay wall4 ,pour the plaster over the apple as at first1 and let it set or harden4 ,take away the wall of clay once more1 and carefully separate the two parts of the mould with the blade of a table-knife2 remove the apple1 and all is ready for the final cast which is to produce your plaster fruit 7,fig4 #agj74 ,thoroughly grease the inside of your mould1 fit the two parts together1 and wrap and tie them with string to hold them in place4 ,pour in the plaster1 through the hole left in one-half of the mould1 until it is quite full2 then gently shake it to send the plaster into all small crevices4 ,let your mould stand without moving again until sufficient time has elapsed for the plaster to harden2 then gently separate the two parts and you will find a perfect cast of the apple4 ,the ridge made by the joining of the mould you must scrape off with a sharp knife1 or rub with sand-paper4 ,in taking casts of almost any object not too complicated1 this same method must be employed4 ,the only difficulty lies in deciding just where to place the dividing-line1 which must be exactly at the broadest part of your model1 otherwise you will break your mould in taking the object out4 ,in casting a hand the clay must be built up around each finger to precisely its widest part2 therefore it is a good plan1 before commencing1 to mark on the hand1 with a fine paint-brush and ink1 the line that is to be observed4 ,when making casts of long objects1 or those that are larger at one end than the other1 such as vases1 always lay them on one side1 as a much better mould can be obtained in that way4 ,i have read that if milk-and-water is used for mixing the plaster1 or1 after the cast has hardened1 if a little oil1 in which wax has been dissolved1 be applied to the surface1 it will take a high polish2 and if left for a while in a smoky room it will acquire the look of old ivory4 ,the same writer also states1 without giving the proportions1 that liquid gum-arabic and sufficient alum in solution1 mixed and put into the slip or soft plaster1 will make the cast so hard that it can be set as a panel in a cabinet4 ,the dead white of plaster-casts is frequently objected to when they are wanted for ornaments2 but that difficulty is easily overcome by mixing dry colors with the plaster before wetting it4 ,illustration ,a small quantity of yellow ochre will make the plaster creamy or ivory-like2 brown will give a wood color1 and red a terra-cotta4 ,plaster-casts can also be bronzed with gold1 red1 or green bronze1 which makes quite handsome ornaments of them4 ,a plaster panel in bass-relief1 bronzed with gold bronze and mounted on black or dark-colored velvet1 is an exceedingly rich wall decoration4 ,to mount a panel of this kind you must first secure a smooth1 flat piece of board1 not more than half an inch thick1 and just large enough to allow about four inches of the background to show all around the panel when it is mounted4 ,cover the board with velvet or velveteen1 bringing it smoothly over the edges1 and tacking it down at the back4 ,fasten on it a small brass hook4 ,fig4 #aga is the best kind to use1 which is tacked to the board with small1 brass tacks4 ,make a ring or loop for hanging the panel in this way3 ,take a piece of wire about three inches long1 form a small loop in the middle1 and give the wire several twists2 then bend the ends out on each side4 ,scrape a narrow place in the top edge of the panel1 just long enough to admit the wire1 and about half an inch deep2 then place the wire in this little ditch and fill up the hole to the top with soft plaster4 ,when this hardens the ring will be quite secure4 ,fig4 #agb4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxvi4 ,,china ,,painting4 ,,certainly you can paint on china2 have confidence1 and do not hesitate because you may never have studied art1 but select the china you wish to decorate and we will go to work4 ,first1 take what is needed for present use from the following ,list of ,materials4 ,,palette4 ,a common square1 white china tile is the best palette for mineral colors2 but in case you have no tile1 an old white plate will answer the purpose4 ,,brushes4 ,these are of camel's-hair1 ,figs4 #agc and #agd1 are broad and flat1 and are used in placing the color on the china when the surface is to be tinted4 ,fig4 #age is for blending the color after it is on the china2 it is called a blender1 and is useful where borders and surfaces are to be tinted4 ,figs4 #agf and #agh are for general use4 ,fig4 #agg1 with its long1 slender point1 is for gilding1 another similar brush is needed for ,india-ink4 ,mark the two brushes in some way to distinguish them one from the other1 and never use either for any paint except that for which it is intended4 ,fig4 #agi is a stipple for blending the colors when painting a face1 a fish1 the sky of a landscape1 or wherever delicate1 fine blending is needed4 ,illustration3 ,brushes for ,china ,painting 7about one-half actual size74 ,to clean the brushes after using3 dip them in turpentine and wipe off the paint on a cotton cloth1 repeating the operation until the brushes are perfectly clean2 then dip them in fat oil1 and bring them out smooth to a fine point4 ,do not allow the brushes to become bent over1 if the box is not long enough for them to lie out straight1 remove the quills from the wooden handles and they can easily be replaced when needed4 ,should the brushes seem a little stiff at the next painting1 immerse them in turpentine2 this will make them soft and pliable4 ,to save the expensive gold paint1 the gilder should be kept exclusively for gilding1 and need not be cleaned1 as it will not be injured if the hairs are carefully straightened out and the brush put away with the gold4 ,,knives4 ,fig4 #ahj is a horn palette-knife for mixing ,lacroix white1 the yellows1 and all such colors as are injured by contact with metal4 ,it is the only knife used with the mat paints for ,royal ,worcester decoration4 ,fig4 #aha is a steel palette-knife for general use4 ,fig4 #ahb is a steel scraper for removing paint from the china when necessary4 ,always clean the knives after mixing one color1 before using them for another4 ,illustration3 ,horn ,palette-knife4 ,steel ,palette-knife4 ,steel ,scraper4 7,reduced sizes47 ,,pad4 ,this is made of a ball of cotton tied in a piece of soft lining-silk1 fine linen1 or cotton-cloth 7,fig4 #ahc7 and is used for tinting4 ,illustration3 ,printer's ,pad4 ,,the ,,paints are ,lacroix's colors2 they come in tubes and should be squeezed out on the palette and used as in oil painting1 with a little turpentine and fat oil when desired4 ,to moisten the colors while painting dip your brush1 carefully1 without shaking or moving it around1 into the turpentine or oil1 and then in the color4 ,allow the paint to lie on the palette as it comes from the tube1 except when two colors are mixed1 or when using the stipple for blending one tint with another1 or when tinting1 then the paint must be mixed and rubbed down with oil and turpentine4 ,keep the colors in a cool place1 and when returning them to the box1 after you have finished painting1 do not lay them back on the same side4 ,always remember to turn them over so that the color will not separate from the oil4 ,if you are careful and follow these hints1 your colors will keep in a good condition4 ,we would advise you to purchase the paints as they are needed1 thereby avoiding all unnecessary expenditure4 ,,oils4 ,fat oil is for general use in painting4 ,clove oil is used in its place when two or more tints are to be blended together1 as in painting a face1 etc4 ,capavia oil is always mixed with the colors for grounding4 ,,turpentine is in constant demand in china painting4 ,it is used with all the different oils1 paints1 bronzes1 and gilt1 and should be poured in a small cup or any little vessel1 and kept convenient while painting4 ,,tar ,,paste comes in bottles1 and is used to take the color off of tinted backgrounds1 in order to leave a clean surface of the china in which to paint the design in different colors4 ,the paste should be rubbed down smooth on the tile with the palette-knife2 if it is too hard1 a little tar oil may be added4 ,a small brush is best to use for the paste in covering the design you wish to wash out2 but be very careful to keep within the outlines1 for this mixture will take off the color wherever it touches4 ,when the tint is light the paste may be wiped off in a few moments2 but when it is dark1 the paste must be allowed to remain on for perhaps hours before the paint will be sufficiently softened to remove4 ,use small balls of raw cotton-batting in wiping off the paste1 and take a fresh piece for every stroke4 ,if any of the tar paste is left on the tile after using1 scrape it off with your palette-knife1 and return it to the bottle4 ,,mat ,,gold is for gilding1 and can be either burnished or highly polished4 ,it comes on a little square of glass inclosed in a box4 ,this gold can also be used as solid ornamentation or for delicate tracery1 and is sometimes used over colors1 greens excepted1 but is then never so bright as when on the plain white china4 ,the gold is prepared for painting on a tile kept expressly for the purpose1 and which must not be used for any other paint4 ,place some of the gold on the palette with your palette-knife1 and mix a little turpentine with it by dipping your palette-knife in the turpentine and rubbing down the gold with the turpentine on the knife4 ,if more is needed1 again dip your knife in the liquid1 and do so as often as it is necessary2 but you must use the utmost care not to have the gold too thin2 gild with it as stiff as it can be smoothly applied4 ,should any gold remain on the palette after the gilding is finished1 mix in a little turpentine and scrape it all up with your palette-knife1 then replace the gold on the square of glass4 ,silver is used the same as gold4 ,the bronzes are for handles and conventional flowers or figures2 they are rich and pleasing in effect4 ,,pure ,,gold cannot be employed for gilding plain white china4 ,it also comes on a little square of glass and is used for gilding over colors4 ,it can be applied over any mineral paint or relief1 and may be polished or burnished as desired4 ,this gold is mixed with turpentine1 for use in the same manner as mat gold4 ,,relief4 ,the best is mat relief1 which comes in a powder1 and is used for both tube and mat colors4 ,it is prepared by mixing with a very little fat oil and turpentine1 and should be applied stiff enough to make a raised line4 ,it is useful where a small raised surface is desired1 as on the edge of a leaf or the petals of flowers4 ,a fish-net is much more effective if the gilt be put on over the relief4 ,should the relief dry and become too stiff while using1 soften it from time to time with a little turpentine1 always using the horn knife for mixing1 as the steel knife should never be used with the relief1 and the relief must always be fired before the gilt is applied4 ,enamel white can be mixed with delicate tints1 turpentine1 and a very little fat oil for raised flowers2 or the white alone may be used for pearls1 imitation of lace1 or embroidery1 but its use is limited and it will not stand two firings1 so should always be the last paint applied4 ,,mat ,,colors are for ,royal ,worcester decorations4 ,they come in powders1 and when mixed with a little oil and turpentine are used in the same way as the ,lacroix tube paints4 ,,box ,,for ,,materials4 ,select a light wooden box1 or one of strong pasteboard2 have the box of a convenient size to contain all your painting materials4 ,,pieces ,,of ,,soft1 ,,old ,,muslin1 torn in different sizes1 and plenty of them1 are very essential for cleaning brushes and rubbing paint off the tile or china2 the demand for clean pieces will be constant while painting4 ,,china4 ,have this of the very finest ,french ware1 without spots or other imperfections of the surface1 and never attempt to decorate china after it has been used1 for it seldom proves satisfactory4 ,a ,monochrome ,painting4 ,for this we will need a tile1 a pad1 a broad flat brush 7,fig4 #agc71 some turpentine1 capavia1 two tubes of paint--one copper-water green1 the other brown green--a palette-knife1 and some pieces of cotton cloth4 ,now be sure your china is perfectly clean and dry1 then mix your copper-water green for ,tinting4 ,place enough color on your palette to cover the entire surface to be tinted2 dip your palette-knife in the capavia oil and tap it off the knife on the tile2 in the same way place turpentine on the tile with the oil1 and use your palette-knife to thoroughly mix the paint1 oil1 and turpentine4 ,if the mixture seems too stiff add a little more oil and turpentine1 but be careful not to have the paint too thin so that it will run2 test its consistency with a brush on a clean place on the tile4 ,as a rule1 the proportions for tinting should be five drops of paint to three of capavia1 mixed with a little turpentine4 ,the paint being prepared1 take the flat brush and begin to paint2 rapidly cover the entire surface with color4 ,then go over the tinting with a pad1 touching lightly and gently1 not letting the pad rest a moment on the paint1 nor touching it twice in the same place in succession4 ,continue going over and over it until the grounding is even and of a uniform tint4 ,then set the china away to dry1 in a safe place1 where it will be free from dust4 ,always make a fresh pad every time you tint1 and a separate one for each color used1 as a pad cannot do service more than once4 ,all tinted grounds and borders are made in this way1 the capavia oil and turpentine being mixed with any of the grounding colors you may wish to use4 ,tinting is very easily and quickly done2 but should anything happen to spot or mar the evenness of the grounding1 the paint must all be washed off with turpentine1 and the china tinted over again4 ,when your green-tinted china is perfectly dry1 gather some maple leaves and with the brown-green paint try a ,new ,method of ,decorating ,china4 ,the leaves must be free from dust and moisture and perfectly fresh4 ,place a small quantity of paint on the palette1 do not mix the paint with oil or turpentine1 but rub it down well on the tile as it comes from the tube2 make the paint perfectly smooth1 now press a small clean pad down lightly1 lifting and again pressing until the paint is smoothly distributed on the pad2 next select a leaf and place it face or right side downward on a piece of folded newspaper1 then press the pad down on the under side of the leaf1 which is now lying upward1 repeating the operation until the leaf is sufficiently covered with paint4 ,this done1 carefully place the leaf painted side downward on the china1 over it lay a piece of common wrapping-paper1 and rub your finger gently all over the covered leaf4 ,then remove the outside paper and very carefully take up the leaf1 when an exact impress of the natural leaf will be printed on the china4 ,repeat the operation with another leaf either larger or smaller1 and still another1 using as many as you wish2 connect the leaves to a central branch by making the stems and branch in the same color with a small paint-brush4 ,to do this paint a long line for the branch and other smaller ones for the stems of the leaves4 ,set the china away to dry1 and it will be ready for firing4 ,very pretty effects may be secured by using two shades of one color for the tinting and designs4 ,first tint the china1 and when it is perfectly dry1 ornament it with the same paint in the manner described1 making the ground of a lighter tint than the decorations4 ,the colors of fall leaves can be used on white china1 or you may make the combinations and designs of whatever is most pleasing4 ,it is well to have some idea of what your decoration is to be like before commencing with the leaves4 ,if you desire a spray1 try to place the leaves as they are on the natural spray1 or as represented in some picture taken for a guide4 ,the prints also look well used in a conventional style4 ,as any kind of leaves or grasses that will print can be employed1 your decorations will always be original and true to nature4 ,flowers are more difficult to print1 yet when the impressions are successful they are very beautiful4 ,you will find this new idea an interesting method of ornamenting china1 while the decorations may be made in much less time than is usually required4 ,the style is suitable for dinner-sets1 vases1 tiles1 plaques1 and lamps1 and it requires no knowledge of drawing or painting to decorate china in this simple yet effective manner4 ,tracing4 ,lay a piece of tracing-paper over the design to be copied and trace the outlines very carefully with a hard lead-pencil4 ,then have your china perfectly clean and dry1 and give it a wash all over with a clean cotton cloth wet with clear turpentine4 ,place a piece of red transfer-paper on the china1 and having determined exactly where you wish the design1 lay the tracing-paper over the transfer-paper on the space for decoration4 ,use bits of gummed paper on the corners of the transfer- and tracing-paper to hold them in place1 and carefully go over the lines with a lead-pencil1 remove the papers1 and the design will be clearly outlined on the ware4 ,now rub a little ,india-ink on a common individual butter-plate of white china1 and using a fine brush1 very carefully paint over the red marks with the ,india-ink1 making your lines as distinct and delicate as possible4 ,when this is finished1 again wash the china with turpentine to remove any of the red coloring which may be apparent on its surface4 ,thus prepared the design can be painted1 or the china may first be tinted and allowed to dry1 when the outlines will be plainly visible through the tinting1 and the color can be removed from the design with tar paste4 ,use the scraper to take the grounding off of minute spaces4 ,for those skilled in drawing it will not be necessary to trace the design1 as it can readily be sketched on the china with a lead-pencil after the ware has first received a coat of turpentine1 and when tinted the decoration can be drawn on after the grounding has thoroughly dried1 and the color may be removed as before4 ,mottled ,grounds4 ,prepare the paint as for tinting1 only make it more moist1 and dab it lightly over the china by means of a piece of cotton cloth on the end of your finger2 this will give the china a mottled appearance which in some cases is preferred to the plain grounding4 ,snow ,landscape4 ,we will take for example ,fig4 #ahd4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahd ,after tracing the design1 paint a streak across the sky1 just back and a little above the trees1 with carnation ,no4 #a mixed with clove oil and turpentine1 then another narrow streak above it of a lighter shade1 and another still lighter of the same color1 allowing each tint to meet4 ,next mix light sky-blue with clove oil and turpentine1 and paint as deep a tint as it will make across the sky at the top of the plate1 graduating it down to the red2 use the stipple immediately while the paint is wet to blend the colors and tints2 this finished1 make the reflections on the ice1 beginning with carnation ,no4 #a for the ice nearest the castle1 and ending near the bottom of the plate with the deepest shade of light sky-blue1 using the colors mixed for the sky4 ,paint the foliage in the background with neutral gray and sky-blue mixed with turpentine and fat oil for the darker tones1 and turquoise-blue with neutral gray1 turpentine and fat oil for the lighter parts1 also for shading the darker portions of the snow4 ,then take brown ,no4 #d as it comes from the tube1 with a little turpentine when necessary1 for the shading of the trees in the foreground1 the outlining of the castle1 and the tufts of grass and edges of the ice in places where the copy requires it4 ,leave the white china for the high lights and the white snow on the roof of the castle1 on the trees1 and here and there on the ground4 ,paint the castle with neutral gray and yellow ochre mixed with turpentine and fat oil1 and its windows with brown ,no4 #d1 using the color as it comes from the tube4 ,now allow the plate to dry and then have it fired1 after which mix carnation ,no4 #a with clove oil and turpentine1 and touch up the sky and reflections on the ice1 using the stipple if necessary2 then mix light sky-blue with clove oil and turpentine and paint the sky where that color is required and the light shadows on the snow2 then take yellow ochre for portions of the trees1 places in the foreground1 and touching up the castle2 mix this color with fat-oil and turpentine4 ,again strengthen the trees and other places1 where the painting requires it1 with brown ,no4 #d1 unmixed1 except with a little turpentine when necessary2 for the last touches mix relief-white with fat oil and clean turpentine1 using the horn-palette knife always when mixing the white2 this is to be laid on1 in little raised places1 where the snow is whitest on the ground and where the snow has lodged in the trees4 ,now inclose the snow scene with a gilt band1 using the stipple to make an uneven edge of gilt on the surrounding white rim2 the gold next to the picture must be perfectly smooth and even2 put this on with your fine long-haired brush2 then make a similar band on the edge of the plate and it will be finished and ready for its last firing4 ,almost any snow landscape with a sunset sky may be painted in this way4 ,often you can find ,christmas cards which will furnish very good copies4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahe ,how to ,paint a ,head on ,china4 ,select a pretty copy from some photograph1 as in ,fig4 #ahe2 very carefully trace the head on a plate and go over the lines with ,indian ink2 next give the plate another wash with turpentine1 to remove all remains of the color from the transfer-paper2 then mix thoroughly two parts of carnation ,no4 #b with one part of ivory-yellow1 adding a little turpentine and clove oil2 give the face and neck a wash with this color and touch up the cheeks with carnation ,no4 #a mixed with clove oil and turpentine2 now lay on the shadows with neutral gray1 five parts1 mixed with deep chrome-green1 one part1 using clove oil and turpentine in mixing the colors2 last1 the deepest shadows with brown ,no4 #d1 two parts1 to one of ivory-black1 mixed together with clove oil and turpentine1 and immediately before any of the paint dries use the stipple to blend the colors1 making the face round out and have the blending soft and true to nature2 set your copy before you and try to have the shadows on the face you paint correspond exactly with those in the copy4 ,now leave the face and neck1 and place some brown ,no4 #d on the tile2 do not mix it with anything2 use it as it comes from the tube1 dipping your brush in turpentine when it becomes necessary to thin the paint a little2 with this paint the shading of the hair and follow with your brush1 as nearly as possible1 the sway of the masses4 ,that finished1 paint the eyes1 eyebrows1 and nostrils with brown ,no4 #d and ivory-black mixed together as they come from the tubes1 using when necessary a little turpentine2 then mix a little carnation ,no4 #a with fat oil for the lips4 ,next turn your attention to the drapery2 shade the white material with gray ,no4 #a1 unmixed1 and gray ,no4 #b for the deeper shadows1 mixed with fat oil and turpentine4 ,for the handkerchief on the head mix emerald-green with fat-oil and turpentine2 put it on in a light tint1 so that the handkerchief can be shaded1 when dry1 with the same color4 ,when the plate is dry1 it is ready to be fired4 ,after it has been fired touch up the shading on the face and neck with two parts of carnation ,no4 #b mixed with one of brown ,no4 #d1 using clove oil and turpentine while mixing2 and for the deepest shadows mix two parts of brown and one of ivory-black together with clove oil and turpentine4 ,this must be put on carefully1 so that the shadows will not be too dark4 ,use the stipple to blend the shadows2 then give the hair a wash of yellow ochre all over1 and touch up the handkerchief on the head with emerald green1 the same you used before4 ,for the background of the head mix light coffee1 turpentine1 and capavia oil2 make it an even tint with the blender 7,fig4 #age72 the brush must be clean and dry1 and used in the same manner as the pad in tinting1 then1 for the outer border1 mix celestial-blue with capavia and turpentine1 and with your large flat brush paint the border and blend it to an even tint with your pad4 ,when this is finished wipe off the paint around the edge as evenly as possible1 so that the bare china may be left to receive a band of gold4 ,roll up a piece of white cotton cloth into a small point and with this remove the paint around the inner edge of the blue border1 making an even narrow white band2 this is also to be gilded4 ,on a clean tile mix the mat gold with turpentine1 and using the slender1 fine1 long-haired brush1 carefully cover the white bands of china with gold2 when this is finished the plate is ready for the second and last firing4 ,if a fairer complexion be desired1 make the flesh-tints of the same colors1 only lighter in tint2 try the paint on the edge of the tile until the tint is correct4 ,always try your colors this way when painting any design4 ,for blue eyes use sky-blue shaded with black2 the high light of the eye may be left the white of the china4 ,if you wish the hair very light1 take ivory-yellow and shade with sepia and black4 ,once more we say1 be very careful in tracing not to get the head or features out of drawing1 as so much depends upon the correct outlines4 ,before sending china to be fired1 paint in small figures the date on which it was decorated and add your name or initials4 ,how to ,paint a ,carp1 ,sea-weed1 and ,fish-net on ,china4 ,having traced in your design very carefully1 mix one part of neutral gray with two parts of sky-blue1 some clove oil1 and turpentine2 with this paint the upper edge of the back of the fish dark1 graduating to white along near the centre of the fish2 stipple this so that it will look even1 soft1 and rounding1 keeping it dark on the edge and tinting down to the white china2 paint the tail and dorsal fins a flat tint of gray ,no4 #b mixed with fat oil and turpentine2 then mix carnation ,no4 #b with fat oil and turpentine for a flat tint on gills1 mouth1 and ventral fin2 shade the mouth with the same color and paint the anal and pectoral fins a flat tint of carnation ,no4 #b mixed with sepia2 when dry shade with the same color1 and also shade the gills and fins painted carnation with carnation1 and the dorsal fins and tail shade with ivory-black mixed with fat oil and turpentine2 try the paint with your brush until you get rather a gray tint instead of black1 and use this for the shading2 now paint the rows of spots along the back of the fish ivory-black1 making the dots smaller as they approach the tail2 and with your eraser take the paint off of the eye1 leaving a clean white spot of china2 paint a fine circle around this in ivory-black2 then paint a portion of the eye black1 leaving the white china for the high lights2 in painting the scales and lower part of the fish use gray ,no4 #a as it comes from the tube1 mark an outline of gray along the lower edge of the fish and stipple it off in the white1 remembering this gray must occupy only a narrow line along the lower edge of the fish4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahf ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahg ,commence to mark the scales in gray ,no4 #a by making a line of them with a fine-pointed brush downward across the body of the fish 7,fig4 #ahf7 and this will be a guide to build out from 7,fig4 #ahg72 after the painting has thoroughly dried begin again by marking1 on the head and around the eye1 the tiny scales in gray ,no4 #b1 with a little fat oil and turpentine1 and paint a line along the upper edge of the head and back with brown ,no4 #d1 and another lighter line of the same color along the back just below and adjoining the first one2 paint the eye and markings on the head brown and strengthen the tail and dorsal fins with gray ,no4 #b2 touch up around the gills with sky blue1 also with yellow ochre where the copy requires it4 ,then turn your attention to the sea-weeds2 mark the thread-like branches of these in different colors1 using carnation1 brown ,no4 #d1 gray ,no4 #b1 and brown-green2 paint each weed in one color1 place the sea-weeds on one side or corner of the plate1 making them branch out this way and that1 as in nature4 ,now clean off your palette and mix some mat relief for the fish-net1 which is to be placed over and across a portion of the plate2 with a lead-pencil mark the netting on the plate1 but do not touch the fish2 then with a very fine brush follow the markings with the relief1 when it is necessary to paint across the fish1 your eye and the copy must be your guides1 as it would take the paint off the fish to attempt any marking on it4 ,the relief on the fish cannot be altered1 so be careful to have it correct the first time4 ,should the line of relief be too broad in other places1 remove it with your scraper and make another trial4 ,when the plate is perfectly dry it must be fired1 after which put in a background of warm gray mixed with capavia and turpentine2 bring this to an even tint with the blender1 and if any paint blends over on the fish wipe it off while the color is damp2 also remove the paint from the netting and set the china away to allow the color to thoroughly dry2 next paint broad sweeps across the plate1 but not over the fish1 with gray ,no4 #b mixed with fat oil and turpentine1 to represent the different tints of the water1 and again remove the paint from the net2 now touch up the sea-weed and the fish where they need strengthening1 then give the fish a very light wash of gray ,no4 #a4 ,here and there along the upper edges of the water colored gray ,no4 #b make a very fine line with enamel or relief-white mixed with a little fat oil and turpentine2 gild the fish-net1 using either pure gold or mat gold1 cover the relief carefully with the gold1 and put it on thick but in fine lines2 this accomplished1 finish by gilding the edges of the plate with mat gold1 and when dry send it to be fired4 ,to avoid mistakes when sending china to be fired1 state whether you wish the gold burnished1 dull1 or polished4 ,foliage on ,china ,made ,with a ,sponge4 ,prepare the paint with fat oil and turpentine1 rub it down smooth1 then with a small sponge apply the colors1 using different shades as the first dry1 and touching up afterward with a brush2 in this way you can also paint backgrounds which cannot be made with the brush4 ,mixing ,colors4 ,the best way to paint with safety when you are in doubt what colors will mix1 is to test them yourself4 ,for this purpose take a ,french china plate and make experiments with different colors on the plate2 at the same time write down a memorandum of the paints used and of those mixed1 have the plate fired2 then paste your memorandum on the back4 ,use this for reference1 and with experience will come the full knowledge of the use of all the paints4 ,royal ,worcester ,ware is very delicate and dainty and something quite novel for amateurs in the way of china decorations4 ,very beautiful pieces of this ware may be seen now in all the leading china establishments in ,new ,york ,city1 and so choice is it that even some of the largest jewelry stores have rare ,royal ,worcester vases among their most valuable articles on exhibition4 ,we know of no book that teaches this art of decoration1 and although we have seen some amateur work which only an expert could distinguish from the genuine article itself1 we think our exposition of the method is the first of its kind printed in this country2 and girls1 if you would know the secret1 so that you also may be able to paint and gild in this beautiful fashion1 you have only to listen while the writer tells how to decorate a ,royal ,worcester vase as she did2 then you will have a practicable and detailed method which we know to be good1 having tried it4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ahh4--,royal ,worcester ,vase4 ,select a vase of the finest ,french china1 and be sure that it is perfectly clean1 dry1 and free from dust4 ,then with a clean white cotton cloth give the vase a wash all over with clear turpentine1 and having chosen your design1 make a tracing of it on the vase1 and it will be ready for grounding4 ,mix enough mat lemon-yellow to cover the entire surface of the vase4 ,first place a little of the powder on the tile1 then dip your palette-knife in the capavia oil and tap it off on the tile2 in the same way drop turpentine on the tile with the oil4 ,use a horn palette-knife and thoroughly mix the paint1 oil1 and turpentine2 if the mixture seems too stiff1 add a little more oil and turpentine1 but be careful not to have the paint too thin1 so that it will run2 try the paint with a brush on a clean place on the tile to see if it is of the right consistency and shade2 do not let the color be too intense2 it should be of a delicate tint1 and if it is too dark add a very little more oil4 ,take a broad1 flat brush and begin to paint at the top of the vase1 passing around with short strokes rapidly over its whole surface2 go over the tinting with a pad1 touching lightly and gently2 then set the vase away to dry in a dry place free from dust4 ,the ,indian-ink outlines will be plainly visible through the paint1 and when the grounding or tinting has thoroughly hardened1 to remove the color from the design1 mix a little of the tar paste upon a clean tile by working it with your palette-knife until it is smooth4 ,use a small brush and go over the design with this mixture1 covering every part except the stems and fine grasses2 be very careful not to go outside of the lines4 ,when the design is all painted with the paste1 begin at that first covered and wipe off the tar paste with small pieces of cotton batting rolled into little balls1 using a fresh wad for each stroke2 clean it all off carefully and the vase will present vacant white china spots where the flowers1 leaves1 and bird are soon to appear4 ,for a guide we will take ,fig4 #ahh4 ,now mix a little mat pink with fat oil and turpentine in the same way you prepared the grounding yellow1 only this time fat oil takes the place of capavia2 use the horn palette-knife as before2 the steel knife should never be used with the ,royal ,worcester colors1 as the metal is apt to rub in with the paint1 dulling and spoiling the colors4 ,paint all the flowers a flat tint of light pink4 ,always try the color first on the tile until you have the desired shade4 ,by the time all the flowers have received their tint of color1 those first painted will be dry enough for shading4 ,observe attentively the copy1 and notice where the different flowers are shaded2 then shade yours with the same color1 following as nearly as possible the copy before you4 ,for painting the leaves1 mix separately with turpentine and fat oil1 mat light yellow-green1 mat dark-green1 and mat blue green4 ,these colors can be used separately or any two mixed if desired4 ,shade the leaves with mat yellow-brown mixed with the different greens4 ,paint the body of the bird a flat tint of mat gold-yellow and the top of its head and back green2 the edges of wing and tail and eye must be of mat black4 ,when the bird is dry1 shade its breast with broad sweeps of mat gold-yellow1 according to the copy2 then mix black with yellow-brown for the other shading on the bird's breast1 and mix black with blue for painting and shading the wings and tail4 ,while the paint is drying on the vase mix the mat relief for the raised edges of bird1 flowers1 and stems4 ,mix the relief with turpentine and fat oil1 making it as stiff as it can be used4 ,with a very fine brush outline the bird1 its wings1 and tail2 also a few strokes on its breast1 tail1 and back2 be sure the relief is stiff enough to make a fine raised line2 then outline the flowers and the stems2 the leaves are not raised on the edges4 ,when this is finished the vase is ready for its first firing4 ,allow the ware to become perfectly dry before sending it to the firers4 ,as great care should be taken with the firing of royal ,worcester china1 send your vase to the most reliable firers you know of1 and when it is fired and returned1 all that remains to be done is to carefully gild the vase4 ,mix pure gold with turpentine1 but do not have it too thin1 as the gold should be applied as thick as possible4 ,for fine gilding use a fine small brush with long hairs2 this will make a distinct thread-like line2 first cover all the relief with the gold1 next outline the leaves1 veining them if necessary2 then with thick gold make your grasses according to the copy4 ,when the gold becomes too stiff work in a little more turpentine4 ,after you have finished this gilding1 mix some mat gold with turpentine and gild the top rim of the vase2 use the small stipple brush cut off square at the end 7,fig4 #agi71 and bring the border down unevenly along its lower edge1 making it the same way on the inside of the vase2 then with the fine long-haired gilder cover the upper edge of the vase thick with gold4 ,this finished1 gild the bottom of the vase in like manner and make the handle solid gilt2 after it is all dry the vase is ready for its second and last firing1 and when it returns again from the firers you will have a piece of beautiful ,royal ,worcester ware similar to that seen at ,tiffany's4 ,the mat colors used1 remove all the gloss from the china1 and when mat lemon-yellow forms the grounding1 the china comes from the firing having the appearance of beautiful decorated ivory without any glaze4 ,this ware must be seen to be appreciated1 and is suitable for vases and ornaments1 but the ,royal ,worcester colors cannot be used on table china1 for any grease coming in contact with the colors would spoil them4 ,exquisite little vases of all shapes are decorated in this manner2 the delicate gold tracery and outlining brings the designs out effectively4 ,in this style of painting the decoration is more conventional1 and does not require the same amount of working up and shading1 but is as a rule1 treated simply1 flat tints with a little shading being all that is required4 ,almost any floral design can be used on royal ,worcester1 when outlined with relief and gold2 there are1 however1 copies which come expressly for the purpose4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxvii4 ,a ,,chapter ,,on ,,frames4 ,,after the foregoing chapters on drawing and painting1 it is surely our duty to provide the means of framing the various pictures which we hope will be the result of their teachings4 ,unframed1 a picture is apt to be tucked away out of sight1 or it becomes rumpled and spoiled when left lying about1 and a picture-frame1 as a rule1 is quite an expensive article2 but with a little ingenuity and good taste almost any girl may manufacture frames1 if not of equal finish1 at least as durable and quite as artistic as any the dealer can produce4 ,the cost8 ,the cost is the price of a wooden stretcher and a bottle of gold paint4 ,the first sketch shown here 7,fig4 #ahi7 will give some idea of the appearance of a frame decorated appropriately for a marine picture4 ,the articles necessary for this frame are a stretcher1 some rope1 a piece of fish-net1 several dried starfish1 and gold paint4 ,the stretcher must first be gilded2 then the rope1 upon which the fish-net has been strung1 should be fastened with small tacks around the outer edge1 joining it at the corner1 where the starfish will hide the ends4 ,the net must be large enough to drape gracefully across one corner1 along the top1 and fall a short distance down the other side of the frame4 ,when the starfish1 graduating in size1 are tacked around the draped corner1 and they1 as well as the rope and net1 are given a coat of gilt1 a pretty1 unique1 and substantial frame is the result4 ,if starfish are not to be had1 sea-shells may be used instead 7these of course will have to be glued in place71 and if fish-net is also out of reach1 a piece of fine netted hammock can be used as a substitute4 ,illustration3 ,original ,design--,marine ,picture ,frame4 ,for the benefit of those who spend their summers at the sea-shore where such things are obtainable1 ,i would advise that a small collection be made of the quaint and pretty products of the place1 as they will be found useful in various ways for decorative purposes4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aij4--,section of ,decorated ,frame4 ,the next sketch 7,fig4 #aij7 shows a corner section of frame especially appropriate for a flower piece4 ,the open lattice-like border is cut with a sharp penknife from stiff pasteboard and tacked along the edge of the frame4 ,the pattern shown in diagram 7,fig4 #aia7 is simple1 quite easily made1 and well suited for a border1 though other and more elaborate ones may be used4 ,this border must1 of course1 be made in sections4 ,the edges to be connected should be cut to fit exactly1 then after tacking them upon the frame the whole may be laid upon a table1 face downward1 and strips of paper pasted across the joints 7see ,fig4 #aib71 which will hold them securely together4 ,if the work is neatly done1 when the gilt is applied all traces of the joints will disappear4 ,the decorations of this frame consist of a spray of artificial rosebuds and leaves1 gilded and tacked on the upper left-hand corner4 ,a few scattered rosebuds look well upon the lower part of the frame near the right-hand side4 ,illustration3 ,section of ,border for ,decorated ,frame4 ,figure #aic is the section of a frame which will look well on almost any kind of picture4 ,it is made by tacking a small rope around the inside edge and then covering it and the frame with crumpled tin-foil1 which1 after it is pressed to fit the rope1 is brought around and tacked on the wrong side of the frame1 joining that edge which is turned over the top4 ,care should be taken while handling the tin-foil not to flatten it1 as its beauty depends upon its roughness4 ,the pieces are joined by simply lapping one edge over the other1 the uneven surface hiding all seams4 ,this frame like the others must be gilded4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aic4--,section of ,frame covered with ,tin-foil4 ,a very effective rough surface on a frame can be produced by dabbing on it with a palette-knife the scrapings of the palette4 ,of course this frame cannot be made in a day1 but if every time the palette is cleaned the paint is used in this way it will not be long before the surface is covered and ready for gilding4 ,the cork paper used in packing bottles makes quite a handsome frame for black and white pictures or photographs 7,fig4 #aid74 ,this paper is sprinkled all over with small bits of cork1 making a rough surface and one admirably suited to the purpose4 ,illustration3 ,cork ,frame4 ,first the foundation of the frame is cut of stiff pasteboard exactly the size and shape desired2 then the cork paper is cut the width of the frame and glued securely to it1 the corners being joined as in ,fig4 #aie4 ,the frame is very pretty when left its natural color1 as it resembles carved wood at a little distance1 but it can be gilded if preferred4 ,the inside mat is made of white or gray-tinted cardboard1 cut with the open space for the picture1 from half an inch to an inch smaller than the opening of the frame4 ,the mat is pasted to the back of the frame and then the entire back is covered with strong paper pasted at the top and two side edges1 and left open at the bottom until the picture is shoved in place1 when the lower edge is fastened also4 ,the mat will look well if the inside edge is gilded4 ,another frame is made in the same manner as the one just described1 only instead of using cork paper a thick coating of glue is put all over the face of the foundation1 and sand or small pebbles are sprinkled over the entire surface4 ,this must be quickly done before the glue has time to harden4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aie4 ,the writer has in her possession a pretty little winter landscape done in water-colors4 ,it is a snow scene1 and its light effect is well set off by the frame1 which is made simply of two pieces of heavy brown strawboard or pasteboard4 ,the two pieces are cut exactly the same size2 then the centre is cut out of one1 leaving a broad frame of equal width on all sides4 ,the picture is placed between these two boards1 which are then glued together4 ,the cord for hanging it is fastened to two small brass rings which are attached to pieces of tape glued to the back of the frame1 as in ,fig4 #aif4 ,fig4 #aig shows how a piece of paper is pasted over the tape to hold it more securely4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aif ,illustration3 ,fig4 #aig ,when making a frame of this kind the picture to be framed should first be measured and the width of the frame decided upon2 then cutting a piece of paper the size the open space is to be1 or one-half inch smaller all round than the picture1 it must be laid upon the pasteboard and a mark drawn around it showing its exact size and proportion 7,fig4 #aih74 ,the width of the frame can then be measured from these lines1 which will place the opening exactly in the centre 7,fig4 #aii74 ,the lines must be perfectly straight and the measurements correct or a lop-sided frame will be the result4 ,in cutting out the frame a sharp knife should be used1 and it will be a great help in keeping the lines straight if a ruler is held down firmly close to the line to be cut1 and the knife guided by that4 ,illustration ,fig4 #aih ,illustration ,fig4 #aii ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxviii4 ,,thanksgiving4 ,,not to ,pagan ancestors in far-away countries1 but to our own ,pilgrim ,fathers do we trace the origin of ,thanksgiving ,day--as purely ,american as our ,independence ,day4 ,instituted by ,william ,bradford1 the ,governor of ,plymouth1 and first observed by the ,puritans1 who1 suffering from hunger and privation1 were truly thankful when the first harvest brought them the means of support for the approaching winter1 it has come to us as 8the religious and social festival that converts every family mansion into a family meeting-house40 ,the pleasant ,new ,england custom of the gathering together of families to celebrate ,thanksgiving is now observed in most of our ,states4 ,from far and near they come1 filling the cars with merry family parties1 who chatter away of anticipated pleasures to be found in the old home4 ,little children taught to lisp grandma and grandpa are instructed by their mammas not to be afraid of the old gentleman who will meet them at the depot1 nor the dear old lady who waits with open arms at the door of grandpa's house4 ,children old enough to know what a ,thanksgiving at grandpa's is like are wild with delight at the prospect before them4 ,their eyes brighten at the thought of the great pantry where grandma keeps her doughnuts and cookies2 of the cellar with its bins of sweet and juicy apples2 of the nuts and popcorn1 all of which taste so much nicer at grandma's than anywhere else4 ,and then what fun the games will be which they will play with cousins1 who1 though rather shy at first1 will soon make friends4 ,the lovely young aunties1 too1 who help grandma entertain all these guests1 will join in the games and suggest and carry out schemes of amusements which the children would never think of4 ,illustration3 ,one ,little ,indian4 ,what a happy holiday it is1 how social and pleasant and comfortable and easy6 ,how near and dear all the bright faces gathered around the long table at the ,thanksgiving-dinner1 seem to be4 ,truly1 we should all be thankful that we have a ,thanksgiving4 ,however1 this chapter is not written merely to generalize upon the pleasures of the day1 but in order that we may offer something new1 in the way of amusement1 which will add to the fund of merriment on this occasion4 ,the series of ,illustration3 ,pilgrim's ,spectacles4 ,illustration3 ,patterns of ,pilgrim ,father's ,hat and ,collar4 ,impromptu ,burlesque ,tableaux illustrating some of the principal events in our history will be appropriate for this national holiday1 and will prove a mirth-provoking entertainment4 ,when two rooms are connected by folding-doors1 a whole room may be used for the stage4 ,in this case no curtains are necessary1 as the doors take their place1 and1 for impromptu tableaux1 answer very well4 ,when there are no such connecting rooms1 one end of a large room can be curtained off with sheets1 or any kind of drapery1 suspended from a rope or wire stretched from one wall to the other4 ,it is best to keep the audience as far away from this improvised stage as the room will admit of1 for distance greatly assists the effect4 ,landing of the ,pilgrims4 ,,tableau #a4--,the good ship ,mayflower has just touched ,plymouth ,rock4 ,pilgrim ,father stands upon the rock1 and reaches down to help ,pilgrim ,mother to land4 ,a number of ,indians sit upon the edge of the rock1 fishing unconcernedly over the side1 while the ,pilgrims take possession4 ,in the ship ,pilgrim children are standing1 with outstretched arms1 waiting to be taken ashore4 ,,costumes4 ,,pilgrim ,,father4--,cape1 a broad-brimmed1 high-crowned hat and large1 white collar1 over ordinary boy's dress1 spectacles--cut from black paper 7,fig4 #bjj74 ,the cape may be of any material1 so that it is of a dark color4 ,illustration3 ,costume of ,pilgrim ,father4 ,the hat can be made by cutting from stiff brown paper a crown 7,fig4 #bja71 fitting it around the crown of an ordinary flat-brimmed hat1 bringing it into a conical shape1 and pinning it in place 7,fig4 #bjb74 ,the brim should be cut from the same paper in a large circle 7,fig4 #bjc71 the hole in the centre being just large enough to fit nicely around the crown1 over which it is slipped1 and pushed down until it rests upon the real hat-brim 7,fig4 #bjd74 ,the paper brim should be about seven inches wide1 and the crown nine inches high4 ,figure #bje is the pattern of collar1 which can be made of white paper or muslin4 ,,pilgrim ,,mother4--,full1 plain skirt1 white kerchief1 small white cap1 and large spectacles4 ,a gentleman's linen handkerchief1 put around the neck and crossed over the bosom1 answers for a kerchief4 ,the cap1 too1 can be made of a large handkerchief in this way4 ,fold the handkerchief in the manner shown in ,fig4 #bjf2 lay it flat upon a table1 and turn the folded corners over as in ,fig4 #bjg2 turn up the bottom edge over the other1 and roll over about three times 7,fig4 #bjh72 take the handkerchief up by the ends and the cap 7,fig4 #bji7 is made4 ,illustration3 ,manner of ,making ,pilgrim ,mother's ,cap4 ,illustration3 ,costume of ,pilgrim ,mother4 ,,children4--,the young ,pilgrims' costumes are like the others1 on a smaller scale1 but they wear no spectacles4 ,,indians4--,bright-colored shawls for blankets1 and feather-dusters for head-dresses4 ,the duster is tied on to the back of the ,indian's neck with a ribbon which passes under the chin1 and the shawl is placed over the handle1 partially covering the head and enveloping the figure4 ,,properties4 ,the ship is a large wash-tub1 which is placed in the centre of the stage2 its sail is a towel1 fastened with pins to a stick1 the stick being tied to a broom1 as shown in illustration4 ,it is held aloft by one of the children in the tub4 ,illustration3 ,the ,good ,ship ,mayflower4 ,plymouth ,rock is a table1 occupying a position near the tub4 ,on top of it is a chair1 placed on its side to give an uneven surface1 and over both chair and table is thrown a gray table-cover4 ,the fishing-poles of the ,indians are walking-canes with strings tied to the ends4 ,first ,harvest4 ,,tableau #b4--,pilgrim families1 grouped in the centre of the stage1 examining an ear of corn and rejoicing over their first harvest4 ,,properties4 ,a broom1 upon which is tied one ear of dried corn1 or popcorn1 it doesn't matter which1 and if neither is to be had1 an imitation ear of corn can be made by rolling paper into the shape of ,fig4 #baj1 cutting husks after the pattern ,fig4 #baa1 and putting them together like ,fig4 #bab4 ,the broom is held erect1 with the handle resting on the floor1 by ,pilgrim ,father4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baj4--,paper ,ear of ,corn4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baa4--,pattern for ,outside ,husks of ,corn4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bab4--;,ear of ,corn ,finished4 ,illustration3 ,the ,corn-field4 ,devastation by the ,indians4 ,,tableau #c4--;,a long table reaches across centre of stage2 upon it are empty dishes1 and the remains of a feast4 ,at each end and at back of table are grouped the ,indians1 who are gnawing large turkey-bones and eating huge pieces of bread and pie4 ,the ,pilgrim family stand at each side1 and view with horror the destruction of their dinner4 ,,properties4 ,the table is a board placed across the backs of two chairs4 ,in the centre of the table is a large pie-plate1 with only a very small piece of pie remaining in it2 most of the other dishes are empty4 ,the ,revolution4 ,,tableau #d4--,this is represented by the revolution of a wheel4 ,pilgrim ,mother stands in the centre of the stage1 at a spinning-wheel1 which is set in motion just as the curtain is parted4 ,illustration3 ,the ,spinning-wheel4 ,,properties4 ,if a real spinning-wheel cannot be obtained1 a velocipede1 baby-carriage1 or child's wagon1 turned upside down1 will answer the purpose4 ,in the illustration the curtain has been made transparent1 to show how the two back wheels of a velocipede are disposed of4 ,a broom is fastened in an upright position to the velocipede1 and on the handle is tied a piece of gray linen 7a handkerchief will do71 to represent flax4 ,a string tied to the linen is held by ,pilgrim ,mother4 ,the curtain must be dropped before the wheel ceases to revolve4 ,slavery4 ,,tableau #e4--,pilgrim ,mother is bending over a wash-tub1 with sleeves rolled up to shoulders1 washing2 a great pile of clothes lies on the floor at her side2 she looks angrily at the ,pilgrim ,father1 who sits opposite to her with his legs crossed1 calmly reading a newspaper4,f ,,properties4 ,the tub used for the ship1 placed on two chairs2 a washboard and a pile of clothes1 white predominating4 ,a rocking-chair for the ,pilgrim ,father4 ,rebellion4 ,,tableau #f4--,pilgrim ,mother stands in defiant attitude1 facing ,pilgrim ,father1 who has just arisen from his chair4 ,the tub and one of the chairs upon which it stands are tipped over1 and the clothes are scattered about4 ,,properties4 ,same as in preceding tableau4 ,peace and ,plenty4 ,,tableau #g4--,table extending across the centre of stage is heaped with all sorts of edibles--whole pumpkins1 vegetables1 fruit1 and flowers4 ,at one end of the festive board stands ,pilgrim ,father1 at the other ,pilgrim ,mother1 smiling at each other4 ,pilgrim ,father holds a long carving-knife1 as though about to carve a large pumpkin in front of him4 ,pilgrim ,mother is in the act of cutting a huge pie4 ,at the back of the table are ranged the ,pilgrim children1 each holding outstretched an empty plate1 waiting to be served1 and all smiling4 ,at each side of the stage1 extending to the front1 is a line of ,indians sitting on the floor1 smoking the pipes of peace4 ,the ,indians also are smiling4 ,illustration3 ,the ,festive ,board4 ,illustration3 ,side ,view4 ,back ,view4 ,front ,view4 ,fig4 #bac4--,pumpkin ,lantern4 ,,properties4 ,table same as in ,tableau #c3 ,dishes1 fruit1 and vegetables4 ,the ,indians' pipes are canes with bent handles4 ,if1 in arranging the stage1 clothes-horses1 with drapery thrown over them1 are placed at the back1 they will not only form a background for the pictures presented1 but the space behind makes a nice dressing-room or retiring-place for those taking part4 ,pumpkin lanterns1 set in a row on the floor just inside the curtain1 will be funny substitutes for footlights4 ,they will decorate the stage appropriately1 and at the same time be quite safe4 ,fig4 #bac shows how they are made4 ,the face is not cut through1 but the features are scraped thin enough to allow the light inside to make them visible4 ,if they were cut1 as in ordinary pumpkin lanterns1 the light would shine out from instead of on to the stage4 ,illustration3 ,silhouette of the ,headless ,turkey4 ,the ,game of the ,headless ,turkey4 ,a large silhouette1 representing a headless turkey1 is cut from black1 or dark colored paper-muslin1 and fastened upon a sheet stretched tightly across a door-way4 ,to each member of the party is given a pin and a muslin head1 which1 if rightly placed1 will fit the turkey4 ,then1 one at a time1 the players are blind-folded and placed at the end of the room opposite the sheet4 ,after turning them around three times one way1 then three times the other1 they are started off to search for the turkey1 that they may pin the head where they suppose it belongs4 ,when the person going blindly about the room comes in contact with anything1 no matter what1 be it chair1 table1 wall1 door1 or another player1 she must pin the turkey-head to the object touched4 ,to the person who comes nearest to placing the head in its true place1 a prize of a gilded wish-bone1 tied to a card with a ribbon1 is given4 ,and she who makes the least successful effort is presented with a turkey-feather1 which she must stick in her hair and wear for the remainder of the evening4 ,a ,suggestion4 ,amid all these bright and happy thoughts of feasting and merrymaking1 comes an idea1 so gently1 yet persistently1 forcing itself upon my notice1 that it finally assumes the form of a definite plan which ,i will put to you in the form of a suggestion4 ,at this time1 when1 thinking over the numerous blessings1 that most of you find to be thankful for1 how would it do1 girls1 to form a society among yourselves1 to be called the ,thanksgiving ,society1 whose object will be to provide a real ,thanksgiving for other and less fortunate girls1 by giving them something to be thankful for before next year's ,thanksgiving shall arrive8 ,there need be no formality about the society4 ,the only necessary officer will be a secretary1 to keep a record of what is done by the society1 individually and collectively2 which report the secretary will read at the grand annual meeting on ,thanksgiving ,day4 ,many girls1 young1 like yourselves1 to whom it is just as natural to be glad and happy1 have little to make them so1 and to bring some brightness into their lives would indeed be worth forming a society for4 ,there are various ways in which kindness may be done these girls1 and so many avenues will open to those seeking to benefit them1 that it is needless to attempt any instruction as to what work may be performed by the society2 if this suggestion is adopted1 ,i know it will be safe to leave it to the quick sympathy and warm hearts of the girls to do the right thing at the right moment4 ,what think you1 girls1 would it not be worth while to make of this last ,thursday of ,november a ,thanksgiving for others as well as for yourselves8 and would not your own pleasures be doubly enhanced when sweetened with the thought of having done what you could to make someone else happy8 ,illustration3 ,four ,little 8,injun0 ,boys ,,footnote3 ,f ,of course we all know that our ,pilgrim fathers did not have the daily papers1 but this fact makes it the more absurd4 ,illustration3 ,winter ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxix4 ,,christmas ,,festivities ,,and ,,home-,,made ,,christmas ,,gifts4 ,,among all the days we celebrate ,christmas stands first and foremost in our thoughts1 the holiday of holidays4 ,coming in the season of frost and snow it brings a cheering warmth to our hearts that defies the icy atmosphere1 and the feeling of kindliness and good will toward everyone1 which it awakens1 seems in response to the words the angels sang on our first ,christmas1 8,on earth peace1 good will toward men40 ,christmas is not merely a day set apart for feasting1 giving and receiving presents1 and for merrymaking4 ,the day on which we celebrate the birth of our ,lord is a time of rejoicing for rich and poor alike1 and ,christmas is ,christmas still1 although we may receive and can offer no presents and our feast is humble indeed4 ,feeling this1 let us keep the ,christmas festival as it should be kept1 right happily and merrily4 ,let us decorate our homes to the best of our ability in honor of the day1 and supply all deficiencies with happy hearts and smiling faces4 ,a friend of the writer's once remarked1 as she busied herself with some ,christmas-cards she was preparing to send to the hospitals1 8,i always like to tie a sprig of evergreen on each card2 it looks and smells so ,christmasy40 ,and so it does4 ,even a few pieces of evergreen1 tacked over doorways or branching out from behind picture-frames1 give a room a festive1 ,christmas-like appearance that nothing else can1 and as evergreens are so plentiful here in ,america there are few houses that need be without their ,christmas decorations4 ,holly1 too1 with its brilliant red berries peeping cheerily forth from their shelter of prickly leaves1 adds brightness to the other adornments1 and when the white-berried mistletoe can also be obtained all the time-honored materials for the ,christmas decorations are supplied4 ,though we are ,americans1 our ancestors came from many nations1 and we have therefore a right and claim to any custom we may admire in other countries4 ,we may take our ,christmas celebrations from any people who observe the day and combining many1 evolve a celebration which in its variety will be truly ,american4 ,from ,germany we have already taken our ,christmas-tree2 from ,belgium our ,christmas-stocking2 ,santa ,claus hails from ,holland1 and old ,england sends us the cheery greeting1 ,merry ,christmas6 ,the custom the ,french children have of ranging their shoes on the hearth-stone on ,christmas-,eve for the ,christ-child to fill with toys or sweetmeats1 is too much like our own ,christmas stocking to offer any novelty4 ,the ,presepio1 or ,holy ,manger1 of the ,roman ,catholic countries1 which represents the ,holy ,family at ,bethlehem1 with small wooden or wax figures for the characters1 is more suitable for the church celebration1 but in ,sweden and ,denmark they have a peculiar method of delivering their ,christmas-presents which we might adopt to our advantage1 for it would be great fun to present some of our gifts in their novel manner4 ,instead of describing this custom we will tell you just how to carry it out and will call it the ,julklapp1 which in ,denmark and ,sweden means ,christmas-box or gift4 ,before ,christmas-,day arrives all the presents intended for the ,julklapp delivery must be prepared by enclosing them in a great many wrappings of various kinds1 none of which should in any way suggest their contents4 ,if one of the presents is a pretty trinket1 wrap it up in a fringed tissue paper1 such as is used for motto candy or sugar-kisses2 place it in a small box1 and tie the box with narrow ribbon2 then do it up in common1 rough brown paper1 and wrap the package with strips of cloth until it is round like a ball2 cover the ball with a thin layer of dough1 and brown in the oven4 ,pin it up in a napkin1 wrap in white wrapping paper and tie with a pink string4 ,the more incongruous the coverings1 the more suitable they are for the ,julklapp4 ,you may enclose others gifts in bundles of hay1 rolls of cotton or wool1 and use your own pleasure in choosing the inner wrappings4 ,it will be the wisest plan to always use something soft for the outside covering1 the reason of which you will understand when the manner of delivery is explained4 ,each package must be labelled with the name of the person for whom it is intended1 and if an appropriate verse1 epigram1 or proverb be added it will be the cause of fresh mirth and laughter4 ,the ,julklapp delivery may1 and probably will commence very early ,christmas morning1 for the little folks1 always early risers on this day1 will no doubt be up betimes1 and ready for the business of the day4 ,the first intimation the less enterprising members of the family will have that ,christmas has dawned1 will be a loud bang at the chamber door1 followed by a thump of something falling on the bed or the sleeper's chest4 ,then springing up and opening startled eyes1 from which all sleep has been thus rudely banished1 one will probably discover a large bundle of something on the bed or lying on the floor close beside it4 ,it will be useless to rush to the door to find from whom or where this thing has come1 for although a suppressed giggle may be heard outside the door just after feeling the thump1 nothing will be met upon opening it1 but dead silence1 and nothing seen but the empty hall4 ,at any time during the day or evening the ,julklapps may arrive and when all look toward the door1 as a loud rap is heard1 whizz6 something comes through the window and lands in the middle of the room4 ,a sharp tap at the window is followed by the opening and closing of a door1 and a bundle of straw1 wool1 paper1 or cloth1 as the case may be1 lands in someone's lap4 ,in short the ,julklapps may come from any and every direction1 and when one is least expecting them1 and so the surprises and excitement are made to last until1 weary with the fun and gayety of the day1 the tired merrymakers seek their beds on ,christmas-night4 ,if it has not been made plain enough who1 or what causes the mysterious arrivals of the ,julklapps we will say that the whole household join in the conspiracy1 and the packages come from the hands of each of its members4 ,the ,polish ,custom of searching for ,christmas gifts1 which have previously been hidden in all manner of places in the house1 is one the children will delight in1 and one that1 introduced at a ,christmas party1 will provoke no end of merriment and fun4 ,the ,bran ,pie is an ,english dish1 but is quite as well suited to the ,american taste4 ,it is an excellent means of distributing trifling gifts and may be new to some of you4 ,use a large1 deep brown dish for the pie4 ,put in it a gift for everyone who will be at the ,christmas dinner1 and cover them over thickly with bran1 ornament the top by sticking a sprig of holly in the centre4 ,after dinner have the bran pie put on the table with a spoon and plates beside it1 and invite everyone to help her or himself1 each spoonful bringing out whatever it touches4 ,comical little articles may be put in the pie1 and the frequent inappropriateness of the gift to the receiver of it1 helps to create laughter4 ,the ,bran ,pie should be the secret of not more than two persons1 for1 like all things pertaining to ,christmas gifts1 the greater the surprise1 the more pleasure there will be in it4 ,the ,blind ,man's ,stocking may also be used for small gifts1 or it may hold only candy and bonbons4 ,make the stocking of white or colored tissue-paper like the pattern given in ,fig4 #bad4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bad4--,paper ,stocking4 ,first cut out one piece like the pattern1 making the foot thirteen inches long and six inches from the sole to the top of the instep1 and the leg of the stocking sixteen inches from the heel to the top2 then cut another1 one inch larger all around than the first4 ,place the two together fold the edge of the larger over the smaller piece and paste it down all around except at the top 7,fig4 #bad74 ,fill the stocking with small gifts or sweetmeats1 tie a string around the top to keep it fast1 and suspend it from the centre of a doorway4 ,blindfold each player in turn1 put a long1 light stick in her hand1 a bamboo cane will do1 and lead her up within reach of the stocking and tell her to strike it4 ,when anyone succeeds in striking the stocking and a hole is torn in it1 the gifts or candy will scatter all over the floor to be scrambled for by all the players4 ,each player should be allowed three trials at striking the stocking4 ,young children are always delighted with this ,christmas custom1 and the older ones by no means refuse to join in the sport4 ,home-made ,christmas ,gifts4 ,that the children may do their share toward filling the ,christmas stockings1 adding to the fruit of the ,christmas tree1 helping with the ,julklapps1 contributing to the ,bran ,pie or ,blind ,man's ,stocking1 we give these hints on home-made ,christmas gifts1 all of which are inexpensive and easily constructed4 ,chamois for ,eye-glasses4 ,cut out two circular pieces of chamois-skin about the size of a silver half-dollar1 bind the edges with narrow ribbon1 and fasten the two pieces together with a bow of the same4 ,print with a lead pencil on one piece of the chamois-skin1 8,i ,make all ,things ,clear10 and go over the lettering with a pen and ,india ink1 or you may paint the letters in colors to match the ribbon4 ,fig4 #bae shows how it should look when finished4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bae4--;,chamois for ,eye-glasses4 ,glove ,pen-wiper4 ,cut four pieces from thin1 soft chamois-skin1 like the outline of ,fig4 #baf4 ,stitch one with silk on the sewing-machine1 according to the dotted lines4 ,cut two slits at the wrist through all the pieces as shown in ,fig4 #baf1 and join them together by a narrow ribbon passed through the openings1 and tied in a pretty bow1 ,fig4 #bag4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #baf4--,pattern of ,pen-wiper4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bag4--,pen-wiper4 ,sachet4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bah--,sachet4 ,open out an envelope1 and cover it with white or cream-colored silk1 refold carefully1 joining the edges with stiff mucilage1 using as little as possible4 ,in place of a letter enclose a layer of cotton sprinkled with sachet-powder1 fasten the envelope with sealing-wax as in an ordinary letter4 ,address it with pen and ink1 to the one for whom it is intended4 ,print on it1 like a stamp1 8,christmas1 ,december #be10 and fasten a cancelled stamp1 taken from an old letter1 on one corner4 ,the finished sachet is shown in ,fig4 #bah4 ,a ,book-mark4 ,cut out the corner of a full-sized1 linen-lined envelope1 making the piece four inches long1 and one and a half inches wide4 ,write on one side with pen and ink1 or paint the lettering in color1 8,a ,fresh ,mind ,keeps the ,body ,fresh40 ,the book-mark will fit over the book-leaf like a cap1 and is excellent for keeping the place4 ,fig4 #bai4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bai--;,book-mark4 ,a ,scrap-bag4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbj4--,pattern of ,scrap-bag4 ,scrap-bags have been fashioned in many shapes and sizes1 and of all sorts of material1 still it remains to be shown in what manner ,christmas cards may add in decoration and beauty to these useful articles4 ,from your collection choose four cards of the same size1 then on a piece of bright silk or cloth sew the cards at equal distances apart1 as in ,fig4 #bbj1 stitching them around the edges on the sewing-machine4 ,at the dotted line fold over the top of the bag as if for a hem1 making the narrow fold lap just cover the upper edge of the card2 stitch this down to form a binding4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bba4--,scrap-bag4 ,after joining the bag at the dotted lines on the sides1 gather the bottom up tight and fasten to it a good-sized tassel2 then sew on each side a heavy cord with tassels placed where the cord joins the bag1 as seen in ,fig4 #bba4 ,the cord and tassels of the example were made of scarlet worsted4 ,a ,walnut-shell ,turtle4 ,for an ornament to be used on a pen-wiper1 or simply as a pretty toy1 the little turtle is appropriate4 ,it is made of half an ,english walnut1 which forms the turtle's back or shell1 glued on a piece of card-board cut after the diagram given in ,fig4 #bbb4 ,paint the card-board as nearly as possible the color of the shell1 and the eyes black4 ,when perfectly dry glue the shell securely to the card-board1 bend down and out the feet a little1 in order to make the turtle stand2 bend the head up1 and the tail down1 as in ,fig4 #bbc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbb4--,pattern of ,turtle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbc4--,walnut-shell ,turtle4 ,here are some home-made toys which the children can make to give to one another4 ,miss ,nancy4 ,miss ,nancy 7,fig4 #bbf7 is fashioned from a piece of pith taken out of a dried cornstalk4 ,cut away the stalk until the pith is reached2 then take a piece of the pith1 about six inches long and whittle out one end to resemble a head as in ,fig4 #bbd1 draw a face on the head with pen and ink1 and glue half of a lead bullet on the lower end of the pith 7,fig4 #bbe74 ,make ,miss ,nancy's costume of a skirt1 composed of some bright-colored ,japanese paper1 a shawl made of a piece of soft ribbon or silk1 and a cap of white swiss4 ,the peculiarity of the little lady is that she insists upon always standing upright1 no matter in what position she is placed4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbd4 ,fig4 #bbe4 ,manner of ,making ,miss ,nancy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbf4--,miss ,nancy4 ,a ,soft ,ball4 ,a very pretty and safe return ball for the little ones to play with may be made of paper 7,fig4 #bbg71 which1 being soft1 precludes all danger of 8thumps and bumps40 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbg4--,paper ,ball4 ,take a piece of newspaper1 and1 using both hands1 roll it and fold it into something of the required shape4 ,then place it in the centre of a square piece of bright-colored tissue paper2 take the four corners of the tissue-paper up to the centre of the top of the ball1 fold them over1 also fold and smooth down what fulness there may be2 next place a small round piece of gold1 silver1 or some contrasting colored paper on the top of the ball4 ,secure all by winding a string around the ball1 making six or eight divisions2 tie a piece of elastic to the string where it crosses on the top of the ball1 then paste over this a small artificial flower4 ,in the other end of the elastic1 make a loop to fit over the finger1 or tie on it a small brass ring4 ,if a tiny sleigh-bell be placed in the centre when the ball is being made1 it will give a cheerful little tinkling noise whenever the ball is thrown4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbh4--,the ,rooster4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bbi ,fig4 #bcj ,fig4 #bca ,fig4 #bcb4 ,fig4 #bcc4--,the ,weight4 ,pattern of ,rooster4 ,a ,lively ,rooster4 ,to make the rooster 7,fig4 #bbh71 cut out of stiff cardboard ,figs4 #bbi1 #bcj1 #bca1 and #bcb4 ,tie on ,figs4 #bbi and #bcj each a piece of string seven and one-half inches long4 ,then attach the head and tail to the body by running a string through holes at ,a in ,fig4 #bcj and ,a in ,fig4 #bca1 and another through ,b in ,fig4 #bbi and ,b in ,fig4 #bca4 ,bring the head and tail up close to the body and fasten the ends of the strings down securely with court-plaster or pieces of paper pasted over them4 ,bend ,fig4 #bca at dotted line ,c2 then on the space marked ,e1 paste the portion of ,fig4 #bcb marked ,e after bending it at dotted line ,o4 ,again bend ,fig4 #bcb in the same direction at dotted line ,p1 and paste it across the space marked ,p1 on ,fig4 #bca4 ,when all is fastened together1 and the paste perfectly dry1 paint the rooster to look as life-like as possible4 ,tie the strings of ,figs4 #bbi and #bcj together four inches from where they are fastened on1 then again about three inches lower down1 and attach a weight to the ends4 ,a common wooden top1 with a tack in the head 7,fig4 #bcc71 will answer the purpose nicely4 ,to bring the rooster to life1 place him on the mantel-piece1 with a book serving as a weight on the projection of ,fig4 #bcb1 swing the top and he will move his head and tail in the most amusing manner4 ,illustration3 ,fairy ,dancers4 ,fairy ,dancers4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcd4--;,a ,fairy ,dancer4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bce4--,pattern of ,fairy ,dancer4 ,among the gifts made by little hands1 a box1 containing a set of fairy dancers1 will be a most novel and welcome addition4 ,these little figures1 when placed on the piano1 will move as soon as the keys are touched1 dancing fast or slow in perfect time to the music4 ,they may all be made to resemble fairies as in ,fig4 #bcd1 or a famous collection of figures in the costumes of different periods in history will be equally pretty and perhaps more interesting4 ,ladies in kirtles and tunics1 gentlemen in slashed doublet and hose of the ,tudor times1 ,queen ,elizabeth's starched ruffs and farthingales1 etc4 ,all these dresses can be more easily copied from pictures of the period than from any written description of them4 ,the materials used for the costume must be of the lightest kind1 for a heavy dress will weigh down the dancer and hamper its movements4 ,to make the fairy 7,fig4 #bcd7 trace ,fig4 #bce on cardboard and cut it out1 sew a piece of bonnet-wire down the back1 as shown in diagram4 ,mark the slippers on the feet with ink or black paint1 select a ,christmas or advertising card representing a child1 with a head of a suitable size1 cut the head out and paste it on the fairy4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcf4--,pattern of ,chinaman4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bcg4 ,fig4 #bch4 ,chinaman's ,queue4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bci4--,the ,chinaman4 ,gather two short skirts of tarlatan1 make a waist of the same1 sew with a few stitches to the doll1 and cover the stitches with a sash of bright colored tissue paper2 add a strip of tarlatan for a floating scarf1 gluing it to the uplifted hands4 ,bend back the piece of cardboard projecting from the foot1 and glue to it a small piece of bristle brush4 ,the wire on the doll should be long enough to pass tightly around the brush1 thus making it more secure4 ,if you would like to have the ,chinaman 7,fig4 #bci7 in your troupe of dancers1 trace on cardboard ,fig4 #bcf1 draw a face with slanting eyes1 or paint it2 then take several strands of black thread and tie them together in the centre with another piece of thread 7,fig4 #bcg71 bring the ends down together 7,fig4 #bch71 braid them and sew the braid to the back of the ,chinaman's head 7#bci74 ,cut a loose sacque from pattern ,fig4 #bdj1 fold at the waved lines and sew together at the dotted lines2 cut an opening for the head as seen in pattern4 ,make the hat of dark green paper cut in the form of ,fig4 #bda1 and crimp it from the centre 7,fig4 #bdb74 ,sew the hat to the back of the ,chinaman's head1 bend the cardboard projection at the feet and glue it to a piece of brush4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdj4--;,chinaman's ,sacque4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bda4--,pattern of ,chinaman's ,hat4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdb4--;,chinaman's ,hat4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdc ,fig4 #bdd ,fig4 #bde ,fig4 #bdf ,butterfly ,pattern4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdg ,butterfly4 ,butterflies of brilliant hues1 all hovering and circling1 may take the place of the fairies1 or they may mingle with them in the dance1 presenting a scene indeed fairy-like4 ,to make a butterfly1 trace the pattern given in ,fig4 #bdc1 on brilliantly colored paper4 ,form a body by rolling a small piece of beeswax between the fingers until it assumes the desired shape 7,fig4 #bdd72 then attach the wings to the body by softening the wax and sticking them to it4 ,wax a piece of black thread to stiffen it1 and make a knot in each end 7,fig4 #bde71 bend this in the middle and stick it on to the head to form the antenn 7,fig4 #bdf74 ,fasten one end of a very fine wire securely in the middle of the wax body1 and wrap the other end around a small piece of brush as seen in ,fig4 #bdg4 ,a number of these butterflies placed on the pianoforte will move1 bend and sway with the music as if endowed with life4 ,toys1 also1 which are small and light enough1 can be made to 8trip the light fantastic0 in time to the music4 ,select those most suitable and glue them to pieces of brush in the way described for the other dancers4 ,the children1 generous little souls1 always long to do their part towards making ,christmas presents1 and we hope that the suggestion we have offered will help them to manufacture1 without other aid1 many little gifts which their friends will prize the more highly for having been made by the loving little hands4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxx4 ,,amusements ,,and ,,games ,,for ,,the ,,christmas ,,holidays4 ,a ,,winter passed in-doors would be irksome indeed for a healthy1 hearty girl1 and even the most delicate are the better for an outing now and then4 ,the keen northwest wind1 the biting frosts1 the crisp atmosphere and the glistening ice and snow are not without their attractions1 and we hope that no ,american girl will neglect the opportunities this time of the year affords for healthy1 enjoyable out-door pastime4 ,it is well to follow the example of our ,canadian sisters1 and1 clad in garments warm and appropriate1 indulge in coasting1 tobogganing1 skating1 sleighing1 and walking4 ,the country1 wrapped in its winter mantle1 is very attractive4 ,many of our small animals and birds that city people are apt to associate only with a summer landscape1 are to be found abroad in mid-winter1 and upon a bright sunny day the birds are not only to be seen1 but heard twittering and even singing in the hedges2 they do not feel the cold and are enjoying themselves heartily4 ,the reason the birds and wild creatures are so comfortably content1 is because they are prepared for the weather1 their clothing is not only soft and warm1 but fits them perfectly1 without interfering with their movements4 ,take a lesson from them1 girls1 dress as becomingly as you choose1 the birds always do that1 but do not wear thin-soled shoes or anything that is uncomfortable2 wrap up warm and you can enjoy yourself out of doors in the coldest weather just as well as the birds4 ,the cold winds will only bring the roses to your cheeks1 and the keen1 invigorating air1 health and suppleness to your body4 ,we do not think any person ever learned to skate1 coast1 or walk on snow-shoes from reading the directions that can be given in a book4 ,it is for that reason we have no chapter devoted to these sports and not because we do not believe in1 and enjoy them1 too4 ,therefore we will direct our attention to indoor sports1 for they can be learned in this way and are quite as important as the others in filling out the list of winter amusements4 ,there are a great many days in winter when it is so stormy and disagreeable out-doors1 one is glad enough to have the shelter of a roof and the warmth of a fire2 these are the days and evenings when in-doors games are in demand1 and during the holiday season1 when work has been put aside1 and you have nothing to do but enjoy yourself1 any new diversion is always welcome4 ,it is here then that we will insert the ,new ,game of ,bubble ,bowling4 ,when the game of ,bubble ,bowling was played for the first time1 it furnished an evening's entertainment1 not only for the children1 but for grown people also2 even a well known general and his staff1 who graced the occasion with their presence1 joined in the sport1 and seemed to enjoy it equally with their youthful competitors4 ,loud was the chorus of 8,bravo60 and merry the laugh of exultation when the pretty crystal ball passed safely through its goal2 and sympathy was freely expressed in many an 8,oh60 and 8,too bad60 as the wayward bubble rolled gayly off toward the floor1 or1 reaching the goal1 dashed itself against one of the stakes and instantly vanished into thin air4 ,illustration3 ,bubble ,bowling4 ,the game should be played upon a long1 narrow table1 made simply of a board about five feet long and eighteen inches wide1 resting upon high wooden 8horses40 ,on top of the table1 and at a distance of twelve inches from one end1 should be fastened in an upright position1 two stakes1 twelve inches high2 the space between the stakes should be eight inches1 which will make each stand four inches from the nearest edge of the table4 ,when finished1 the table must be covered with some sort of woollen cloth2 an old shawl or a breadth of colored flannel will answer the purpose excellently4 ,small holes must be cut at the right distance for the stakes to pass through4 ,the cloth should be allowed to fall over the edge of the table1 and must not be fastened down1 as it will sometimes be necessary to remove it in order to let it dry4 ,it will be found more convenient1 therefore1 to use two covers1 if they can be provided1 as then there can always be a dry cloth ready to replace the one that has become too damp4 ,the bubbles are apt to stick when they come upon wet spots1 and the bowling can be carried on in a much more lively manner if the course is kept dry4 ,each of the stakes forming the goal should be wound with bright ribbons of contrasting colors1 entwined from the bottom up1 and ending in a bow at the top4 ,this bow can be secured in place by driving a small brass-headed tack through the ribbon into the top of the stake4 ,if the rough pine legs of the table seem too unsightly1 they can easily be painted1 or a curtain may be made of bright-colored cretonne--any other material will do as well1 provided the colors are pleasing--and tacked around the edge of the table1 so as to fall in folds to the floor4 ,the illustration shows the top of the table1 when ready for the game4 ,for an impromptu affair1 a table can be made by placing a leaf of a dining-table across the backs of two chairs1 and covering it with a shawl2 lead pencils may be used for the stakes1 and they can be held in an upright position by sticking them in the tubes of large spools4 ,this sort of table the children can arrange themselves1 and it answers the purpose very nicely4 ,the other things to be provided for the game are a large bowl of strong soapsuds1 made with hot water and common brown soap1 and as many pipes as there are players4 ,the prizes for the winners of the game may consist of any trinkets or small articles that fancy or taste may suggest4 ,bubble ,bowling can be played in two ways4 ,the first method requires an even number of players1 and these must be divided into two equal parties4 ,this is easily accomplished by selecting two children for captains1 and allowing each captain to choose1 alternately1 a recruit for her party until the ranks are filled1 or1 in other words1 until all the children have been chosen2 then1 ranked by age1 or in any other manner preferred1 they form in line on either side of the table4 ,a pipe is given to each child1 and they stand prepared for the contest4 ,one of the captains first takes her place at the foot of the table1 where she must remain while she is bowling1 as a bubble passing between the stakes is not counted unless blown through the goal from the end of the table4 ,the bowl of soapsuds is placed upon a small stand by the side of the bowling-table1 and the next in rank to the captain1 belonging to the same party1 dips her pipe into the suds and blows a bubble1 not too large1 which she then tosses upon the table in front of the captain1 who1 as first bowler1 stands ready to blow the bubble on its course down through the goal4 ,three successive trials are allowed each player2 the bubbles which break before the bowler has started them1 are not counted4 ,the names of all the players1 divided as they are into two parties1 are written down on a slate or paper1 and whenever a bubble is sent through the goal1 a mark is set down opposite the name of the successful bowler4 ,when the captain has had her three trials1 the captain on the other side becomes bowler1 and the next in rank of her own party blows the bubbles for her4 ,when this captain retires1 the member of the opposite party1 ranking next to the captain1 takes the bowler's place and is assisted by the one whose name is next on the list of her own side2 after her the player next to the captain on the other side2 and so on until the last on the list has her turn1 when the captain then becomes assistant and blows the bubbles4 ,the number of marks required for either side to win the game1 must be decided by the number of players2 if there are twenty--ten players on each side--thirty marks would be a good limit for the winning score4 ,when the game has been decided1 a prize is given to that member of the winning party who has the greatest number of marks attached to her name showing that she has sent the bubble through the goal a greater number of times than any player on the same side4 ,or1 if preferred1 prizes may be given to every child belonging to the winning party4 ,the other way in which ,bubble ,bowling may be played is simpler1 and does not require an even number of players as no sides are formed4 ,each bowler plays for herself1 and is allowed five successive trials2 if three bubbles out of the five be blown through the goal the player is entitled to a prize4 ,the child acting as assistant becomes the next bowler1 and so on until the last in turn becomes bowler1 when the one who began the game takes the place of assistant4 ,when the evening lamps are lighted and the young folks1 gathered cosily around the cheerful fire1 begin to be at a loss how to amuse themselves1 let them try the game of ,biographical ,nonsense4 ,a paper must be written by one of the players which will read like the following3 ,the name of a noted man4 ,a date between the flood and the present year4 ,the name of a noted man4 ,a country4 ,the name of some body of water or river4 ,some kind of a vessel4 ,a country4 ,a country4 ,the name of a school4 ,a city4 ,a city1 town1 or country4 ,a city1 town1 or country4 ,a number4 ,the names of two books4 ,the name of one book4 ,a wonderful performance4 ,the name of a well-known person4 ,a profession or trade4 ,a term expressing the feeling entertained for another person4 ,a term descriptive of someone's appearance4 ,a word denoting size4 ,a term describing form4 ,a color4 ,a word denoting size4 ,the name of an article of some decided color4 ,the name of any article4 ,the name of any article4 ,a number of years4 ,this paper is to be passed to each member of the party who in turn will fill up the blanks left1 with the words1 terms1 and names indicated4 ,when the blanks have been filled1 one player must read the following1 and another supply the words1 when she pauses1 from the paper just prepared1 being sure to read them in their true order4 ,a ,,biography4 ---- was born in ---- the same year when ---- discovered ----1 by sailing through the ---- in a ----4 ,his father was a native of ----2 his mother of ----4 ,he was educated at ----1 in the city of ----4 ,his first voyage1 which was a long one1 was from ---- to ----4 ,he wrote three books before he was ---- years of age4 ,they are ----1 and ----4 ,he performed the miraculous feat of ---- with ----4 ,he was a great ----1 and one we shall ever ----4 ,in appearance he was ---- being rather ---- of stature4 ,his nose was ----1 his eyes ----1 his mouth ----1 and hair the color of ---- adorned his head4 ,he invariably carried in his hand a ---- and a ----1 by which he was always known1 and with which he is represented to this day4 ,he died at the advanced age of -----4 ,the ridiculous combinations found in this game make it very funny4 ,comic ,historical ,tableaux are very amusing1 and being impromptu require no preparation beforehand4 ,as in charades1 the company must divide into two parties4 ,but instead of acting as in charades1 one party decides what event in history they will represent1 and then they form a tableau to illustrate the event1 making it as ridiculous as possible4 ,the other party must try and guess what the tableau is2 if they are successful1 it is their turn to produce a tableau1 if not1 the first party must try another subject1 and continue to do so until the subject of their tableau is correctly guessed4 ,we will give a few suggestions for the tableaux4 ,,balboa ,,discovering ,,the ,,pacific ,,ocean4 ,place a pan of water on the floor in plain sight of the audience2 then let someone dress up in a long cloak and high-crowned hat to personate ,balboa1 and stand on a table in the middle of the floor1 while the rest of the performers1 enveloped in shawls1 crouch around4 ,when the curtain is drawn aside1 ,balboa must be seen looking intently through one end of a tin horn1 or one made of paper1 at the pan of water4 ,,nero ,,at ,,the ,,burning ,,of ,,rome4 ,nero1 in brilliant robes made of shawls1 sits on a table1 surrounded by his courtiers1 who are also in fantastic costumes4 ,nero is in the act of fiddling1 his fiddle being a small fire shovel1 and the bow a poker4 ,on the floor in front of the group is placed a large shallow pan or tray1 in which is set a small house1 which has been hastily cut from paper4 ,a lighted match is put to the paper house just as the curtains are parted4 ,these two suggestions will no doubt be sufficient to show what the tableaux should be like and we need give no further illustrations4 ,living ,christmas ,cards4 ,to impart seeming life to the little figures painted on the ,christmas cards1 is a performance intensely amusing to the little ones4 ,a moving toy whose actions are life-like is always of great interest2 but when a little flesh-and-blood head is seen nodding and twisting upon the shoulders of a figure painted on a card1 the children fairly shout with delight4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdh4--,manner of ,holding ,card4 ,here is the method of bringing life into the bits of pasteboard4 ,select cards with pretty or comical figures1 whose faces are the size of the ends of your first or second finger4 ,carefully cut the face out of a card2 then with ink mark the features on your finger1 and put it through the opening1 as in ,fig4 #bdh4 ,place on this little live head a high peaked tissue-paper cap1 and the effect will be exceedingly ludicrous 7,fig4 #bdi74 ,a little ,santa ,claus who can really nod and bow to the children will be very amusing1 and there are quite a number of ,christmas cards which portray the funny1 jolly little fellow4 ,floral cards may have nodding fairies peeping out from among the petals of the flowers1 whose heads are crowned with queer little fairy caps1 as in ,fig4 #bej4 ,if among your collection you have a card with a picture of a house on it1 it will be amusing to thrust a little head wearing a night-cap1 out of one of the windows4 ,round holes will1 of course1 have to be cut in the cards wherever the heads are to appear4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bdi4--,live ,head with ,peaked ,cap4 ,still another way of managing these living puppets is to cut in a piece of cardboard1 five inches long and two inches wide1 three round holes a little more than half an inch apart4 ,sew around the edge of the cardboard a gathered curtain of any soft material six inches deep4 ,sketch faces on three of your fingers1 pass them under the curtain and through the holes in the cardboard4 ,the curtain will fall around and conceal your hand1 leaving the three heads appearing above 7,fig4 #bea74 ,on these heads place any kind of head-dress you choose1 making them of paper2 or caps of white swiss look quaint1 and wee doll hats may be worn4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bej--,nodding ,fairies4 ,it is best to use a little mucilage or paste in fastening the hats on1 that there may be no danger of their falling off with the movement of the fingers4 ,the hair may be inked1 or little wigs made of cotton can be used4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bea4--,living ,puppets4 ,if the little faces are painted with water colors1 giving color to the cheeks and lips1 the life-like appearance will be enhanced4 ,these little personages can be made to carry on absurd conversations1 and a great deal of expression be given to the bobbing and turning of their heads4 ,one person can easily manage the whole thing1 and entertain a roomful with the performance of the living puppets4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,happy ,new ,year ,,chapter ,,xxxi4 ,,new ,,year',s ,,and ,a ,,leap ,,year ,,party4 ,,my earliest recollection of ,new ,year's day is of being awakened at midnight by the clangor of the fire bells1 and the ringing of the church bells1 as they swung and rocked in their high steeples and cupolas1 shouting1 ,happy ,new ,year6 from their brazen throats to all the sleeping town4 ,not being thoroughly conversant with bell language1 ,i was very much alarmed because they seemed to say 8,come1 get up--,come1 get up--,house on fire--,house on fire60 but1 upon opening my eyes1 ,i was assured that they were ringing in the ,new ,year1 and1 as ,i again fell asleep1 the bells were saying distinctly1 8,wish you ,happy ,new ,year--,wish you ,happy ,new ,year40 ,next day the table was decked with flowers1 and was laden with roast turkey1 fruits1 salads1 and mince-pies4 ,oh1 my6 what delicious mince-pies they were6 ,none since have ever tasted as good as those made and baked by my grandmother4 ,i often wonder if the next generation of grandmammas will make such cookies1 mince pies1 and doughnuts as ours did2 but this was in ,kentucky1 and you know that we still observed the old-fashioned customs1 and all day long the gentlemen came dropping in by twos and fours1 and such handshaking and laughing1 and such courtly compliments1 and such a bowing and a wishing of ,many ,happy ,new ,years1 it does me good to think of4 ,who knows but that so many kind wishes of a long and happy life1 sincerely given1 may really help to bring it to pass4 ,small as ,i was at the time1 and little as ,i understood the customs or conversation1 the spirit of the whole day was intelligible and appealed to the little child1 perhaps more forcibly than to the grown-up people4 ,it is really too bad that the crowded states of our large cities tend to lead to the gradual decline of the custom of ,new ,year's calls1 so that now many people confine themselves to sending and receiving cards1 making the always stiff and formal bits of engraved pasteboard1 do all the calling and receiving2 but ,new ,year's ,parties are not out of date1 so we will have one on ,new ,year's ,eve1 because then young and old are privileged to sit up all night1 that is1 until after twelve o'clock midnight1 and have all the fun possible4 ,let us begin our frolic with a ,pantomime of an ,enchanted ,girl4 ,for this a damp sheet must be fastened up across the room or between the folding doors of the parlor4 ,first1 fasten the corners of the sheet1 next1 the centre of each of the four sides1 in order that the cloth may be perfectly smooth2 then place a lighted candle on the floor1 about four or five feet from the centre of the curtain4 ,when the lights in the room occupied by the audience are turned out1 leaving it in total darkness1 so the shadows of the actors behind the curtain may be seen on the screen1 someone1 standing outside of the curtain and facing the audience1 should explain or relate the story of the play3 of how a young girl1 while walking out on the last day in ,november1 meets ,halloween1 who presents her with three gifts to try her fortune1 and how1 when she is about to do so1 a witch enchants her1 etc4 ,after the story is finished1 and a lively overture has been performed on some musical instrument1 the pantomime is played as follows3 ,the young girl personating the enchanted one1 comes gayly forward from the side1 when almost across the curtain she meets ,halloween1 who approaches from the opposite side1 arrayed in short dress1 with wings made of newspaper folded fan fashion1 and fastened on the shoulders2 in her hand she carries a cane with a silhouette of a cat1 or two or three stars and a crescent cut of stiff1 brown paper and pasted on the end2 the cane is so held that the profiles of the figures are kept toward the curtain4 ,seeing this queer being the young girl clearly demonstrates1 by her actions1 that she is alarmed4 ,when ,halloween quiets her fears1 by surely and plainly indicating with slow movements of the head1 and downward motions of the arms that no harm is intended1 they shake hands2 then ,halloween shows the maiden three gifts1 an apple1 a hand-mirror1 and an unlighted candle4 ,before presenting them she illustrates by gestures1 the use to be made of each4 ,holding the mirror in front of her face1 she bites the apple1 then looks quickly around1 as if expecting to see someone1 and1 again holding up the mirror in one hand and the candle in the other1 she takes a few steps backward1 when a boy enters by jumping over the light1 which gives the appearance of his having fallen down from the sky1 ,halloween looks around1 and the boy quickly disappears in the same manner as he came4 ,all this time the girl stands transfixed1 with her hands raised and all the fingers spread out in astonishment2 she receives the presents which are given with many nods and gestures4 ,as ,halloween walks away the fortune-seeker turns and watches her with a telescope made of a roll of paper she finds at her feet on the floor4 ,the maiden then proceeds to examine the gifts2 as she takes up the apple and mirror1 her hand is stayed by a witch with flowing hair1 who has approached unperceived1 carrying under one arm a broom1 and wearing on her head an ordinary hat with a piece of newspaper rolled up and pinned on to form a peaked crown4 ,she motions to the girl to be seated2 then stands over her and makes passes in the air1 and taking up her broom from the floor makes grand flourishes and departs walking back towards the candle1 which causes her shadow to grow larger and larger4 ,the poor girl looks anxiously around and discovers she has been enchanted1 for there are three girls instead of one2 this effect is produced by two more lighted candles being placed on the floor on either side of the first candle1 and every movement the girl makes is mimicked by her other selves4 ,the candles are removed and the ,old ,year instantly appears1 his figure bent1 a piece of fringed paper pasted on his chin for a flowing beard1 and carrying in his hand a cane with a piece of stiff paper fastened on to represent a scythe4 ,discovering him the girl runs forward to tell her sorrows1 and finds that it is only when alone that she is enchanted1 for when she attempts to point out her other selves they have disappeared2 making many gestures she looks here and there for them1 but in vain1 then as the ,old ,year leaves she bids him a sorrowful adieu4 ,again alone1 the facsimiles reappear and she grows desperate1 so do the other two selves1 she throws her arms about1 skips1 jumps1 and dances wildly around1 the other selves do likewise1 and at the same time they are made to pass and repass her1 by two persons taking up the two extra lights1 and1 keeping the lights facing the curtain1 walking back and forth1 passing1 and repassing each other but never stepping in front of the candle on the floor4 ,in the midst of the dancing the two extra candles are taken away and immediately the little ,new ,year enters1 crowned with a paper star and wearing wings of paper4 ,the young girl rushes to meet the ,new ,year with a hearty greeting1 she then tells him of her enchantment1 counting the three selves by holding up the first finger of the right hand three times in succession1 and while the ,new ,year makes gestures that indicate advice the maiden listens with her hand to her ear1 and1 promising by signs to be a good girl1 she kneels down1 and the little ,new ,year raises both hands above her head1 then1 kissing her hand to the maiden1 departs4 ,the glad ,new ,year has disenchanted her1 she carefully looks this way and that1 but seeing all is well she tosses her head1 dances around1 makes a courtesy1 kisses both hands to the audience and disappears4 ,when the play is over1 and just as the clock strikes twelve1 the party can instantly change its character if it is leap-year and become a ,leap-,year ,party for the remaining hour or so1 thereby creating a great deal more merriment and sport2 the novelty of the fact that the girls exchange places with the boys makes everything appear strange4 ,and when the music commences for dancing the girls look from one to another1 no one at first having the courage to invite a partner to dance1 so unaccustomed are they to even the thought of such a thing4 ,the boys of course laugh1 and make no move to assist their timid1 would-be partners in the part they must play1 but quietly await the expected invitation4 ,when1 however1 someone takes the initiative step1 the others follow1 and all goes merrily4 ,the supper presents a new phase1 but here the girls do their part perfectly1 providing all the boys with a plentiful repast1 and each one is made to feel that his presence is necessary to the success of the party1 thereby insuring a happy1 pleasant time for all4 ,in giving a leap-year party it is very essential that all the guests understand perfectly that the idea of the entertainment is to have the girls take upon themselves all the duties and courtesies properly belonging to the boys1 and that the boys shall wait for an invitation before dancing1 promenading1 or partaking of refreshments1 and that a boy should not cross the floor unattended1 but wait for some fair friend to escort him4 ,the girls are at liberty to go and come as they like1 though they must remember not to leave a partner standing after the dance is over1 but politely conduct him to a seat1 and the girls must also endeavor to make the party pleasant and agreeable to all4 ,the chaperons1 of course1 should have charge of the boys during the entertainment4 ,the leap-year party need not necessarily be a dancing party1 as any social gathering can take the form of a leap-year party4 ,when an entertainment is given on the eve of a new leap-year1 with a view to dancing the old year out and the new year in1 just as the clock strikes twelve the party can immediately change into a leap-year party as described1 or should the ,new ,year be a common year1 then as the time flies and the hands of the clock approach the hour of twelve all are on the qui vive to be the first to have the pleasure of greeting their friends with a ,happy ,new ,year4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxxii4 ,,home ,,gymnasium4 ,,everyone must exercise to keep healthy and strong1 for life is motion and activity4 ,it is natural to be well and happy1 and to keep so we must exercise all our muscles1 as well as our moral and intellectual faculties1 or they will dwindle and wither4 ,the arm of the ,hindoo devotee1 not being used1 at length becomes completely paralyzed1 and fish in the ,mammoth ,cave having no use for eyes pass their life without them2 so we find that use is the foundation of all things1 otherwise they would cease to exist2 then1 girls1 it lies within your power to become stronger and more graceful each day by regular and graduated bodily exercise1 which will bring life and energy to every part of your system by causing the blood to circulate freely through all the body4 ,there are some simple methods of carrying this into effect in the most agreeable and salutary manner1 but the exercises must be very light at first1 and as you advance they may be increased a little each time1 but always stop before you feel fatigued1 for when the calisthenics cease to give pleasure it is doubtful if they are beneficial4 ,illustration ,the best time for exercising is in the morning after having partaken of some light refreshments1 though any time will do except directly after hearty meals4 ,try and have a regular time set apart each day for your physical culture4 ,commence by exercising five or ten minutes1 then for a little longer period next time1 and so on until you can exercise with ease for half an hour or longer4 ,you will feel refreshed1 invigorated1 and better prepared for the duties and pleasures which await you4 ,your clothing must not incommode the free action of the body1 and it is essential that it be comfortable4 ,what is suitable for lawn tennis is also well adapted for the gymnasium4 ,an ordinary bathing-dress answers the purpose very well1 as it is made for exercise4 ,the ,egyptian water-carrier1 with the jug of water poised so prettily on her head1 and her figure so straight and beautiful1 has always challenged admiration2 her carriage is dignified1 erect1 and graceful1 something worth striving for1 especially when we have the certainty of success if we will only be faithful and persevering4 ,the peasantry of foreign countries who carry all their burdens balanced on their heads have their reward in healthy1 strong1 straight figures1 even in old age they do not stoop4 ,witness the emigrants landing at ,castle ,garden who carry their possessions done up in huge bundles on their heads with the utmost ease2 of this class1 three generations--a grandmother1 mother1 and grown daughter--with baggage of the same weight on their heads1 were lately seen at a ,new ,york ferry1 each equally upright1 strong1 and vigorous4 ,a good straight back is an excellent thing2 and when the head is properly carried and all the movements are buoyant and elastic1 then we may walk as it was intended we should1 every step bringing a glow to the cheek and a sparkle to the eye4 ,it requires only a few minutes' regular daily exercise for any girl to attain a carriage equal to that of the ,egyptian water-carrier1 and the only apparatus needed for ,exercise ,first is a roll of paper4 ,now stand with your heels together1 toes out1 and shoulders well back2 then place on your head the roll of paper2 if your position is not perfectly erect the roll will fall off2 keep your chin straight and back against your neck1 for it is the chin which determines the poise of the body4 ,you cannot stand straight unless the chin is straight2 throw out your chin and your shoulders will stoop forward1 have your chin straight and your back will be straight2 bear this in mind in all your exercises4 ,now walk1 keeping the roll balanced on your head 7,fig4 #beb74 ,practice this walking back and forth until you can do so without the paper rolling off2 then try a tin cup full to the brim with water4 ,walk erect or the water will wash over1 down on your head1 and it will feel cold as it trickles through your hair2 soon1 however1 you will be able to carry the cup of water with ease and no danger of its spilling4 ,but do not discontinue the practice on that account2 try something else in its place1 until you are able to carry anything you wish on your head with no fear of it falling4 ,the exercise affords amusement1 and at the same time you will be acquiring a beautiful1 dignified1 and graceful carriage4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beb4--;,balancing a ,roll of ,paper4 ,exercise ,second is for gaining agility1 suppleness1 quickness of eye1 hand1 and foot4 ,standing as far from the wall as possible1 take a common rubber hand-ball and toss it against the wall1 catching it as it rebounds 7see illustration71 and again toss it against the wall4 ,vary this by allowing the ball to strike the floor1 catching it on the rebound2 then try keeping the ball in constant motion by using first one hand and then the other as a bat for returning the ball to the wall4 ,the exercise can also be changed by striking the ball against the floor1 and on its return bound again striking it1 thus keeping it in motion4 ,you will find that activity is necessary1 and the work so quick that it will keep you on the jump all through the exercise4 ,exercise ,third is with a broom-handle4 ,saw or cut off the broom and smooth down the sharp ends of the handle1 and it will be ready for use4 ,stand erect1 heels together1 toes out1 chin well back and straight1 so as to throw out and expand the chest4 ,now grasp firmly each end of the broomstick and bring it up over the head 7,fig4 #bec72 repeat this motion six or seven times2 then change by carrying the broomstick over back of the head down across and back of the shoulders2 then up above the head again1 repeating this1 and all other motions in your calisthenics1 half a dozen times4 ,another exercise is holding the stick down in front of you with both hands and bringing it up over the head and down back of the shoulders without stopping4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bec4--;,broom-handle ,exercise4 ,the side motion is made by grasping the broomstick at each end1 holding it down in front of you1 and swinging it sideways1 thus bringing the right hand up when the left is down1 and vice versa4 ,another way is to hold the stick by both ends above your head and swing it from one side to the other1 which will cause the right arm to come in contact with the right side of the head1 while the left arm is extended out horizontally to the left4 ,next carry the stick back of and against the shoulders2 then swing it from right to left1 which gives another side movement4 ,vary all the movements in as many different ways as you can think of4 ,exercise ,fourth4 ,stand erect always when in position for exercising1 according to the directions given--heels together1 toes out1 etc4 ,now allow your arms to hang naturally down at your sides1 raise your heels1 and stand on your toes2 now lower the heels and repeat the motion2 then close your hands tightly and raise your arms out sideways at right angles with your body1 next up straight above your head1 and down again to the level of the shoulders1 then back down to your sides as at first4 ,again take position1 close your hands tightly1 and raise them up under the arms1 bringing the elbows out to a level with the shoulders2 then bring your hands down at your sides again and repeat the movement vigorously2 resume position1 firmly close your hands and carry them up to the shoulders1 next extend them up straight above your head1 down again to your shoulders1 and back to the first position4 ,a very good exercise is to extend both arms straight out in front of you1 close your hands and bring them back to your chest1 which will cause the bent elbows to project beyond your back4 ,exercise ,fifth4 ,assume position1 close your hands1 and take one long step forward with your right foot1 bend the right knee and stand with your weight resting on the right foot2 then extend your arms out sideways straight from the shoulders1 now bring your hands together in front of you1 still keeping the arms on a level with the shoulders1 and while doing so throw the body back1 straightening the right knee and bending the left so the weight of the body will rest on the left foot2 repeat this and vary it by taking one step forward with the left foot and going through with the same motions4 ,resume position1 and place your hands on your hips1 with your thumbs turned forward and fingers backward4 ,now take a long step forward with your right foot1 throwing the weight on that foot1 then back again in position1 and in the same manner step forward with your left foot and back again2 next take a step backward with your right foot1 resume position1 and then with your left4 ,again stand with your hands on your hips1 thumbs turned forward1 and without bending your knees move the body1 first bending it forward1 then backward1 and resuming an upright position1 bend over to the right and to the left4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bed4--;,balancing ,broom-handle4 ,exercise ,sixth4 ,in this the broomstick is used for balancing2 hold it in an upright position1 and first try balancing it on the palm of your hand2 then on the back of your hand1 next on each of the fingers in succession1 commencing with the first finger 7,fig4 #bed72 be cautious1 and when the stick wavers do not let it fall1 but catch it with the other hand1 and again balance it4 ,this is an interesting1 light1 and diverting exercise1 requiring all your attention1 and1 for the time being1 your thoughts are concentrated on the effort to keep the broomstick properly balanced4 ,exercise ,seventh4 ,pure blood means good health1 and to purify the blood and keep the complexion clear it is essential that you breathe a sufficient quantity of pure air1 and you cannot take in a proper amount of air unless your lungs are wholly extended4 ,so take position with your hands correctly placed on your hips2 then very slowly draw in your breath until your chest and lungs are fully expanded2 next slowly exhale your breath1 and repeat the exercise4 ,exercise ,eighth4 ,screw in two large1 strong hooks in the woodwork on each side of the doorway2 place the hooks as far above your head as you can conveniently reach2 slide the broomstick in so that it will extend across the doorway and be supported by the hooks2 have the apparatus on that side of the doorway where it will not interfere with the opening and closing of the door1 and be sure that it is perfectly secure before attempting to exercise2 each time before commencing a new movement examine the stick1 and be certain that it is not in any danger of slipping from the hooks4 ,unless you can be perfectly safe from liability to hurts or falls1 do not include this in your list of exercises4 ,for the first movement grasp the bar firmly with both hands and swing the body forward and backward1 standing first on the toes1 then on the heels2 next1 still grasping the bar1 raise up on your toes1 then back again4 ,change the movements in as many ways as you like1 but do not try anything that may strain or hurt you4 ,now screw in two more hooks1 on either side of the woodwork1 below the first ones1 placing them about two feet and eight inches from the floor2 take the stick from its elevated position and slide it across the doorway so it will rest securely on the two lower hooks4 ,standing in front of it1 grasp the bar firmly with both hands and try to raise yourself up1 feet and all1 from the floor by bearing your weight down on the bar2 then let yourself gently back again4 ,when you have finished exercising1 remove the stick and put it away4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bee4--,the ,swing4 ,exercise ,ninth4 ,in the top part of the framework of the doorway fasten a very strong hook by screwing it into the wood2 then take a broomstick and1 after shortening it so that when held in a horizontal position it will readily pass through the doorway1 cut notches in each end and securely tie the two ends of a rope across the notches2 suspend this swing by slipping the centre of the rope over the hook in the doorway 7,fig4 #bee72 have the apparatus strong and firm1 capable of any amount of wear and tear4 ,stand facing the stick1 which should be at the height of the chest1 and take hold of it with both hands2 now bend the knees until they are within a short distance of the floor1 then rise and repeat the exercise4 ,next1 with both hands on the stick1 take a long step forward with the right foot1 throwing the weight on that foot2 return to your position and go through the same exercise with your left foot4 ,try different movements which suggest themselves1 and select those you like best4 ,when not in use the swing can be slipped off the hook and put out of the way4 ,exercise ,tenth4 ,to develop a weak voice and make it clear and sweet1 and to strengthen the lungs1 reading aloud is an excellent exercise2 as it requires both mental and muscular exertion and performs a double duty1 it should receive a full share of time and attention4 ,begin with something you are interested in1 then you will find it much easier to read aloud than if you undertook a book or an article which might be full of merit1 but lack interest for you4 ,when commencing this exercise read only ten minutes or less at a sitting1 increasing the time as you practise and the reading grows less difficult4 ,do not be discouraged if your voice sounds a little husky while reading2 stop a moment1 and then go on again4 ,after a few trials you will have no more trouble in that way1 for your voice will grow clear and distinct1 and the exercise will become a great pleasure as well as an attractive1 useful accomplishment4 ,let your reading matter be very choice and of the best2 do not condescend to waste your time on other writings4 ,from the ten different exercises given1 select those best adapted to your size1 age1 and liking1 and practise them for a short time daily2 you can hardly realize the great advantage they will prove to be4 ,in this way all parts of the system may be strengthened and harmoniously developed4 ,but the constitution cannot be hurried3 all must be accomplished little by little4 ,allow yourselves to be happy and merry2 be ready to enjoy the little pleasures of life1 and this1 with kind and generous feelings for others1 will do a great deal toward keeping you well and strong4 ,out-of-door exercise is always to be preferred to in-door when one has a choice4 ,walking1 tennis1 archery1 horseback1 and swimming are some of the athletic sports for girls1 and they all have their attractions4 ,but there are times when we are denied the pleasure of these pastimes1 and then we are glad of a little exercise in-doors1 which also affords enjoyment and recreation4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxxiii4 ,a ,,decorative ,,language4 ,,when in olden times the warriors went around the country dressed in suits of clothes made by a blacksmith instead of a tailor1 their hats were manufactured at the forge also1 and had iron front doors that moved upon hinges4 ,when danger was nigh these doors were closed1 locked1 and barred over the poor men's heads1 leaving only a loop-hole or two for them to peep through4 ,at such times in meeting ,mr4 ,brown it was impossible to distinguish him from ,mr4 ,smith1 who was arrayed in like manner1 and it might happen that ,mr4 ,smith was the last man in the world that one cared to meet1 not being on speaking terms or some such reason4 ,well1 as we were saying1 there was no chance whatever of telling one man from another unless he wore a distinguishing mark of some kind4 ,so to prevent such uncomfortable mistakes and to distinguish friend from foe1 every gentleman had to be marked and labelled1 like an express package1 so one might read as he ran1 8,i am ,earl ,jenkins1 of ,thunderland1 who married a ,rhazor1 of ,stropshire40 ,these names and addresses were not painted in words on their owners with a marking-brush1 but worked and embroidered in translatable designs on cloaks1 saddle-housings1 and silken banners1 or emblazoned on the shield they carried with which to meet the advances of their neighbors4 ,since that time our more recent ancestors in ,england have taken great pride in preserving and handing down from generation to generation these distinguishing marks1 as a guarantee to their children that they came of gentle birth1 which is very interesting and gratifying for ,european girls1 but ,american girls need nothing of the kind2 it is sufficient that we are ,americans4 ,of course1 some of us do take pleasure in knowing that our great-great-grandparents came over in the ,mayflower1 or that the name of an ancestor is among the signatures upon that ,declaration of ,independence which made such a stir a century ago1 for that proves us to be ,columbia's daughters4 ,when there was no other method of distinguishing a man his label became a very important item2 so these family devices were reduced to a science and protected by law4 ,the old countries' coats of arms may remain abroad1 where they belong1 but the ingenious scheme1 that was gradually evolved1 of picturing ideas1 mottoes1 and pretty sentiments we will adopt as our inheritance1 with many thanks to our medival ancestors with the metallic clothes1 who bequeathed them to us4 ,we propose to revive enough of this neglected knowledge of chivalry to serve our purpose in suggesting a method of designing devices which will not only be artistic decorations1 but to the initiated can be made to portray almost any sentiment or set of principles the artist may choose4 ,the many uses to which these designs can be applied will1 we hope1 at once be seen by the quick-witted ,american girls1 and we trust will interest the reader as much as they do the writer1 who in this chapter can only give a few necessary1 brief hints upon the subject1 sufficient1 however1 to explain the application that can be made of this beautiful and perfect system of ,decorative ,language4 ,in the following directions anyone can learn how to make a device which will not only be a decoration1 artistic in form and color1 but will at the same time express the peculiar traits1 characteristics1 and virtues of the friend for whom it is intended1 or the precept1 code1 proverb1 or creed of the designer4 ,all technical terms1 as far as practicable1 are discarded1 but the rules of heraldry strictly adhered to1 with such simplifications as are necessary to render it intelligible4 ,the ,field4 ,the surface on which the design is portrayed is called the field4 ,this may be of any shape2 originally it was supposed to represent a warrior's shield1 but you may use a circle1 oval1 square1 diamond1 or any other form4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bef4--,the ,field4 ,the ,points on the surface of the shield locate the exact spot where a design or object in heraldry may be placed4 ,refer by numbers to ,fig4 #beg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beg4--,points4 #a4 ,fess point4 #b4 ,honor point4 #c4 ,nombril point4 #d4 ,dexter chief point4 #e4 ,middle or chief point4 #f4 ,sinister chief point4 #g4 ,dexter base point4 #h4 ,middle base point4 #i4 ,sinister base point4 ,if you desire to place a flower on the fess point1 you find that it means the exact centre of the shield1 and so on4 ,the devices take significance in accordance with the more or less importance of their position on the shield2 the honor point holds the highest grade1 next to it the middle or chief point1 and the right or dexter side is of more importance than the left or sinister4 ,the field may be divided1 if desired1 in any of the following ,divisions1 each of which has a significance1 suggested generally by the form3 ,fig4 #beh1 the ,chief1 occupying the top or head of the shield1 indicates pre-eminence1 main object1 intelligence1 first principle4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #beh4--;,chief4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bei4--;,fess4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfj4--,parted per ,fess4 ,fig4 #bei1 the ,fess1 denotes cause and effect1 the central band containing the means by which the ends1 in the other spaces1 are accomplished4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfa4--,pale4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfb4--,parted per ,pale4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfc4--;,bend4 ,fig4 #bfj is a partition1 and partakes of the meaning of the division1 it is denoted by the term1 parted per fess4 ,fig4 #bfa1 the ,pale1 represents rectitude1 uprightness2 also union1 the object in the central division uniting whatever occupies the dexter and sinister sides4 ,fig4 #bfb is parted per pale4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfd4--,parted per ,bend4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfe4--;,chevron4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bff4--;,cross4 ,fig4 #bfc1 the ,bend1 is auspicious1 meaning prosperity1 success4 ,fig4 #bfd is parted per bend4 ,fig4 #bfe1 the ,chevron1 is indicative of aid1 assistance1 support4 ,fig4 #bff1 the ,cross1 suggests humility1 devotion1 patience1 perseverance4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfg4--,saltire4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfh4--,pile4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bfi4--;,canton4 ,fig4 #bfg1 the ,saltire1 a variation of the cross1 is recognized as order1 discipline4 ,fig4 #bfh1 the ,pile1 being in the form of a wedge1 means penetration1 incision1 entering to divide or distribute4 ,fig4 #bfi1 the ,canton1 denotes an additional1 separate idea or principle2 also some characteristic that is added to the original design4 ,colors4 ,these also have symbolical meanings4 ,fig4 #bgj4--;,gold or yellow is expressed in black and white by means of dots1 and is used in the sense of wealth1 ability1 or knowledge4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgj4--;,gold4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bga4--,silver4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgb4--,red4 ,fig4 #bga4--,silver or white is represented by a plain white surface1 and being the color of light1 signifies brightness1 purity1 virtue1 innocence4 ,fig4 #bgb4--,red1 represented by perpendicular lines1 means ardent affection1 love4 ,fig4 #bgc4--;,blue is represented by horizontal lines2 like the color in the heavens1 it is truth1 freedom1 eternity4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgc4--;,blue4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgd4--,purple4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bge4--;,green4 ,fig4 #bgd4--,purple1 represented by diagonal lines from sinister chief to dexter base1 being the royal color1 is understood as authority1 power1 grandeur4 ,fig4 #bge4--;,green is represented by lines running diagonally across the shield from dexter chief to sinister base4 ,like spring foliage1 it suggests hope1 life1 vitality1 youth1 freshness4 ,fig4 #bgf4--,orange is represented by horizontal lines crossed by diagonal lines from dexter base to sinister chief4 ,it is the color of the king of beasts and signifies strength1 honor1 generosity4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgf4--,orange4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgg4--;,crimson4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgh4--;,black4 ,fig4 #bgg4--;,crimson1 or blood-color1 is represented by diagonal lines from dexter chief and sinister chief1 crossing each other4 ,it denotes boldness1 enthusiasm1 impetuosity4 ,fig4 #bgh4--;,black is represented by horizontal and perpendicular lines crossed4 ,it means darkness1 doubt1 ignorance1 uncertainty4 ,to the principal design portrayed on the shield can be added such appendages as are appropriate--crest over the top and a scroll with a motto beneath the shield--but they are supplementary1 and not of great importance2 their colors should be those of the shield4 ,thus far our plans have followed the exact science of heraldry1 but at this point comes a departure1 for in the place of other armorial devices we shall place ,dame ,nature's sweetest thoughts--flowers4 ,if we now add to the significance of the forms and colors already given the accepted and authentic language of flowers1 we shall have a possibility of combinations practically inexhaustible1 and with such a dictionary of symbols to draw upon1 we can successfully translate almost any terse sentiment into a unique decorative design4 ,in order to give all the assistance in our power we have culled from the most generally accepted authorities and authentic sources a short floral vocabulary1 and now that we have the material at hand let us test the system and learn ,how to ,make a ,design in ,decorative ,language4 ,suppose our ,natural ,history ,society desires an appropriate pin or badge4 ,first we turn to the floral vocabulary and there find that the magnolia means love of nature4 ,the flower has a good decorative form1 its sentiment is exactly appropriate1 and we unhesitatingly adopt it4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bgi4 ,,true ,,love ,,of ,,nature ,after trying various forms for the shield1 we select a very plain one that the effect of the decorative form of the magnolia may not be lessened by too ornate surroundings1 and to show the large size of the blossom we must have it occupy the entire field without any divisions4 ,next1 as to color2 let us think4 ,white1 meaning brightness1 purity1 etc48 ,no4 ,yellow or gold1 signifying wealth1 ability1 or--ah6 here we have it--knowledge8 ,yes1 that will do nicely--a love of nature on a field of knowledge2 that certainly is appropriate4 ,but the top of the shield being so square and plain gives the device an unfinished appearance4 ,suppose we try a bar over it1 and something not a flower4 ,as we wish this design to remain simple1 a leaf of some kind would be best2 so we return to the floral vocabulary1 and after trying many and almost taking several1 finally decide that the oak leaf is just the form needed to give a finish to the top1 and its meaning1 strength1 will be an excellent element in the society4 ,there1 our insignia is complete1 good in form1 attractive in color1 and appropriate in its meaning2 but some of us prefer having the motto written out in plain ,english1 so we will add a decorative scroll1 with the meaning of the design inscribed 8,true ,love of ,nature40 7,see ,fig4 #bgi47 ,to familiarize ourselves with the working of the method let us try another experiment1 and take the sentiment1 8,wealth is the ,reward of ,industry10 to illustrate4 ,after deciding on the form of the shield1 we turn to the divisions1 and running them slowly over for something suitable1 stop at ,fig4 #bei1 the ,fess1 meaning cause and effect4 ,that sounds promising4 ,industry is the means by which the end1 wealth1 is accomplished4 ,good so far4 ,we can now see that a floral emblem to represent industry should be placed in the central division1 and whatever signifies wealth on the other two spaces4 ,among our legends of flowers we find industry portrayed by the bee orchid1 and wealth and prosperity are symbolized by wheat4 ,that is plain and easy4 ,now we have only to decide upon appropriate colors for the field to complete the design4 ,gold would mean wealth1 but that we have in the wheat2 besides the yellow of the wheat would not show well on the gold background1 while on white or silver the contrast is strong and the appearance agreeable4 ,silver denotes innocence and virtue1 which are so necessary that without them wealth would be undesirable4 ,therefore silver or virtue shall be the groundwork for our wealth1 and for industry we will select purple as meaning power4 ,industry possesses the power to acquire wealth4 ,thus we complete the emblematical design1 as seen in ,fig4 #bhj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhj4 ,wealth is the ,reward of ,,industry ,the following is a problem given to us for solution3 ,on a gold chevron in a black field is a scarlet lily1 to which is added as a crest a sunflower1 and under all a blank scroll4 ,on this we must write a motto that will be appropriately symbolized by the design4 ,it would be excellent practice for the student in this new motif in decorative art to try1 by application of the foregoing instructions1 to decipher the meaning of this design before reading the analysis4 ,,solution ,,of ,,fig4 #bha4 --,we do not think this is put together as scientifically as the system would admit of1 but still it can be deciphered4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bha4 ,the scarlet lily 7high-souled aspirations7 on a gold 7knowledge7 chevron1 which is aid1 assistance1 in a field of black 7ignorance71 surmounted by the sunflower 7pure and lofty thoughts71 freely translated1 might be read3 ,aspirations after knowledge help to illumine the darkness of ignorance with pure and lofty thoughts4 ,aspirations 7lily7 after knowledge 7gold7 help 7chevron7 to illumine 7the gold chevron and lily brighten up the dulness of the black field7 the darkness of ignorance 7black7 with pure and lofty thoughts 7sunflower74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhb4 ,for younger girls the plain shield of one color with an appropriate flower had best be used1 which they may vary ad infinitum4 ,a simple yet pretty shield can be made by placing a four-leaved clover1 symbolical of good-luck1 on a shield of one color1 silver1 meaning purity1 innocence1 showing that innocence1 combined with the language of the clover1 expresses good-fortune4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhc4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhd ,we might go on forming innumerable designs1 each more beautiful than the last1 but enough hints have been given to enable the young people to make any style of design in this decorative language which may best suit their purpose4 ,young girls can decorate menu cards1 having each motto exactly suited to every separate guest1 the sentiment being indicative of some feeling or quality peculiar to each person4 ,invitations for parties1 also orders of dances or games1 may be designed in the same way4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhe4 ,this beautiful combination of flowers and heraldry is appropriate for ornamental needlework1 to be embroidered on chairs1 worked on screens1 painted on velvet1 wrought on scarfs1 and adapted in innumerable ways to add to the refinement and attractiveness of home4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhf4 ,the idea can be utilized in stained-glass effects and in china ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhh4 ,the chosen motto may be a decoration in marking personal possessions1 such as table china 7,figs4 #bhb1 #bhc1 #bhd71 fan 7,fig4 #bhe71 chair-back 7,fig4 #bhf71 travelling satchel 7,fig4 #bhg71 tidy 7,fig4 #bhh71 handkerchief 7,fig4 #bhi71 and sofa-cushion 7,fig4 #bij74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bhi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bij4 ,these are only a few examples of the many articles which can be beautified and stamped with your individual mark4 ,portires offer a good ground for applique or embroidery in decorative language4 ,book-,plates seem to be regaining their popularity and usefulness4 ,these book-plates are tablets in any style1 which1 when gummed inside on the front covers of books1 have been used for many years to designate to whom the books belong4 ,there is a certain book-plate more interesting to us than all others4 ,to the design on it we are indebted for our national shield and our ,stars and ,stripes4 ,it was used by the ,father of our ,country1 and we are glad to be able to give a print of the original in ,fig4 #bia4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bia4 ,in the decorative language any style of book-plate can be designed1 which1 when pasted in a favorite book1 will add to the value of the already treasured volume4 ,floral ,vocabulary4 ,apple-blossom ,preference4 ,almond ,hope4 ,acanthus ,art4 ,arbor vit ,unchanging friendship4 ,bulrush ,docility4 ,balm ,social intercourse4 ,balsamine ,impatience4 ,blue violet ,faithfulness4 ,bay wreath ,glory4 ,box ,constancy4 ,broom ,humility4 ,buttercup ,riches4 ,camellia japonica ,unpretending excellence4 ,cherry ,a good education4 ,canterbury-bell ,gratitude4 ,chestnut ,do me justice4 ,china aster ,love of variety4 ,cabbage ,profit4 ,coreopsis ,always cheerful4 ,clover1 red ,industry4 ,cowslip ,winning grace4 ,clover1 white ,i promise4 ,daffodil ,uncertainty4 ,dahlia ,elegance and dignity4 ,dandelion ,coquetry4 ,fennel ,strength4 ,geranium ,gentility4 ,grass ,submission4 ,heliotrope ,devotion4 ,house-leek ,domestic economy4 ,hollyhock ,ambition4 ,ivy ,dependence4 ,laurestine ,a token4 ,lichen ,solitude4 ,lettuce ,cold-hearted4 ,lemon-blossom ,discretion4 ,lilac1 purple ,fastidiousness4 ,lily1 white ,purity4 ,mullein ,good-nature4 ,mignonette ,worth4 ,may-flower ,welcome4 ,nasturtium ,patriotism4 ,oats ,music4 ,olive ,peace4 ,ox-eye ,patience4 ,poppy1 white ,dreams4 ,snowdrop ,consolation4 ,straw ,united4 ,sensitive-plant ,sensitiveness4 ,star of ,bethlehem ,reconciliation4 ,sweetbrier ,simplicity4 ,thyme ,thriftiness4 ,thorn-apple ,disguise4 ,tulip-tree ,fame4 ,witch-hazel ,a spell4 ,winged seeds of all kinds ,messengers4 ,white violet ,modesty4 ,white rose ,silence4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxxiv4 ,a ,,few ,,items ,,on ,,old-,,fashioned ,,needle-,,work1 ,,with ,,some ,,new ,,and ,,original ,,patterns4 8,,come around early this afternoon and bring your fancy-work2 we will have a nice1 cosey time2 all the girls will be there1 and we can read that last new book40 ,such is the familiar and welcome invitation given and received1 from time to time1 by most young girls1 and they find quiet but real recreation in these informal meetings1 where1 while listening to a friend read aloud1 they believe it much easier to keep their minds on the subject if their hands are employed with dainty needle-work4 ,then1 too1 sewing is a real pleasure when one becomes interested in the work1 and anyone who thoroughly understands plain sewing can with ease learn fancy stitches of all kinds1 for good old-fashioned ,plain ,sewing is the foundation--the ,a ,b ,c--of all the more elaborate drawn work1 embroideries1 and some of the laces4 ,as a rule we think ,,overhanding comes first on the list of plain stitches2 this is exactly the same as sewing over and over4 ,hold the two edges of the material firmly together between the first finger and thumb of the left hand1 while with the right hand you take the stitches very close together and as near the edge as possible1 sewing from right to left 7,fig4 #bib74 ,it is well to keep the edge nearest to you a little tighter than the outer edge1 to prevent its puckering4 ,always baste the seam before sewing1 and when the seam is finished open it and flatten out the stitches 7,fig4 #bic71 so that the edges of the material will not overlap1 but just meet together and lie smooth and flat4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bib4--,overhanding2 or ,sewing over and over4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bic--,overhanding4 ,the seam opened with stitches flattened out4 ,,overcasting is the same as overhanding1 except the stitches slant1 are farther apart1 taken down deeper in the material1 and the seam is not opened4 ,,hemming4 ,first turn in the raw edge four or five threads1 according to the kind of goods to be hemmed1 then turn it down again to the desired width2 this done1 baste the hem down evenly and neatly--it must be of the same width throughout--hold the sewing over the first finger of your left hand1 and have the stitches small1 even1 and very near the edge of the hem 7,fig4 #bid74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bid4--;,hemming4 ,,running4 ,pass the needle in and out of the material in a straight line 7,fig4 #bie71 making all the stitches the same size4 ,we believe the rule is to take up two threads and leave two2 but the length of the stitch should be regulated by the kind of material used4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bie4--,running4 ,,basting is to take long stitches in the same manner as running4 ,,gathering does not differ much from running2 the stitches are taken on the needle in the same manner1 but in this case two threads are taken up and four left2 the line should be kept perfectly straight4 ,if you wish to gather an apron or a skirt divide it into halves1 then into quarters1 in order to make the fulness even on each half of the band2 mark the four places and gather on the right side2 when finished draw the stitches tightly together on the thread and stroke down evenly with a needle4 ,to sew in the gathers1 back-stitch each one in separately4 ,,stitching4 ,take two threads back of the needle and two before1 having each stitch meet the last one1 as in ,fig4 #bif2 keep the stitches even and in a straight line4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bif4--,stitching4 ,,back-,,stitching4 ,proceed as in stitching1 only make the stitches longer and do not have them meet4 ,,felling4 ,first baste up the seam1 allowing the upper edge to extend five threads beyond the lower edge 7,fig4 #bif72 then back-stitch or stitch the two edges together2 next turn the upper edge down over the lower one and lay open the seam so that the fell will lie down flat like a hem 7,fig4 #big72 then hem it down neatly4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #big4--;,felling4 ,button-holes4 ,fig4 #bih shows how to take the proper stitch4 ,be careful in cutting button-holes to make the slit even to a thread and cut the outer corner rounded2 bar the inner corner by taking two stitches across it1 and overcast the button-hole around three or four threads deep from the edge1 or if the material is not inclined to ravel run it with thread1 either double or single1 drawing it a trifle tight2 then begin at the left-hand corner to work the button-hole1 leaving one thread between each stitch2 keep the stitches exactly the same depth and the loop or pearl of the button-hole on the upper edge4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bih4--;,button-hole ,stitch4 ,,herring-,,bone ,,or ,,cat',s-,,tooth ,,stitch is used to keep the seams in flannel spread open and fastened neatly down4 ,fig4 #bii shows how to take the stitch2 make the stitches all even and of the same size4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #bii4--;,herring-bone ,stitch4 ,we have now given all the stitches which properly belong to plain sewing1 and our next step will be ,darning and ,mending4 8,a stitch in time saves nine20 this much most of us know from experience1 and it is wise to devote a little time on a certain day each week to looking over the wardrobe and making any repairs that may be needed2 the little care and time thus bestowed will prove a true economy1 and it is a real comfort to have all one's clothing in perfect order4 ,,to ,,darn ,a ,,jersey ,,or ,a ,,stocking4 ,with a needle and thread carefully draw out the uneven ravelled edges of the hole1 in order to diminish its size as much as possible1 and bring the loops and ends back in their proper places2 then place under it a wooden egg or anything that will answer the purpose1 and using thread of the same texture and shade of color as the garment to be mended1 run back and forth across the hole as far as the material is worn thin1 leaving a loop at the end of each turn4 ,in crossing the threads1 take up every other thread alternately each way 7,fig4 #cjj71 and make the darn of an irregular shape1 as one of an even outline does not wear well2 when the weaving or darning is finished the loops can be cut off4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjj4--;,jersey or ,stocking ,darn4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cja4--,tear ,darn4 ,,to ,,darn ,a ,,tear4 ,carefully bring the ragged edges together and baste the tear as nearly as possible in its original position2 then1 if it is delicate muslin or dress material to be mended1 use ravellings of the same instead of thread to darn with1 and weave it in and out across the edges of the rent1 as in ,fig4 #cja2 if the darn needs strengthening1 baste a piece of the same material under the rent before darning1 and catch down the edges of the piece on the under side of the goods4 ,in mending broadcloth or like material1 darn it on the wrong side1 and when the darn is finished1 ruff up the nap with the point of the needle at the edges of the tear on the right side to cover the stitches2 then dampen the darn1 and after laying a thin clean cloth over it1 press with a moderately hot flat-iron2 this should make the darn almost1 if not quite1 imperceptible4 ,how to ,patch4 ,if possible cut the piece intended as a patch of the same goods as the garment to be mended1 and if there is a pattern be careful to so cut and place the patch that it will match exactly2 baste and hem down the patch on the right side of the worn part of the garment2 then cut out the old material on the wrong side1 leaving enough edge to form a firm hem2 sew this to the patch1 taking care that the stitches do not show on the right side4 ,how to ,sew on a ,button4 ,should much strain come on the button1 as in little children's clothes1 first hem down a small double piece of muslin1 on the wrong side of the garment1 at the exact spot where the button is to be placed1 and with strong thread take a stitch on the right side2 then sew the button through about four times1 being careful not to let the stitches spread on the wrong side2 wind the thread three times around the shank of the button formed by the stitches1 drawing the thread a little tight1 pass the needle through and fasten the thread neatly on the wrong side2 the extra piece of muslin can be omitted when not needed4 ,to ,mend a ,kid ,glove4 ,if the glove is merely ripped1 and there is no strain on the portion to be mended1 sew the two edges together over and over on the right side with fine thread or sewing-silk matching in color the glove to be mended2 if1 however1 there is liability of its tearing out again1 strengthen the edges by first working a button-hole stitch on each2 then sew them together over and over1 passing the needle in and out of the loops of the button-hole stitch1 so forming a narrow net-work of thread between the two pieces of kid4 ,should the glove need a patch1 carefully cut a piece of kid out of the best part of an old kid glove corresponding in color to the one needing repairs2 make the patch exactly the shape and size of the hole1 and button-hole stitch all around the edge of the hole and the edge of the patch2 then sew in the patch over and over1 catching together the loops of the button-hole stitches2 this makes the mending firm1 neat1 and strong4 ,fancy ,stitches4 ,these are in many varieties of style2 one of the most useful is known as the ,,feather ,,stitch4 ,fig4 #cjb gives the position of the needle and the manner of taking the stitch4 ,remember to make all the stitches of an exact length and the same distance apart1 first one on this side and then one on that1 keeping them in a straight1 even line4 ,illustration3 ,fig #cjb4--;,feather ,stitch4 ,,chain ,,stitch sometimes takes the place of braiding2 it is the same stitch as that used in the old-fashioned tambouring 7,fig4 #cjc72 many ,persian embroideries are made in silk with the chain-stitch4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjc4--;,chain ,stitch4 ,a ,,new ,,idea ,,in ,,outline ,,stitch4 ,the stitch 7,fig4 #cjd7 is used for outline embroidery1 and when made with fine black sewing-silk resembles pen-and-ink work4 ,we have seen figures outlined on linen with the drapery worked in colors1 while the face1 hands1 and feet were simply in black and white2 being finely outlined1 the effect was novel and artistic1 for in this way the features were made as true as if drawn on paper with a pencil4 ,for filling in the solid colors take the common running stitch1 but make the stitches long on the right side of the embroidery and very short on the wrong side1 so as to give the appearance of the colored fabric copied4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjd4--,outline ,stitch4 ,use filo-silk2 and ,english or ,french embroidery cottons1 when colors are needed in the work4 ,always soak the silks and cottons in strong salt and water before using2 this sets the color and keeps it from running when washed4 ,,hem-,,stitching4 ,decide upon the width of the hem and the width of the space for drawn threads2 carefully draw out the thread at one edge of the space1 then the thread at the other edge2 next all the intervening threads2 this finished1 fold and baste down the hem1 allowing it to meet the edge of the drawn work1 and taking five threads running lengthwise in the space1 bind them together at the edge of the hem2 at the same time stitch them to the hem1 as in ,fig4 #cje4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cje4--;,hem-stitching4 ,drawn ,work always looks well and is very serviceable when made of linen4 ,scarfs for buffets1 bureaus1 or tables1 and tea-cloths1 tidies1 or chair-backs1 can be made of crash1 butchers' linen1 and linen sheeting2 it is better to have doylies of very fine linen4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjf4--;,fagotting ,stitch4 ,in making drawn work1 if the article is to be fringed1 first draw out a few threads to measure the depth of the fringe1 and at the opening thus made hem-stitch all around the edge of the material1 leaving the ravelling out of the fringe until the drawn work is finished2 proceed to draw the threads wherever spaces are desired1 and before working the pattern always hem-stitch both edges of the spaces4 ,in ,fig4 #cjf the pattern marked ,b shows the stitch called fagotting1 made by crossing every other group of threads back over the one preceding and drawing the linen thread through in such a way as to keep the groups twisted2 the two lines marked ,a1 in the ,fig4 #cjf1 are intended more as a finish to some elaborate design than as a pattern in themselves2 these are made by hem-stitching down a number of threads to each group4 ,fig4 #cjg gives a favorite pattern2 for this count the threads1 so that the spaces may be equal and regular2 draw the threads in all the spaces running one way first2 then draw the threads in the spaces crossing the first one and run linen threads diagonally across from the top of the right-hand corner to the bottom of the left1 dividing each linen square into two equal parts2 cross these by threads also running diagonally across from the top of the left-hand corner to the bottom of the right1 again dividing the linen squares1 making four equal parts2 then weave threads through all the spaces running both horizontally and perpendicularly1 using the fagotting stitch 7,fig4 #cjf71 and when crossing the threads in the open spaces tie the centres of each in turn1 as in ,figs4 #cjh1 #cji2 finish the pattern by running a thread in and out several times around the knots in the centres of the wheels and fasten the ends by tying neatly4 ,another pattern is given in ,fig4 #caj4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjg4--;,drawn ,work4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cjh4--;,first ,knot4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cji4--,second ,knot4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caj4--;,border in ,drawn ,work4 ,outline work is often combined with drawn work2 fast colors1 in either cotton1 linen or silk1 are used for the outline design4 ,when the article worked is intended for daily use and must frequently be laundried1 it is better to substitute in place of the fringe a wide hem-stitched hem edged with firm linen lace4 ,very dainty fancy aprons are made of common scrim with spaces drawn and narrow ribbons of different colors simply woven in and out of the threads1 running crosswise through the spaces4 ,applique and ,original ,designs for ,portires4 ,the pattern in this work is cut from one material and sewed on another4 ,almost any kind of fabric can be used as either applique or foundation2 velvet and plush are suitable for applique1 but make poor groundwork1 owing to the long nap2 both materials in dark rich colors are handsome when used as a border on portires or table-covers4 ,to applique a pattern of velvet or plush cut the design very exact and cover the wrong side with a slight coating of gum1 being careful to have the gum thin on the edges so that it will not spread on the groundwork2 then lay the velvet on the place it is to occupy1 and after pressing it down very gently and lightly with your hand1 allow it to dry2 this accomplished1 the edges of the pattern may be hemmed down neatly on the foundation4 ,if a further finish is desired1 outline the design by sewing all around the edge a small gold or silken cord4 ,portires4 ,we give an original applique design for a portire in ,fig4 #caa1 representing ,day4 ,the foundation is of soft dark-blue momie-cloth1 the sun a round piece of bright yellow or orange satin1 and the rays are of gold or heavy yellow silk thread merely run in stitches of various lengths2 the cloud is of light blue crape or crazy cloth1 and the bird is one of those which come prepared expressly for applique by the ,japanese1 and can be purchased at almost any ,japanese or fancy store2 if possible a lark should be selected in preference to other birds4 ,the border is a band of old gold velvet4 ,our other design 7,fig4 #cab7 represents ,night2 the foundation and band are the same as those for the 8,day0 portire2 the star is of white silk1 the moon of very pale ,nile green silk1 and the cloud of dark pearl gray crape or crazy cloth1 much darker than the blue momie-cloth4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caa4--,portire4 ,day4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cab4--,portire4 ,night4 ,the applique work must be done very carefully4 ,first cut out the designs1 next turn in the raw edges evenly and smoothly1 and with a very fine thread and needle baste the edges down2 then baste the designs carefully on the foundations1 and1 with a fine needle and sewing-silk matching in color the piece to be appliqued1 hem each one down neatly1 making the stitches almost invisible4 ,the band of velvet can be sewed on the bottom edge of the momie-cloth1 then turned up like a hem and hemmed down4 ,lace4 ,very beautiful lace is made by cutting out the heavy patterns which are still perfect1 from old and worn laces and embroideries1 and transferring the designs to new fine wash-net4 ,after first basting them on1 hem them down to the netting with a fine needle and thread2 in this way the embroideries last as long again and look as well as when new4 ,ribbon ,embroideries4 ,we can give a clearer idea of this work by means of an example1 and we will take the common white daisy as an illustration4 ,thread a long-eyed coarse needle with very narrow white ribbon1 and beginning at the centre of the flower1 pass the needle from the wrong side up through your material1 drawing the ribbon out nearly its full length and leaving only a short piece on the wrong side to be fastened down2 now take a stitch straight out the length of a daisy petal and pass the needle through to the wrong side2 then1 taking a very short stitch1 draw the needle out through on the right side2 next take another long stitch back to the centre of the daisy1 thus forming the second petal2 continue in the same manner1 making the petals radiate out in a circle from the centre of the flower4 ,work the centres of the daisies with yellow silk and the stems in dark-green silk2 the leaves can be either worked or appliqued4 ,for half-blown daisies make only about a quarter of a circle of petals1 and in place of the yellow centre1 work a green calyx4 ,ox-eyed daisies can be made in the same way with soft1 thin yellow ribbon1 a little broader than the ribbon used for white daisies4 ,the work is rapid and pleasing1 and almost any flower can be imitated very perfectly with ribbon embroidery4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxxv4 ,,scrap-,,book ,,and ,,home-,,made ,,book-,,covers4 ,,the fashion of collecting pictured advertising cards1 so much in vogue among the children a few years ago1 seems to have run its course1 and dying out1 it has left on the young collectors' hands more cards than they know well what to do with4 ,many of the collections have been pasted in scrap-books1 of which the children have long since tired4 ,while examining one of these volumes with its row after row of cards1 it occurred to me that these advertisements might be utilized in a new way by dividing and combining them4 ,the experiment proved a success1 and ,i will now try to show you how1 with the aid of scissors and mucilage1 the pictures which have become so familiar may be made to undergo changes that are indeed wonderful1 and how from them may be formed a ,mother ,goose ,scrap-book4 ,the nursery scrap-books made of linen or paper cambric are1 perhaps1 familiar to most of our readers2 but for the benefit of those who may not yet have seen these durable little books1 we will give the following directions for making one3 ,cut from a piece of strong linen1 colored paper cambric1 or white muslin1 four squares twenty-four inches long by twelve inches wide4 ,button-hole stitch the edges all around with some bright-colored worsted1 then place the squares neatly together and stitch them directly through the centre with strong thread 7,fig4 #cac74 ,fold them over1 stitch again1 as in ,fig4 #cad1 and your book is finished and ready for the pictures4 ,it is in the preparation of these pictures that you will find the novelty of the plan we propose4 ,instead of pasting in those cards which have become too familiar to awaken much interest1 let the young book-makers design and form their own pictures by cutting special figures1 or parts of figures1 from different cards1 and then pasting them together so as to form new combinations4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cac4--,scrap-book ,opened and ,stitched through the ,centre4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cad4--,scrap-book ,folded and again ,stitched4 ,any subject which pleases the fancy can be illustrated in this way1 and you will soon be deeply interested in the work and delighted at the strange and striking pictorial characters that can be produced by ingenious combinations4 ,stories and little poems may be very nicely and aptly illustrated2 but the 8,mother ,goose ,melodies0 are1 perhaps1 the most suitable subjects with which to interest younger children1 as they will be easily recognized by the little folk4 ,take1 for instance1 the 8,three ,wise ,men of ,gotham10 who went to sea in a bowl4 ,will not ,fig4 #cae serve very well as an illustration of the subject8 ,yet these figures are cut from advertising cards1 and no two from the same card4 ,fig4 #caf shows the materials1 ,fig4 #cae the result of combining them4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cae4--8,three ,wise ,men of ,gotham40 ,again1 the little man dancing so gayly 7,fig4 #cag7 is turned into 8,little ,jack ,horner0 eating his ,christmas pie 7,fig4 #cah71 by merely cutting off his legs and substituting a dress-skirt and pair of feet clipped from another card4 ,the ,christmas pie in his lap is from still another card4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #caf4--;,figures cut from ,advertising ,cards4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cag4--;,figures cut from ,christmas ,cards4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cah4--8,little ,jack ,horner40 ,in making pictures of this kind1 figures that were originally standing may be forced to sit2 babies may be placed in arms which1 on the cards they were stolen from1 held only cakes of soap1 perhaps1 or boxes of blacking2 heads may be ruthlessly torn from bodies to which they belong1 and as ruthlessly clapped upon strange shoulders2 and you will be surprised to see what amusing1 and often excellent1 illustrations present themselves as the result of a little ingenuity in clipping and pasting4 ,another kind1 which we shall call the ,transformation ,scrap-,book1 will be found exceedingly amusing on account of the various and ever-changing pictures it presents4 ,unlike any other1 where the picture once pasted in must remain ever the same1 the transformation scrap-book alters one picture many times4 ,to work these transformations a blank book is the first article required2 one eight inches long by six and a half or seven wide is a good size4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cai4--,transformation ,scrap-book with ,pages cut4 ,cut the pages of this book across1 one-third of the way down4 ,fig4 #cai shows how this should be done4 ,the three-cornered piece cut out near the binding allows the pages to be turned without catching or tearing4 ,leave the first page uncut2 also the one in the middle of the book4 ,cut from picture-cards1 or old toy-books which have colored illustrations1 the odd and funny figures of men and women1 boys and girls1 selecting those which will give a variety of costumes and attitudes4 ,paste a figure of a woman or girl on the first page1 placing it so that when the lower part of the next page is turned1 the upper edge of it will come across the neck of the figure where it is joined on to the shoulders4 ,illustration3 ,leaves from a ,transformation ,scrap-book4 ,cut the heads from the rest of the pictured women1 and choosing a body as different as possible from the one just used1 paste it upon the lower part of the next page1 directly under the head belonging to the first body4 ,upon the upper part of the same page paste any one of the other heads1 being careful to place it so that it will fit the body4 ,continue in this way1 pasting the heads upon the upper1 and the bodies on the lower1 part of the page1 until the space allowed for the women is filled up2 then1 commencing at the page left in the middle of the book1 paste upon it the figure of a man1 and continue in the same manner as with the woman1 until the spaces are all used and the book is complete4 ,the combinations formed in this way are very funny4 ,old heads with young bodies2 young heads with old bodies2 then one head with a great variety of bodies1 and so on4 ,the first picture may represent a man1 tall and thin1 dressed in a rowing costume1 as shown in the illustration4 ,turn the lower part of the next page1 and no longer is he thin and tall1 but short and stout1 the position of this body giving the expression of amazement1 even to the face4 ,the next page turned shows him to be neither tall nor short1 thick nor thin1 but a soldier1 well-proportioned1 who is looking over his shoulder in the most natural manner possible4 ,the figures in the illustration were cut from advertising cards1 and the head belongs to none of the bodies4 ,a curious fact in arranging the pictures in this way is that the heads all look as though they might really belong to any of the various bodies given them4 ,instead of having but one figure on a page1 groups may be formed of both men and women1 and in the different arrangement of the figures they can be made very ludicrous indeed4 ,a scrap-book for older girls1 which might be termed more fitly ,an ,album1 can be made by mounting engravings1 wood-cuts1 photographs1 and water-colors on pieces of thin card-board all of the same size4 ,if any one subject be chosen1 and such pictures selected as tend in some way to illustrate that subject1 the book will prove more interesting in the making1 and will be quite valuable when finished4 ,there will be no difficulty in mounting the pictures2 simply paste them on the card-board with good flour-paste1 and press under a heavy weight1 keeping them perfectly neat and free from smears of paste on the edges4 ,when two or more are mounted at the same time1 place clean pieces of blotting-paper between1 pile one upon another1 and put the heavy weight on top4 ,such a scrap-book should be bound in a ,home-made ,book-cover1 which is made in this way3 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbj4--,one ,side of ,book-cover with ,holes cut near the ,edge4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cba4--;,book-cover ,tied with ,ribbons4 ,illustration3 ,fig #cbb4--;,book-cover ,laced together with ,silk ,cord4 ,take two pieces of heavy card-board a trifle larger than the book you wish to cover1 make three holes near the edge of each 7,fig4 #cbj7 and corresponding holes in the edges of the book1 which must not be too thick--that is1 contain too many leaves2 pass narrow ribbons through these holes and tie in bow-knots1 as in ,fig4 #cba4 ,if the leaves of the book are thin1 more holes can be made in the back and the covers laced together with silk cord 7,fig4 #cbb74 ,these book-covers may be beautifully decorated by anyone who can paint in water-colors1 and tinted card-board can also be used for them4 ,they are pretty1 and suitable as covers for manuscript poems or stories1 or for a collection of autographs4 ,in making any kind of scrap-book it is very necessary that the paste used should be good4 ,if the paste is poor1 the pictures will peel off or the paste turn sour4 ,the recipe given below we can recommend as an excellent one for ,flour-paste4 ,mix one-half cup of flour with enough cold water to make a very thin batter1 which must be smooth and free from lumps2 put the batter on top of the stove--not next to the fire--in a tin sauce-pan1 and stir continually until it boils2 then remove from the stove1 add three drops of oil of cloves1 and pour the paste into a cup or tumbler4 ,this will keep for a long time and will not become sour4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxxvi4 ,a ,,heap ,,of ,,rubbish1 ,,and ,,what ,,to ,,do ,,with ,,it4 ,,in almost every house there is an attic1 and in almost every attic may be found a room where trunks are stored1 where broken toys and disabled furniture are put out of sight1 and where all articles not worth selling or giving away gradually accumulate until this attic room contains1 literally1 a heap of rubbish4 ,entering one of these lumber-rooms not long ago1 and glancing over the medley which comprised so much1 from a tin can to a piece of broken bric--brac1 the thought occurred to me that something might be done with it1 some use be made of at least a few of the articles consigned to the place as utterly useless4 ,that was rather a thrifty thought4 ,do you not think so1 girls8 ,then let us make the most of it and together venture back into that mysterious and somewhat dusty chamber1 and see if there really is anything there worth the making over4 ,in imagination we will stand in our attic lumber-room and begin to look about us with eyes and mind open to perceive possibilities4 ,on one side of the room1 leaning against the wall1 we see what was once a handsome old-fashioned mirror1 quite large and of heavy plate-glass4 ,it's poor dusty face1 reflecting dimly its barren surroundings1 is shattered in many pieces1 and at first sight it seems hopeless to attempt to restore it to the plane of beauty or usefulness2 but do not let us be hasty2 we will examine it more closely4 ,yes1 here is a piece of glass large enough to frame4 ,never mind its uneven shape and rough edges2 we will work out that problem later4 ,now we must put it carefully aside and continue our investigations4 ,here is a large tin can1 which can be made into a lantern to hang in the hall1 and this baking-powder can may be of some use1 so we will take it also4 ,the tops of three cheese-boxes2 something should be done with them4 ,perhaps they can be used for a table2 put them with the other chosen things4 ,a croquet-ball6 ,that will make a fine key-rack4 ,this box of silks and ribbons we may need1 and the large pasteboard-box will do for the foundation of our mirror frame4 ,we must have this piece of old brass chain1 this handful of large nails1 the pasteboard roll which has been used for sending engravings through the mail1 and that old broad-brimmed straw hat2 also these three broomsticks and the piece of nice dark-gray hardware paper4 ,now1 seated in our own room1 let us see what we can do with this rather unpromising array of objects spread around us4 ,first we will try ,the ,mirror1 and must cast about us for the ways and means of framing it4 ,the large pasteboard-box we have already decided will make a good foundation4 ,after tearing off the sides1 we will cut an even square from the bottom1 which is smooth and unwarped4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbc4--;,brown ,paper ,pasted on ,mirror and ,pasteboard for ,home-made ,mirror-frame4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbd4--;,bevel of ,hardware ,paper on ,frame4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbe4--,the ,outside ,covering for ,mirror-frame4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbf4--;,back of ,frame with ,tape ,attached4 ,next laying the piece of mirror on the square of pasteboard we must cut1 out of ordinary brown wrapping-paper1 a square two inches larger all around than the pasteboard1 make a hole in the centre as large as the shape of the mirror will allow1 and paste it down on the mirror and pasteboard 7,fig4 #cbc74 ,then1 after clipping out the corners1 we will turn the edges over on to the back of the pasteboard foundation and paste them down4 ,cutting four strips of the hardware paper1 about two inches wide1 we will fold them through the centre lengthwise and paste them around the glass1 lapping them just a little over the edge of the other paper1 the folded side being next to the glass 7,fig4 #cbd74 ,this will form a bevel for our frame4 ,from the same paper we will now cut a square1 three inches larger on all sides than the foundation2 then1 exactly in the centre1 mark a square half an inch larger all around than the square of mirror showing4 ,in the centre of the square marked out we must insert our scissors1 cut it like ,fig4 #cbe1 and after clipping off the points1 as indicated by the dotted lines ,l1 ,m1 ,o1 ,n1 turn back the four pieces at the dotted lines1 ,p1 ,q1 ,r1 ,s1 leaving an open square4 ,then placing it over the mirror so that the same width of bevelled edge shows on all sides of the mirror1 we must paste it down4 ,clipping out the corners1 as shown in diagram1 we will bring the edges over and paste them down securely to the back of the frame4 ,a piece of hardware paper1 cut in a square one inch smaller than the frame1 we will paste on the back to finish it off and hide the edges of the paper where they have been turned over 7,fig4 #cbf74 ,we must fasten on a piece of tape by which to hang the mirror1 by pasting down the ends of the tape on the frame 7letter ,t1 ,fig4 #cbf71 and pasting over each a strip of the hardware paper 7letter ,u1 ,fig4 #cbf74 ,when the frame is quite dry we will paint a branch of dog-wood or some light-colored flower across it1 and have as pretty a little mirror as anyone could wish for4 ,illustration3 ,home-made ,mirror-frame4 ,the next thing to commence will be ,the ,table1 which you can make yourselves by following these directions3 ,the three cheese-box lids will answer nicely as shelves for a work- or bric--brac table1 and the broomsticks1 which are all the same length1 will do for the legs4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbg4--,narrow ,grooves ,cut around ,broomstick for ,table-leg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbh4--;,holes ,bored in a ,box-lid ,used as a ,table-shelf4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cbi4--,manner of ,fastening a ,shelf to ,table-leg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccj4--,table-shelf and ,leg ,fastened securely together by ,wire4 ,illustration3 ,bric--brac ,table4 ,upon each broomstick mark the distances for placing the shelves1 allowing six inches from each end of the stick for the top and bottom1 and the exact centre between these points for the middle shelf4 ,with a pocket-knife cut narrow grooves around each stick1 one-half inch on either side of the points marked on them 7,fig4 #cbg74 ,this will make six grooves on each stick4 ,now measure the box-lids to find their circumferences1 and divide them into thirds1 marking the distances on the rim to obtain the true position for the legs4 ,at these points bore four holes with a gimlet1 one inch apart1 two above and two below 7,fig4 #cbh74 ,through one of the top holes pass a piece of pliable wire1 place one of the broomsticks against the rim of the lid1 pass the wire back through the other upper hole 7,fig4 #cbi71 fit it into the upper groove of the stick1 and draw it tight4 ,twice the wire must be put through the upper holes and around the stick in the top groove2 then1 bringing it down on the inside of the lid1 you must put it twice through the lower holes and around the stick in the lower groove2 then twist the ends and tuck them under the wire on the inside of the lid 7,fig4 #ccj74 ,in this way each leg will have to be fastened to each shelf4 ,when the table is all put together paint it black1 and1 as soon as it is dry1 tie a bright ribbon on one of the sticks at the top1 and a charming little bric--brac table will be the result of your labor4 ,you can make a very pretty ,lantern of the old tin can2 but first you must have some tools to work with2 not many1 only a piece of wood1 rounded on one side to fit into the can1 a hatchet or heavy hammer1 and a few wrought iron nails4 ,if the piece of wood is not large enough to fit the can1 another stick can be put in to hold the first one firmly against the can4 ,that being arranged1 you must decide upon some kind of a pattern to be made by the holes1 and indicate it on the can with a small paint-brush and paint or ink2 then1 laying the can on its side1 the rounded piece of wood being at the top1 with one of the wrought iron nails puncture the holes where you have indicated the pattern4 ,with the hammer drive the nail through the tin into the wood2 then draw it out1 make another hole1 and so on until all the holes you wish are driven through that part of the can held in place by the rounded piece of wood4 ,this wood1 you see1 keeps the can from bending when the nail is being driven through4 ,in moving the wood as the work progresses1 you must always keep it under that part of the can being punctured4 ,to make the large hole1 you will have to put a number of the small holes close together1 and then drive the nail through the partitions1 cutting them away4 ,the pattern being completed1 puncture three holes1 close to the top of the can1 at equal distances apart4 ,these are for the chains to pass through1 by which to suspend the lantern4 ,in the cover of the baking-powder can make three holes at equal distances2 then divide the chain1 which is about one yard and a quarter long1 into three equal lengths1 separating the pieces by prying open the links4 ,put an end of each piece through the holes made for them at the top of the can1 and fasten them by hooking the open links through the links of the chain a little farther up1 and hammering them together again4 ,now pass the ends of the chains through the holes made in the lid of the baking-powder can1 and1 bringing the ends together1 fasten them by joining the links4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cca4 ,fig4 #ccb4--,stand in ,lantern1 with ,nails for ,holding ,candle4 ,paint the lantern1 chain and all1 black1 and while it is drying make a stand for the candle which is to furnish the light4 ,a square piece of thin board1 just large enough to fit into the can without touching the sides will do for the stand4 ,drive four small nails in the centre to hold the candle 7,fig4 #cca74 ,make handles for lifting the stand in and out of the lantern1 by bending two pieces of wire like ,fig4 #cca1 and fastening them to the board with staple tacks 7,fig4 #ccb74 ,illustration3 ,lantern4 ,when the paint on the lantern is dry1 paste red tissue-paper all around the inside to give a cheerful red glow to the light1 which will shine through it4 ,if you would like it to resemble a jewelled lantern1 paste different colored papers over the large holes and leave the small ones open4 ,an ,s hook passed through the loop made by the three chains will serve to connect them to the chain which should suspend the lantern from the ceiling4 ,a ,music-,roll can be made of the pasteboard roll4 ,cut a round piece of pasteboard just the size to fit into one end of the roll2 then cut out another round piece1 this time of paper1 one inch larger than that made of pasteboard4 ,clip the edges 7,fig4 #ccc7 and paste it over the end of the roll which is filled in with the round of pasteboard 7,fig4 #ccd74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccc4--,paper ,covering for ,end of ,music-roll4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccd4--,paper ,pasted over ,end of ,music-roll4 ,among the scraps of silk and ribbons you will1 perhaps1 find a good-sized piece of dark-green or brown silk2 use this for the case1 which must cover the roll neatly4 ,to make the case fit the end of the roll you have just filled up1 mark on a piece of the silk a circle the size of that end of the roll4 ,this can be done by standing the roll on the silk1 and running a pencil around the edge4 ,when cutting out the silk leave a margin of a quarter of an inch on the outside of the pencil-mark for the seam4 ,cut the silk for covering the roll three inches longer than the roll1 and wide enough to allow for a quarter of an inch seam4 ,sew up the long seam1 and then sew the round of silk into the end of the case4 ,hem the other end of the case1 and run in a narrow ribbon about an inch from the edge4 ,this is for a draw-string4 ,illustration3 ,music-roll4 ,when the roll is fitted snugly in its case1 tie a ribbon1 matching it in color1 around the roll1 making a loop to form the handle4 ,fasten the ribbon by taking a few stitches under the bows1 catching them on to the silk4 ,the old straw hat can be transformed into a dainty ,work-,basket4 ,it is stiff and harsh at present1 but pour boiling water over it and the straw will become soft and pliable1 and can be bent into any shape you like4 ,when dry1 it will be again stiff1 and will retain the form you have given it4 ,after scalding the hat bend the brim in toward the centre1 in four different places1 at equal distances apart4 ,this will make a fluted basket4 ,you must tie it in shape 7,fig4 #cce7 and leave until perfectly dry2 then bronze the basket1 line it with silesia1 and sew silk or satin around the top to form a bag4 ,run a draw-string of narrow ribbon near the top of the bag1 and the pretty little work-basket is finished4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cce4--,straw ,hat ,tied in ,shape for a ,work-basket4 ,illustration3 ,work-basket4 ,the croquet ball you can make into a ,key and ,button-,hook ,rack4 ,first you must gild it1 and then around the middle of the ball1 at regular intervals1 insert small brass hooks4 ,a yellow ribbon and bow1 tacked on the top with small tacks1 will serve to suspend it by1 and completes the rack4 ,with the gilt left from gilding the ball1 and a piece of bright ribbon you can make a ,paper-,weight of six of the large nails4 ,gild each nail separately1 let them dry1 and then tie them securely together with a piece of ribbon4 ,illustration3 ,key ,rack4 ,illustration3 ,paper-weight4 ,all the articles brought from the attic have now been turned to some use1 but there are many other things to be found there which we have not space to mention1 and which with little trouble can be so transformed that no one would ever suppose they were taken originally from a heap of rubbish4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxxvii4 ,,how ,,to ,,make ,,attractive ,,booths ,,at ,a ,,fair--,a ,,new ,,kind ,,of ,,grab-,,bag4 ,,deciding to have our fair unlike those which have preceded it1 we must do away with monotony and introduce not only variety1 but originality as well4 ,new ideas1 something different from that which has served us heretofore1 is what we strive for4 ,novelties are always attractive1 let them be decorative also1 and help to make the room or hall as inviting as possible4 ,illustration3 ,the ,fair4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccf4--;,framework for the ,canopy of a ,booth at a ,fair4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ccg4--;,block of ,wood ,fastened on the side of ,table4 ,the ,tables being the most important item1 we will give them our first attention4 ,have each table or booth canopied in a style differing from all others1 and make the canopy extend up as high as practicable1 in order to avoid the flat1 blank appearance so common in small fairs4 ,if tables are arranged in this fashion1 they will go far toward decorating the hall4 ,fig4 #ccf shows one style in which a framework for the roof or covering may be constructed4 ,at the four corners of the table1 where the top projects over the sides1 fit in blocks of wood according to ,fig4 #ccg2 the dotted lines represent the block4 ,nail the wood fast to the table1 so that the uprights may stand perfectly straight4 ,use laths or similar sticks for the four uprights1 and screw or nail them at the corners of the table according to ,fig4 #ccf2 then with small screws fasten a stick across the top of the laths at each side1 and at the top of the sticks on the front of the table tie the two ends of a barrel-hoop to form the arch2 also attach another hoop at the back to the other two uprights1 and connect the top centre of each by a wire running across4 ,the hoops are fastened to the laths by binding the ends of the hoops to the ends of the laths with strong twine1 or wire1 wound around in notches which have previously been cut in the ends of both sticks and hoops4 ,should the barrel-hoops be too short for the arch1 take children's large-sized toy wooden hoops1 and fasten them up in the same manner4 ,fig4 #cch is another way to arrange the framework4 ,the four upright sticks are attached to the table as described in ,fig4 #ccf2 then in the top of each is driven a very large-sized tack1 and a strong flexible wire is stretched from lath to lath and wound around each tack1 thus connecting the four uprights together4,g ,flags1 shawls1 drapery curtains1 sheets1 and inexpensive cheese-cloth make good canopies2 undressed cambric and canton flannel in desirable colors drape nicely1 and can also be used for the purpose4 ,where you wish to produce light1 airy effects1 tarlatan1 in one or more colors1 will be found useful2 again1 let some of the tables have only a suggestion of a roof1 made by ornamenting the framework with flowers1 or whatever is most suitable1 according to the style of table and the place it is to occupy4 ,try and have a variety of shapes and sizes in the booths1 and avoid sombre dulness and monotony4 ,let the room fairly sparkle and shine with light and color4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cch4--;,construction of ,framework for the ,canopy of a ,table at a ,fair4 ,to make a tent-like covering1 firmly bind a large-sized ,japanese umbrella to a pole1 and fasten the pole in the centre of the table4 ,to hold it securely1 make a bench of two pieces of board1 with a hole through the centre of each1 and join them together by a block of wood nailed in each end 7,fig4 #cci74 ,the bench can be made fast to the table by screws put through from the under side of the top of the table ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cci4--;,bench for ,holding a ,pole as a ,support for a ,canopy of a ,booth4 ,in erecting the canopy place the end of the pole in the bench and it will be steady and firm4 ,attach pieces of string to several ribs on each side of the umbrella1 stretch the strings down and fasten the ends securely to the table2 paste over the strings bright-colored tissue-paper fringe 7,fig4 #cdj74 ,cut the paper four or six thicknesses1 and when pasted on turn the fringe part uppermost1 so it will look fluffy and not hang down in a tame1 fringe fashion4 ,when a red umbrella is used1 and the strings are covered with fringe of the same hue1 it looks very pretty4 ,be extremely careful that no light comes dangerously near the tissue-paper1 or any other inflammable material2 all the decorations must be arranged with a view to perfect safety from contact with gas1 lamp1 or candle4 ,in decorating the room remember to mass your color so the effect may be broad4 ,if the colors are too much mingled the effect will be weakened1 and in some cases lost entirely4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdj4--,tissue-paper ,fringe4 ,paper-flowers and plants in great abundance will be needed1 and if you can persuade all your friends1 as well as those actively interested in the fair1 to make paper-flowers or plants1 they will prove very acceptable1 and after the fair is over the floral decorations can be safely stored away to do service again on like occasion4 ,large1 showy flowers1 like peonies1 dog-wood1 and magnolias1 as well as large-leaved plants1 are best to use1 though the smaller ones look well in a few places4 ,in making ,flowers for ,decorations we aim at general effect1 with less regard to detail than if the blossoms were to be used in other ways4 ,fig4 #cda is a pattern of the dog-wood4 ,cut the flowers of white writing paper and make them quite large4 ,use wire to fasten them to a natural branch1 and imitate nature as nearly as possible in the arrangement of the blossoms4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cda4--;,dog-wood4 ,if you fold the paper a number of times and then place your pattern over it1 you can cut out six or eight flowers at once1 and save both time and labor4 ,peonies are made of white1 pink1 or red tissue-paper1 cut in squares of about eight inches each and pinked on the two opposite edges4 ,twelve squares are needed for one flower4 ,with your fingers gather the squares up in the centre 7,fig4 #cdb72 then fold over the pieces1 as in ,fig4 #cdc2 when all are ready string them on a wire and shape the bunch to resemble a peony2 twist the wire up tight and fasten the petals together1 leaving a length of wire for a stem4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdb4--,peony ,petal ,gathered through the ,centre4 ,make the cherry-blossoms 7,fig4 #cdd7 in clusters of five or seven each1 and attach green leaves 7,fig4 #cde7 cut in different sizes4 ,fig4 #cdf shows the method of giving the leaf a pretty1 crimped appearance4 ,by holding the point of the leaf firmly under the head of the pin with your left hand1 and with the right hand pushing the leaf up toward the head of the pin1 you can crimp the leaves very rapidly1 and they look much more natural than when left plain4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdc4--,peony ,petal ,folded over4 ,all the materials necessary for the manufacture of flowers for fair decorations will be paper1 wire1 and paste4 ,the buds of different flowers can be imitated by pinching together the petals of open blossoms4 ,figs4 #cdg1 #cdh1 #cdi are the petals of the magnolia2 the inside petals are five and one-half inches long1 the others in proportion4 ,cut three of each size4 ,no4 #cdg forms the innermost petals1 ,no4 #cdh the next1 and ,no4 #cdi the outermost2 these last should be double2 make the outside of pink tissue-paper and the inside white1 all the other petals are white2 cut three1 from ,fig4 #cej1 of green paper to form the calyx4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdd4--;,cherry ,blossom4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cde4--;,green ,leaf of ,cherry ,tree4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdf4--,method of ,crimping ,leaf4 ,other ornamental flowers may be manufactured from these hints4 ,patterns can be cut from any natural flowers1 and they may be made without the aid of further directions4 ,when natural blossoms can be obtained1 they are far preferable1 though the paper plants make splendid substitutes and at a little distance cannot be distinguished from the natural ones4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdg4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdh4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cdi4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cej4 ,if the fair comes off in the season when the trees are leafless1 bare branches with green paper leaves wired on will help very much where foliage is needed4 ,an excellent scheme in the arrangement of a fair is to divide the tables into twelve separate booths and let each one represent one month in the year4 ,they should contain articles appropriate only to the month represented1 and when planned in this way each month should be of appropriate color4 ,for example3 ,december can be all white1 with tufts of cotton scattered about for snow1 and mica or isinglass sprinkled around and over places to represent frost and ice4 ,icicles1 varying in size1 depending from the arch or canopy1 add to the effect4 ,the icicles are made of strips of paper first rolled up like paper-lighters1 then completely covered with tallow from the dripping of a lighted candle2 the tallow being allowed to harden on in raised places makes the twisted paper resemble in form a real icicle2 the tallow icicle is next covered with a wash of mucilage1 and powdered mica or isinglass is sprinkled all over it1 so that it sparkles and shines4 ,in place of the usual grab-bag at this booth1 there should be a ,christmas-tree without lights and burdened with little gifts tied up in colored tissue-paper4 ,santa ,claus must have charge of the tree4 ,july calls for flags and decorations of red1 white1 and blue1 as well as flowers1 fruits1 and green foliage2 the table should be presided over by ,columbia4 ,may4 ,deck this table in spring blossoms and make the canopy of a slender ,may-pole4 ,pass the pole through the holes in the bench 7,fig4 #cci7 and screw the bench tight on the centre of the table2 fasten a wreath of flowers and the ends of a number of ribbons at the top of the pole2 bring the ribbons down and tack them to the sides of the table4 ,give the ,queen of ,may care of the booth4 ,november may be gay with late fall leaves and berries1 and a very large pumpkin1 which has been previously scraped out and lined with paper1 can serve as a receptacle for odds and ends4 ,a little ,puritan maid should be in charge of the booth4 ,june is all rose color1 with the queen of flowers1 the rose1 holding the post of honor4 ,this month is very suitable for the flower-table1 and ,flora1 the ,goddess of ,flowers1 may preside over it4 ,we have chosen these few months only as suggestions of the manner in which the idea can be carried out4 ,those in charge of the different booths might wear as a badge a conspicuous sign of the zodiac appropriate to the month represented4 ,the ,five ,senses can be illustrated by five booths1 each one bearing its proper symbol as a sign4 ,to represent ,,hearing1 make a large pasteboard ear-trumpet and cover it with silver paper2 fasten this on the highest point of the booth and place the word ,hearing in large letters under the trumpet2 have these signs in plain sight1 where none can fail to see and read4 ,the articles on the table should consist of everything pertaining to the sense of hearing1 such as sheet-music1 musical instruments1 telephones1 and suitable toys4 ,it would be a great addition if a phonograph could be rented or borrowed for the occasion1 and a certain sum charged to each one speaking in the instrument and hearing the echo of his own words and tones ground out to him again4 ,an oracle would be a capital thing at this table1 each person consulting it paying so much a question4 ,,seeing likewise must be labelled with a sign in the shape of a very large pair of spectacles cut out of stiff pasteboard and placed over the lettering4 ,the goods offered here for sale should pertain to the sense of sight2 and could be such articles as pictures1 decorated candles1 kaleidoscopes1 and common blue glasses4 ,all things pleasing to look upon may find place at the ,seeing ,table4 ,any kind of a peep-show can be used1 five cents being required from every curious person wishing for a peep behind the curtain4 ,,feeling is more difficult to portray4 ,perhaps an ordinary riding-whip will answer the purpose1 with the word ,feeling in large type under it4 ,sofa-cushions1 quilts1 mittens1 canes1 muffs1 fancy toilet articles1 and almost anything adding to our personal comfort1 or pleasant to handle1 are suitable for the ,feeling booth4 ,,tasting4 ,as an emblem for this booth make a huge cornucopia for candy1 with the sign 8,tasting0 beneath1 and the booth can be the candy-table4 ,,smelling naturally suggests perfumes and sweet-scented flowers4 ,this sense will most fitly be represented by an immense bouquet fastened up over the table4 ,the booth1 of course1 must be the flower-table4 ,if you have only a few tables1 make four booths of them1 and let each booth represent a season4 ,they should be decorated in keeping with the time represented1 and the idea fully carried out in all the details4 ,when the booths stand for different nations there is a great field for variety and beautiful decoration4 ,but in this1 as in all cases where an attempt is made to carry out an idea1 it must be faithfully adhered to1 or the effect will not be that intended4 ,when it is necessary to decorate the ,walls use flags1 bright1 soft draping cloth1 and large palm leaves2 also branches of leaves1 showy flowers1 and anything that can be arranged to look well4 ,as rooms differ so much in size and style1 it is impossible to give any but general directions1 leaving it to the taste of the decorator to carry out the details4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cea4--;,grab-bag of a ,sheet with ,holes ,cut for ,face and ,arms4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ceb4--;,apron ,skirt ,sewed on ,sheet4 ,grab-,bags4 ,on a narrow sheet hung up in a door-way1 and fastened securely at the sides1 or attached to a frame1 cut a hole large enough to allow of a false face being fitted in 7,fig4 #cea ,a74 ,the flaps of the cloth are left for pasting inside the face2 now cut two more holes for the arms to pass through 7,fig4 #cea ,b74 ,in these holes sew sleeves of the same material as the skirt1 which is made of bright-colored cambric in the form of an apron1 and sewed on the sheet 7,fig4 #ceb74 ,the sides of the skirt are basted down on the sheet4 ,when pasting in the false face1 first cover the flaps1 left at the opening for the face with stiff paste2 then paste these flaps down into the inside of the false face1 which will bring it up close against the sheet4 ,if small openings are left1 or the sheet puckers a little after the face is fastened on1 never mind1 as all defects can be covered by sewing on a thin white frill all around the face1 to form a cap1 and making a collar of the same material 7,fig4 #cec74 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cec4--;,grab-bag4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ced4--;,inside of ,sheet for ,grab-bag4 ,leave an opening1 or pocket-hole1 through the sheet at one side of the dress1 so that the hand can be slipped through to get the packages1 which are placed within reach at the back of the curtain4 ,fig4 #ced shows the inside of the sheet1 and ,c the opening for the hand4 ,someone must stand or be seated behind this curtain1 and slip her arms into the sleeves1 then she can look out through the mask and see with whom she is talking4 ,in one hand she may hold a package1 while she receives the money with the other4 ,on the sheet print these words3 8,five cents for what is in my pocket40 ,the ,lady of the ,lake4 ,you will need a tin bath-tub for the lake1 the longest one you can find1 and a toy boat which will not easily tip or turn over4 ,place tiny flags in the bow and stern1 and in one end of the boat glue a doll dressed like the 8,lady of the ,lake0 in ,scott's poem4 ,attach a pulley to each end of the tub1 and fasten the string to the boat1 as it must be run back and forth by means of the pulleys4 ,fill the tub nearly full of water1 then cover the edges with moss and vines4 ,the bath-tub must be completely disguised1 and surrounded by plants and foliage1 with an opening left at one end for purchasers1 and another small one near the other end for the boat to pass through to those stationed behind the shrubbery1 who have charge of the boat1 and where the parcels are kept4 ,at the store-room end the screen of vines or leaves should be so arranged that those in charge can see all that is going on outside without being seen themselves4 ,the boat should be stationed at the farther end of the lake1 and whoever wishes to make a purchase must give the doll five cents2 then the boat may immediately leave1 sail across the lake1 and disappear behind the screen1 only to emerge again laden with a parcel in place of the money1 and lightly skimming over the water arrive at her destination1 when the purchaser can relieve the 8,lady of the ,lake0 of her package4 ,the ,bubble ,range described on page #cce can be used in a fair with advantage4 ,unless the fair is very small1 it is better to have two ,bubble ,ranges1 to prevent the tiresome waiting for a turn1 and give all who wish to try their skill the opportunity to enjoy the sport4 ,fortune's ,wheel4 ,cut of stiff pasteboard a large circle 7,fig4 #cee7 with a point on the edge at the end of one of the spokes1 for the circle must be painted to resemble a wheel4 ,with a large round nail fasten the wheel through the centre to a board1 which has previously had numbers painted on in a circle somewhat larger than the circumference of the wheel 7,fig4 #cef72 the wheel should turn around easily on the nail4 ,hang the board up flat against the wall4 ,the gypsy in charge of the ,fortune's ,wheel should be stationed by its side1 holding a basket filled with many envelopes numbered to correspond to the figures on the board1 each envelope containing some appropriate fortune-telling lines2 and when the people come to seek their fortunes the gypsy must allow each in turn to give the wheel a twirl1 sending it around rapidly1 and then hand to the fortune-seeker an envelope whose number corresponds with the figure at which the wheel pointed when it stopped turning4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cee4--;,circle for ,fortune's ,wheel4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cef4--;,fortune's ,wheel4 ,rag-,balls4 ,prepare a number of carpet-rag balls with a small gift in the centre of each one4 ,these sell rapidly1 and it is very amusing to see the buyers unwinding their balls to discover the contents1 which may prove to be a thimble1 a bundle of jackstraws1 a grotesque ,japanese toy1 or any little comical conceit which can be hidden in the odd receptacle4 ,the same idea might be applied to the always pleasing popcorn balls2 then the knick-knacks must be first wrapped in soft paper to protect them from the candy used in making the balls4 ,pleasant mysteries and surprises are always popular at fairs1 and the more that can be invented the better4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,window ,decorated with ,imitation ,stained ,glass and ,dutch ,curtain4 ,,footnote3 ,g ,if the uprights seem to need it1 brace them with cross-sticks in place of wire4 ,,chapter ,,xxxviii4 ,,window ,,decoration4 ,,now1 girls1 we must have practicable ideas in regard to our decorations2 they should consist of something which we know will be easy to make and at the same time look well2 the materials employed must be within possible reach of all1 and nothing expensive or difficult to obtain allowed to enter into their manufacture4 ,what are commonly called ,dutch curtains are very popular2 they are short curtains of some thin1 transparent fabric1 fastened with rings to a slender rod of bamboo1 and when drawn1 cover the lower part of the window without intercepting the light4 ,the curtains are very useful1 but1 while they do not obstruct the light1 they do obstruct the vision4 ,we all know that the front window is just the place to sit when sewing or doing fancy-work1 and although few ladies care to be seen by every passer-by1 yet they all like to see what is going on outside1 and while their deft fingers ply the needle their bright eyes take in the landscape out of doors and derive amusement and entertainment from the birds and flowers1 if it be in the country1 or the ever-moving throng1 if in the city4 ,an ornamental screen1 therefore1 that will shield one and yet not interfere with the view is desirable4 ,what might be termed the ,oriental ,window-,shade not only comes up to the above requirements1 but is inexpensive1 and not difficult to construct4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ceg4--,manner of ,making ,fringe for ,oriental ,window-shade4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #ceh4--;,fringe of ,macaroni and ,beads4 ,make a small lawn-tennis net1 long enough to reach across the width of the window and about eight inches deep2 make loops of the rope on the ends for hanging the screen to knobs or hooks screwed in the framework of the window2 spread the net out and fasten it up on a door1 between two chairs1 or any convenient place2 then cut a number of pieces of fine twine1 about four feet long1 and attach them1 a quarter of an inch apart1 along the bottom rope 7,fig4 #ceg72 ,a shows a loosened loop and ,b the tightened ones4 ,the ends of the twine hang free4 ,on each double strand string glass beads and slender pieces of bamboo1 reeds1 painted clay pipe-stems1 or macaroni broken in pieces of equal length and used in their natural color1 or painted with oil-paints to any desired tint4 ,have the reeds four inches long1 and thread them on alternately with the beads 7,fig4 #ceh72 or you can form a design by cutting the reeds into different lengths2 at the end of each strand fasten a large bead or glass button4 ,a very simple ,ribbon-,curtain is of red1 blue1 yellow1 and black ribbons all cut the same length and sewed1 a quarter of an inch apart1 on a narrow strip of black cloth long enough to reach across the window4 ,the strip may be used as a band1 or attached to a slender pole by means of small brass rings4 ,the ribbons should be silk1 and thin enough to admit of the light shining through2 they hang down fringe-like1 with three glass beads fastened on the end of each ribbon 7,fig4 #cei or ,fig4 #cfj74 ,if you prefer to have the shade all one color make it yellow1 which gives a pleasant1 mellow light4 ,any pattern you choose can be made by taking short pieces of ribbon and joining them together with glass beads4 ,in this way bits of ribbon could be utilized1 but those used must be semi-transparent1 showing the color when held up to the light4 ,even smooth pieces of silk with their edges neatly hemmed might do service1 only be very careful to join either ribbon or silk with the beads in such a manner as to prevent its twisting2 the beads must be heavy enough to keep the fringe straight4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cei4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfj4--;,beads on the ,ends of ,ribbons4 ,nearly all homes have their bags of silk and worsted pieces1 and from these can be made a handsome ,drapery of ,very ,small ,scraps4 ,cut the pieces of silk or worsted into squares about an inch each way1 using any and all colors2 then take a piece of twine of the length you desire your curtain1 and with a large needle string the bright bits on the twine until the whole string is completely and closely covered2 next fasten the twine well to prevent its slipping1 and with a large pair of scissors trim off the rough edges of the silken strand until the surface is rounded and even2 on one end attach a small brass curtain-ring1 and on the other a heavy bead or button2 make as many strands as you will need to hang across the window and fasten them to a pole in which small hooks have been screwed4 ,this drapery resembles chenille2 it is rich in color1 will wear well1 and is best adapted for full-length curtains4 ,as a substitute for stained glass we give directions for ,painting ,window-,panes4 ,these are very pretty and satisfactory4 ,if good designs are chosen the window will surpass in beauty your expectations4 ,the materials necessary are3 some of ,winsor ,newton's transparent colors1 such as rose-madder1 ,prussian blue1 raw and burnt umber1 burnt sienna1 ultramarine1 gamboge1 ivory-black1 viridian green1 and orient yellow4 ,any transparent color can be used4 ,for purple1 mix rose-madder with ,prussian blue4 ,prepare the paints to be used by mixing each color separately with a little oil and siccatif ,courtray4 ,almost any brush will do to paint with1 but one of medium size made for oil-colors is the best1 and another smaller one is necessary for the outlining1 which takes the place of leading in stained glass4 ,the dabber is a ball of raw cotton tied in a piece of fine cotton-cloth1 and the manner of tinting or grounding is exactly the same as in china-painting2 lac-varnish will be needed as a wash after the painting has dried4 ,when you have an opportunity1 carefully examine real stained-glass windows1 and you will see that each window is one complete design4 ,the corners and borders are usually in rich1 dark colors1 while the central portion is of lighter tints or clear glass4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfa4--;,border ,pattern4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfb4--;,cracked ,glass4 ,always make your corners and borders first1 and if you desire a centre-piece1 it should be placed in position next1 and the space between it and the border filled in afterward4 ,a ,gothic window may be imitated by painting the corners black1 thus making it arched at the top4 ,very often good patterns can be found in the many art and fashion papers4 ,one copy may serve for an entire border1 if it be pasted at the four corners to one pane of glass1 and1 when that is outlined1 removed and gummed to the next1 and so on until the border is finished4 ,fig4 #cfa is intended as a border4 ,fig4 #cfb is a very simple pattern of cracked glass1 which you can readily make without any copy4 ,place a ruler across the woodwork of the window-pane1 first one way1 then another1 and with its aid paint your straight lines1 being careful not to have any two run parallel4 ,a conventional design is always to be preferred4 ,should any mistakes occur during the progress of the work1 remove the paint with a cloth dampened with turpentine and try again4 ,the painting is not difficult1 and the only delays are in waiting for the colors to dry4 ,first decide on your design1 then trace it1 making the outlines heavy and black2 gum the pattern by the four corners to the outside of the window-pane1 which it is essential to have perfectly clean and dry2 close the window1 and with a small brush dipped in black paint follow the outlines of your copy1 keeping the lines of equal thickness throughout2 when this is finished remove the pattern4 ,in the same manner go over all the outlines you wish to make on the window1 then leave the color to harden and dry1 which will probably require hours4 ,begin again by laying on flat washes of paint to match the prevailing colors of the copy1 and use the dabber in tinting each color as it is applied1 so the surface may be even and uniform4 ,while the decoration is drying it is best to protect it from dust by pinning up a newspaper or a large piece of cloth on the window-frame4 ,when dry1 the painting can be touched up if necessary4 ,after the last color has entirely dried apply a wash of white lac-varnish2 when this is dry give the window another coat of lac-varnish and then it will be finished4 ,should your copies be in black and white1 use your own taste in coloring the glass4 ,another method of imitating stained glass is ,painting on ,lawn1 batiste1 or any kind of sheer white muslin4 ,for this you will need the same paints that are used for painting on glass2 these are mixed only with turpentine and the color put on as a stain4 ,cut a piece of new thin white batiste large enough to cover a window-sash1 with a margin left for turning in1 and make an outline on it of the exact size of the sash2 then select your pattern and place the lawn over it1 when the outlines should show through2 trace these carefully with gum-arabic dissolved1 but made very stiff1 and when the entire design has been traced let the gum dry2 then go over it with ivory-black unmixed2 this latter makes the leading2 be careful to keep the lines even and of the same size4 ,when the outlines have dried fill in the spaces with the stains made of paint and turpentine2 the gum prevents the colors from spreading4 ,when the paint has dried you may add a few touches where they are needed1 and the stained-glass design will be ready to place on the window4 ,use stiff mucilage or tiny tacks to keep it in place1 having first turned in the margin left for the purpose4 ,an attractive window can be made with the upper sash of imitation stained glass1 while the lower one is screened by a ,dutch curtain1 as in the illustration4 ,for the benefit of those who prefer sewing to painting we now tell how to ,imitate ,stained ,glass with a piece of stiff white rice-net1 such as is commonly used for bonnet-frames1 and some pieces of thin batiste1 or lawns1 of the requisite colors4 ,cut the rice-net the proper size and lay it over your design2 then carefully trace off the pattern2 when all the outlines are finished cut the different-colored lawns of the shape and size to correspond to the different portions of the design2 baste these on in the places they must occupy2 then sew them on with the ,automatic ,sewing-machine1 following with coarse black thread the outlines on the wrong side of the foundation1 so that the chain-stitch will appear on the right side to form the leading2 or the stitching may be made by hand1 or a very narrow black braid can be used as leading4 ,when all the batiste is sewed on1 cut out the net back of the design to allow the light to shine through4 ,we have seen such an imitation of stained glass1 and when placed up against the window it was very good2 but care must be taken to have the colored lawns thin and of the right shades2 if too heavy they obstruct the light and the colors do not look bright4 ,for full-length window-drapery of inexpensive material there may be had at any of the leading dry-goods stores beautiful soft fabrics1 in yellows and different colors1 the designs of which equal those of much higher-priced goods4 ,these draperies hang in graceful folds and come as low as ten cents a yard2 some of them are also well adapted for the useful ,dutch curtains4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfc4--;,imitation of ,ground ,glass4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfd4--;,folded ,paper with ,diamond ,pattern for ,imitation of ,ground ,glass4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfe4--,paper ,marked with ,design for ,imitation of ,ground ,glass4 ,windows of ,imitation ,ground ,glass can be made of white tissue-paper1 cut in simple patterns and fastened on the inside of the glass with white lac-varnish4 ,the window must be perfectly clean and dry4 ,if possible have the pieces of tissue-paper exactly the same size as the window-panes1 fold and refold the paper lengthwise until it is an inch or so in width2 then cut from stiff cardboard your pattern4 ,if it be a diamond1 as in ,fig4 #cfc1 have it exact1 and cut it in halves2 use one-half as a pattern1 place this on the edge of the paper1 as in ,fig4 #cfd1 and with a lead pencil draw a line around it2 remove the pattern and place it lower down about a quarter of an inch from the first tracing1 and again mark around the edge4 ,continue in the same way until you have the pattern marked on the entire length of the tissue-paper4 ,make the same pattern on the other edge of the paper 7,fig #cfe74 ,cut out the pattern1 then unfold the paper and smooth it free of wrinkles2 give the window-pane a thin coating of white lac-varnish1 and apply the paper1 being very careful to have it perfectly smooth when on the glass4 ,sometimes it is necessary to join two or more pieces of paper1 but if you are careful to make the edges come exactly together1 the joins will not be noticeable4 ,lac-varnish dries very quickly1 and it takes only a short time to decorate a window in this manner4 ,when all the panes of glass are covered with tissue-paper1 finish by varnishing each one with the white lac-varnish2 at a little distance it is difficult to distinguish a window so covered from one really formed of ground glass4 ,for bath-rooms1 or where the window is rather out of the way and the outlook not agreeable1 the imitation of ground glass is suitable and useful4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xxxix4 ,,furniture ,,old ,,and ,,new4 ,,only the other day we were appealed to by a friend for suggestions on how to furnish a room prettily1 and at the same time inexpensively1 and we know that there are many girls like this friend who1 loving to surround themselves with beauty and comfort1 have not the means of doing so in the ordinary way2 but must depend largely upon their own skill and ingenuity for the gratification of this taste4 ,after all1 there is more real pleasure in planning and contriving the furnishing of one's room1 even with only a small sum for outlays1 than there is in ordering a set from the furnishers which is exactly like a hundred others4 ,in the former case we make our room expressive of our individuality2 in the latter we walk in the beaten track of those who have little or no individuality to express4 ,so much for the sentiment of the idea4 ,now let us turn to the practical side1 and find the best way of carrying it out1 and putting our theories into practice4 ,in mentioning old furniture in the heading of this chapter1 we do not allude to the antiques in such high favor just now2 they are unique and handsome enough in themselves1 requiring no contriving to beautify them2 but there are few families who do not possess furniture that is out of date1 old-fashioned without being antique2 furniture that time and hard usage has reduced to a state of shabbiness anything but beautiful1 yet not worth sending to the cabinet-makers to be furbished up4 ,it is the renovation of such furniture that will help much toward making a room pretty and attractive4 ,we need not attempt to restore the furniture to its original state1 that would be impracticable4 ,but we can work wonders in transforming it2 in turning a homely article into one that will be an adornment instead of a blemish4 ,bookcase4 ,take1 for instance1 an old bureau belonging to a cottage set4 ,the mirror1 perhaps1 is broken1 or if it is not it can be used to better advantage elsewhere4 ,removing that1 there is left merely a chest of drawers1 which we will proceed to convert into a bookcase by the addition of shelves placed on top4 ,if you have a brother who is handy with his tools the matter is simple enough2 without him a carpenter may have to be employed to make the shelves1 or1 by taking the plan and measurements to a carpenter-shop the materials can be obtained ready for use1 and all you will have to do will be to put them together4 ,although there is a saying that 8a girl can never drive a nail straight10 we have reason to believe the contrary1 and feel sure that a little practice will enable most girls to do many bits of light carpentry work as well as the boys4 ,three feet is the height of a bureau belonging to an ordinary set of cottage furniture1 so we will take that as our standard for measurement1 and make our shelves according to it4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cff4--;,diagram of ,book-shelves4 ,fig4 #cff is the diagram for the frame of the shelves4 ,the side pieces are made of boards three feet four inches long and nine inches wide2 the top of each of these boards is sawed into a point as shown in diagram4 ,four cleats made of sticks eight inches long and one inch thick are nailed to the side of each board1 the distance between being nine inches4 ,the frame at the back is composed of two boards five and one half feet long and seven inches wide1 and two1 three feet three inches long 7the width of the bureau7 and seven inches wide4 ,one of these short boards is nailed across the top ends of the long boards1 and the other twenty-four inches below4 ,the side pieces are nailed to the back as shown in diagram1 the nails being driven through the back board into the edge of the side piece4 ,when the frame is made it is placed on the bureau1 the sides resting on the top and the long back boards reaching down behind where they are nailed or screwed to the bureau4 ,the shelves are thirty-seven inches long and nine inches wide4 ,they rest on the cleats and are not nailed to the frame4 ,screws may in some places1 answer better than nails4 ,when the shelves have been adjusted1 the whole is painted a dark olive green4 ,if the knobs are removed from the drawers before the bureau is painted1 and brass handles substituted afterward1 it will add materially to its appearance4 ,the bookcase shown in our illustration is finished off with curtains1 which hang by brass rings from a slender bamboo pole4 ,the pole is slipped through brass hooks screwed into the side pieces near the top4 ,curtains of canton-flannel1 or any soft material1 are suitable for this bookcase4 ,the colors may be a combination of olive green with old blue1 yellow1 cherry1 copper color1 dark red1 or light brown4 ,the ,chair in the same illustration is an ordinary rocking-chair painted olive green1 with cushions at the back and in the seat stuffed with excelsior1 covered with bright cretonne1 and tied to the chair with ribbons4 ,illustration3 ,bureau ,transformed into a ,bookcase4 ,chairs of this kind look well painted almost any color2 one of yellow1 with yellow cushions and ribbons1 is exceedingly pretty4 ,if the chair to be remodelled is bottomless1 reseat it in this way3 ,cut some strips of strong cotton cloth about one inch wide and sew them together1 lapping one piece over another1 as in ,fig4 #cfg2 fasten an end on to the edge of the chair with a tack1 and then pass the cloth back and forth across1 each time putting it under and bringing it over the edge of the chair4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfg4 ,when the seat is filled up with the strips going one way1 cut the cloth and tack the end to the chair2 then1 commencing at the side1 cross these strips1 passing the cloth in and out as if darning4 ,fig4 #cfh shows just how it is done4 ,be sure to draw the strip as tightly as you can every time it crosses the chair1 for if too loose it will sag as soon as the chair is used4 ,the edge of the chair may be covered with the cretonne1 or a ruffle which is sewed around the cushion4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfh4--;,how to ,reseat a ,chair4 ,fig4 #cfi is an old settee fitted up with cushions1 and a sociable1 comfortable seat it is4 ,it offers plenty of room for two1 and ensconced thereon the girls may rock and talk to their hearts' content4 ,these settees are not often seen in the city1 but are to be found in many a farm-house and country town4 ,the one from which our sketch is taken is painted black1 but1 like the chair1 it would look well any color4 ,fresh1 dainty prettiness should be the principal feature of a young girl's room1 and this can be obtained at very little expense1 much less than most persons suppose4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cfi4--;,come and ,sit ,here4 ,fig4 #cgj shows what can be done with the commonest kind of furniture4 ,this can be bought at the manufacturer's unpainted1 and may be left its natural color and simply varnished1 or1 following the present fashion1 it can be painted white1 and decorated with slender bands or circles of gold4 ,as in the illustration1 ,the ,bedstead should have drapery suspended over it4 ,this gives a soft1 pretty effect1 and takes away its stiffness4 ,dotted swiss or thin cottage drapery answers the purpose nicely4 ,ten yards of material cut in two breadths of five yards each are required for these curtains4 ,the breadths must be sewed together lengthwise and then passed through a small wooden hoop which has been gilded or painted white4 ,when the hoop is directly in the middle of the breadths1 the material must be brought together close to the hoop and two of the edges sewed or basted together4 ,this seam is to go at the back and keep the curtain from parting and hanging in two strips4 ,a ruffle of the same material1 or lace1 sewed on the edge and across the ends of the drapery gives it a soft1 lacy effect4 ,the ribbons which loop the curtains at either side should be of the prevailing colors of the room4 ,if the furniture is white and gold1 they should be yellow4 ,the hoop can hang from a brass chain fastened to a hook in the ceiling4 ,the bureau belonging to this style of furniture is too clumsy for our use1 although without the mirror it will be convenient as a chest of drawers4 ,brass handles in place of knobs will improve it4 ,a ,dressing-table to take its place1 like the one shown in ,fig4 #cgj1 can be made of a small kitchen-table4 ,the mirror suspended over it should have a broad flat frame of white pine1 varnished or painted to match the furniture4 ,almost any cabinet-maker can frame a mirror in this way4 ,bracket candlesticks made of brass1 which are very inexpensive1 should be fastened to the frame on either side of the glass with brass nails or brass-headed tacks4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgj4--,what can be done with ,common ,unpainted ,furniture4 ,with a brass handle on the drawer1 a pretty scarf of linen crash1 ornamented with drawn work or outline1 thrown over the table and hanging down at each end1 and the addition of pin-cushion and toilet articles1 this toilet-table looks very attractive and readily challenges admiration4 ,washstand4 ,a piece of white matting bound at top and bottom1 with yellow cotton cloth for a splasher1 as in ,fig4 #cga1 and a pretty scarf and toilet-set1 presents this most ordinary washstand in a new light4 ,three common kitchen-chairs and one rocker1 when painted white or varnished1 as the case may be1 and cushioned in pretty light-colored cretonne1 completes this novel1 pretty1 and remarkably inexpensive set of furniture4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cga4--,the ,ordinary ,unpainted ,washstand in a ,new ,light4 ,the curtains next to the windows should be of the same material as that used for the bed-drapery1 with the inner one of cretonne like the chair-cushions4 ,white matting is suitable for the floor in summer1 and during the cold weather it can be mostly covered with a pretty ingrain rug or art square1 as it is called4 ,instead of using gilt1 the rings and bands on the furniture may be blue or red1 in which case the trimmings of the room should correspond4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgb4--;,hall ,seat ,made of a ,common ,wooden ,bench4 ,a ,hall ,seat4 ,as another illustration of what can be done with the most ordinary piece of furniture1 we have chosen a common wooden bench1 and by painting it black and giving it a dark-red cushion with tassels at each corner1 have transformed it into quite an elegant hall-seat4 ,fig4 #cgb gives the effect4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgc4--,window ,seat and ,book-shelves ,combined1 ,made of ,boxes4 ,fig4 #cgc shows a ,window ,seat and ,book-shelves ,combined1 made of boxes4 ,eight soap-boxes of the same size are required for the shelves1 and a packing-box about two feet high1 two feet in width1 and as long as the window is wide1 for the seat4 ,remove the tops and two sides of the soap-boxes1 and bore holes with a red-hot poker in one corner of the bottoms of six of the boxes1 and in two of the tops which have been removed1 making the holes one inch from either edge 7,fig4 #cgd74 ,in the other two boxes bore in the same place1 but not entirely through1 making the holes about half an inch deep4 ,place these last two on the floor and pile the others on top of them1 three on each1 nailing the bottom of each box to the top edge of the one beneath it4 ,on the two upper boxes nail the tops in which the holes have been made4 ,have ready two slender bamboo rods about four feet long4 ,insert a rod in the hole in the top of an upper box and let it pass down1 slipping it through the holes in the bottoms of the other boxes and fitting it in the cavity in the lower box4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgd4--;,hole in ,corner of ,box for ,book-shelves4 ,in like manner put the other rod in place through the other pile of boxes4 ,if the packing-box has a cover1 it should be fastened on with hinges1 so that it may be used for a shoe-box as well as a seat2 if it has not1 turn it upside down1 place the soap-boxes at each end and nail them to it4 ,paint the shelves black or the color of the wood-work in the room1 and upholster the seat and the boxes on either side of it with cushions made of strong muslin stuffed with excelsior and covered with cretonne4 ,fasten the edges of the side cushions to the boxes with gimp braid and tacks4 ,make a deep plaiting of the cretonne and tack it across the front of the large box4 ,when there is a lid a narrow plaiting must be tacked across its front edge1 which will1 when the box is closed1 lap over the top of the deeper plaiting4 ,that this combination of window-seat and shelves is both comfortable and convenient1 one may easily imagine1 and that it adds not a little to the furnishing of a room1 we leave to our illustration to show4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xl4 ,,something ,,about ,,mantel-,,pieces ,,and ,,fire-,,places4 ,,the spirit of hospitality and comfort presides over the ruddy blaze of an open fire2 yet1 as we gather cosily around and bask in the delightful warmth and radiance1 its cheerful influence is too often retarded by its very unattractive surroundings4 ,this lovely household spirit should have a more fitting habitation than the one frequently accorded it4 ,the fire-place should at least be pleasant to look upon1 and not depend wholly upon the bright fire to make it inviting4 ,the ordinary marble and marbleized slate or iron mantel-pieces are the reverse of beautiful1 but they may be very much improved at the expense of a small outlay of money1 time1 and trouble4 ,the examples we give here of the treatment of commonplace mantel-pieces are simple1 and can easily be managed by the girls themselves1 with but trifling aid from a carpenter4 ,in a room occupied at one time by a young friend of the writer1 there was an old-fashioned white-pine mantel-piece4 ,it was stiff and plain1 with no attempt at ornamentation1 and the border of white marble1 about five inches wide around the fire-place1 was apparently inserted to protect the wood from the heat of the fire1 and not for beauty4 ,a hint from the writer was sufficient to set this girl's brain and fingers to work4 ,soon the white-marble border was transformed into a row of blue and white tiles1 which were not only pretty and appropriate1 but were also the means of dispelling the impressions of coldness and hardness the marble gave4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cge4--,shelves over ,mantel-,piece4 ,the manner of effecting this transformation was simple enough4 ,first the marble was divided into squares1 the lines being painted black2 then conventional patterns were sketched with a pencil on the squares and painted in blue1 oil-paints being used for the purpose4 ,how the mantel-piece was otherwise reformed1 the writer never saw1 but it might have been greatly improved and altered by the addition of shelves above1 or a suitable lambrequin upon the mantel-shelf4 ,however that may or might have been1 the tiles were a successful bit of work1 and the painting of them within the capabilities of almost anyone4 ,then why should we long in vain for a tiled mantel-piece1 when we have it in our power to gratify the wish8 ,on a plain white-marble mantel a border around the fire-place may be marked out1 and a set of tiles painted1 which will look just as pretty as any that can be bought4 ,if the rest of the marble is painted black or brown1 the tiles will look as though they were set in1 and the contrast will make them more effective4 ,fig4 #cge illustrates our suggestion of putting shelves over the mantel-piece4 ,the braces can be bought at any hardware-store1 and the shelves may be of black-walnut or pine boards1 stained or painted to match the mantel-piece4 ,fig4 #cgf shows the effect of a mantel-shelf covered with enamel-cloth made in imitation of leather4 ,the color of the material used for the one from which our sketch is taken is dark red1 and has a dull1 soft finish like ,russian leather4 ,it is ornamented with small brass curtain-rings sewed on in points or pyramids2 a strip of enamel-cloth is also put behind the shelf1 and at the top edge a piece of narrow gilt moulding is tacked4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgf4--,mantel-,shelf covered with ,enamel-,cloth ornamented with ,brass ,curtain-,rings4 ,a mantel-board of pine1 two inches longer and two inches wider than the shelf1 is always necessary when there is to be a lambrequin1 for upon this the lambrequin is tacked4 ,first1 the board must be neatly covered with the material1 enamel-cloth or whatever is used1 the edges of the cloth being brought over and tacked under the edge of the shelf2 then the strip composing the lambrequin must be turned in at the top edge and tacked across the front and two ends of the board with brass-headed tacks4 ,it looks better if the corners of the board are rounded as shown in illustration4 ,the piece at the back of the shelf should be about eighteen inches deep and must be tacked at top and bottom with small tacks1 the edge at each end being turned in and tacked to the wall with brass-headed tacks4 ,fig4 #cgg is the diagram of enamel-cloth ornamented with brass rings1 and shows a section of the pattern4 ,the bottom row of rings should be sewed on first1 and the edge of the cloth turned up as the rings are fastened on4 ,the stitches which hold the rings catch the hem also4 ,this first row of rings should extend half way below the edge of the cloth1 as shown in ,fig4 #cgg4 ,strong yellow embroidery-silk or saddlers' silk is the best to sew them on with4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgg4--;,enamel-,cloth ornamented with ,brass ,rings4 ,the gilt moulding can be bought by the foot and small headless nails are furnished to tack it with4 ,another mantel is treated in very much the same manner as ,fig4 #cgf1 the difference being that1 instead of enamel-cloth1 the covering for the shelf and the piece at the back are dark-red canton-flannel1 and around the edge of the shelf is tacked a worsted fringe1 about six inches deep1 matching the canton-flannel in color4 ,this has a warm1 comfortable look and is quite appropriate for a bedroom1 while the other should be used only in a library or dining-room4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgh4--,shelves around ,projecting ,chimney4 ,the writer was once invited into a young girl's room which was very attractive in its daintiness4 ,it was not pretty in shape1 and an uncompromising chimney1 in which there was no fire-place1 projected into the room2 but taste had overcome these difficulties1 and the effect produced was decidedly pleasing4 ,pretty wall-paper and the arrangement of the furniture helped very much1 but the greatest triumph was in subduing the awkwardness of that chimney by surrounding it with a set of shelves for holding pretty bits of bric--brac4 ,in case another girl may have the same difficulty to surmount in decorating her room1 we give an outline drawing of the shelves 7,fig4 #cgh7 that she may see and profit thereby4 ,illustration ,,chapter ,,xli4 ,,home-,,made ,,candy4 ,,we have noticed that in none of the books we have seen1 which were written especially for the amusement and entertainment of girls1 has there been any directions or recipes for making candy4 ,knowing by experience that most girls consider candy-making one of their prime winter enjoyments1 we consider the omission to be quite an important one1 and we will in this chapter endeavor to supply the much-wished-for information4 ,though cooking in general may not be regarded with much favor by the average school-girl1 she is always anxious to learn how to make candy1 and hails a new recipe as a boon4 ,the following recipes for peanut-candy1 butter-scotch1 and molasses-candy were obtained from a friend who makes the best home-made candy it has ever been our good-fortune to taste1 and as she recommends them1 we may rely upon their being excellent4 ,we give them1 with her comments1 just as she wrote them4 ,delicious ,peanut-,candy4 ,shell your peanuts and chop them fine2 measure them in a cup1 and take just the same quantity of granulated sugar as you have peanuts4 ,put the sugar in a skillet1 or spider1 on the fire1 and keep moving the skillet around until the sugar is dissolved2 then put in the peanuts and pour into buttered tins4 ,this is delicious1 and so quickly made4 ,butter-,scotch4 #b cups of brown sugar4 cup of butter4 #d tablespoonfuls of molasses4 #b tablespoonfuls of water4 #b tablespoonfuls of vinegar4 ,boil until it hardens when dropped into cold water1 then pour into buttered tins4 ,molasses-,candy4 #b cups of brown sugar4 cup of ,new ,orleans molasses4 cup of vinegar and water mixed4 ,a piece of butter half the size of an egg4 ,when the candy hardens in cold water1 pour into shallow buttered tins1 and as soon as it is cool enough to handle1 pull it until it is of a straw-color4 ,splendid6 ,here are two recipes which another friend has kindly sent us3 ,chocolate-,creams4 ,to the white of #a egg add an equal quantity of cold water4 ,stir in #a pound of confectioner's sugar4 ,flavor with vanilla4 ,stir until fine and smooth2 then mould into balls and drop into melted chocolate4 ,to melt the chocolate1 scrape and put it in a tin-cup or small sauce-pan over a kettle where it will steam4 ,let the chocolate be melting while the cream is being prepared4 ,walnut-,creams4 ,make the cream as for chocolate-drops and mould into larger balls4 ,place the half of an ,english walnut on either side and press them into the cream4 ,the cream prepared in this way1 we have found1 can be used for various kinds of candy4 ,small pieces of fruit of any kind and nuts can be enclosed in the cream1 making a great variety4 ,chocolate may be mixed with it2 and if strong1 clear coffee is used in place of the water1 the candy will have the coffee flavor and color which some people like4 ,walnut and ,fruit ,glac4 ,put #a cup of sugar and cup of water in a sauce-pan and stir until the sugar is all dissolved2 then place it over the fire and let it boil until it hardens and is quite crisp when dropped in cold water4 ,do not stir it after it is put on the fire4 ,when cooked sufficiently1 dip out a spoonful at a time and drop in buttered tins1 leaving a space of an inch or so between each spoonful4 ,place on each piece of candy the half of a walnut1 or the fruit which has previously been prepared1 and pour over them enough candy to cover them1 always keeping each piece separate4 ,any kind of fruit can be made into glac4 ,when using oranges1 quarter them and remove the seeds4 ,strawberries1 in their season1 and peaches also make delicious glac4 ,the remainder of our recipes have been taken from family recipe-books1 and although we have not tested them ourselves1 we think it may be safely said that they are good ones4 ,marsh-mallow ,paste4 ,dissolve #a pound of clean white gum-arabic in one quart of water2 strain1 add #a pound of refined sugar1 and place over the fire4 ,stir continually until the syrup is dissolved and the mixture has become of the consistency of honey4 ,next add gradually the beaten whites of #h eggs2 stir the mixture all the time until it loses its thickness and does not adhere to the finger4 ,flavor with vanilla or rose4 ,pour into a tin slightly dusted with powdered starch1 and when cool divide into squares with a sharp knife4 ,toasted ,marsh-mallows4 ,tie a string on the end of a cane or stick1 fasten a bent pin on the end of the string1 and stick the pin into a marsh-mallow-drop4 ,hold the marsh-mallow suspended over an open fire and let it gradually toast4 ,when it begins to melt and run down it is done4 ,for a small party toasting marsh-mallows will be found quite a merry pastime1 and a great many persons consider the candy much better for being thus cooked the second time4 ,molasses ,peanut-,candy4 #b cups of molasses4 #a cup of brown sugar4 #a tablespoonful of butter4 #a tablespoonful of vinegar4 ,while the candy is boiling remove the shells and brown skins from the peanuts1 lay the nuts in buttered pans1 and when the candy is done pour it over them4 ,while it is still warm cut in blocks4 ,chocolate-,caramels4 #b cups of sugar4 #a cup of molasses4 #a cup of milk4 #a tablespoonful of butter4 #a tablespoonful of flour4 pound of ,baker's chocolate4 ,grease your pot1 put in sugar1 molasses1 and milk2 boil fifteen minutes1 and add butter and flour stirred to a cream4 ,let it boil five minutes1 then add the chocolate1 grated1 and boil until quite thick4 ,grease shallow pans and pour in the candy half an inch thick1 marking it in squares before it becomes hard4 ,pop-,corn ,balls4 #f quarts of popped corn4 #a pint of molasses4 ,boil the molasses about fifteen minutes2 then put the corn into a large pan1 pour the molasses over it1 and stir briskly until thoroughly mixed4 ,then1 with clean hands1 make into balls of the desired size4 ,illustration ,illustration3 ,saint ,valentine4 ,,chapter ,,xlii4 ,saint ,valentine's ,day4 ,did it never occur to any of you to wonder who ,saint ,valentine was1 and why we should commemorate his day by sending cards or letters containing all sorts of nonsense1 like true-lovers' knots1 hearts pierced with arrows1 etc48 ,it is easy enough to tell you about the saint1 but what he had to do with the popular observances of the day dedicated to him is a matter for conjecture4 ,saint ,valentine1 they say1 was a grave and earnest bishop1 who was put to death in ,rome on the fourteenth day of ,february1 about the year #bgj ,a4,d41 for his too zealous efforts in converting the heathen4 ,when he was canonized1 the day of the month on which he died was dedicated to him4 ,the customs of ,saint ,valentine's ,day are1 no doubt1 derived from those practised at some of the ,pagan festivals1 for they are of very ancient origin4 ,in olden times1 in ,england1 it was kept as a great gala day1 and all the houses were decked with evergreen in honor of it4 ,ben ,jonson says3 8,get some fresh hay1 then1 to lay under foot1 ,some holly and ivy to make fine the posts2 ,is't not ,saint ,valentine's ,day80 ,the principal feature of the ceremonies was always the choice of a valentine for the ensuing year4 ,the cavalier was expected to wait upon his lady1 execute all of her commands1 and act as her escort at all social gatherings4 ,the choice of a valentine was generally left to chance1 one of the methods being that the first unmarried member of the opposite sex a person saw on ,saint ,valentine's morning should be his or her valentine4 ,of course you have all had some experience in sending and receiving valentines1 and perhaps consider that the only way of celebrating the day2 but don't you think it would be a good idea to invite some friends to your house and have a ,valentine-,party8 ,we will give several suggestions upon what to do at a valentine-party1 that you may have some idea how the affair should be conducted4 ,in the first place1 let each guest1 upon his or her arrival1 deposit a valentine in a large bag placed in the hall for that purpose4 ,the valentines must be addressed to no particular person1 but the girls should write on theirs1 8,to my cavalier10 and the boys address the ones they send1 8,to my lady40 ,on one corner of each valentine 7not the envelope7 the sender's name must be written4 ,when all the guests have assembled1 someone disguised as ,saint ,valentine1 in a skull-cap1 long white beard1 made of cotton or wool1 and long cloak1 should enter the parlor1 carrying on his back the sack of valentines4 ,he must stand in the centre of the room and auction off each valentine as he takes it from his pack4 ,all sorts of bids can be made1 such as the promise of a dance1 a necktie1 her share of ice-cream at supper1 by a girl4 ,a compliment1 the first favor asked of him1 a paper of bonbons1 by a boy4 ,to make fun the bids should be as ridiculous as possible4 ,saint ,valentine is to be at liberty to accept whatever bid he chooses4 ,the payment of the debt must be rigidly exacted by the sender of a valentine1 whose identity is revealed when the valentine is opened4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cgi4--;,cupid's ,bow and ,arrow4 ,if unable to comply immediately with the demand1 the debtor must give the creditor a card or slip of paper on which is written 8,i ,o ,u a favor10 or whatever it may be that is owed4 ,this ,i ,o ,u entitles the creditor to claim payment of the debt at any time during the year4 ,another feature of the party should be ,cupid's bow and arrow1 which must be suspended from the chandelier or placed in some prominent position4 ,the device is to be used for delivering such valentines as may be addressed to particular persons4 ,the valentine must be stuck onto the point of the arrow1 and no one may remove it save the person to whom it is addressed4 ,at any time during the evening the arrow may be found to bear a missive1 and we would advise the hostess to provide a valentine1 to be delivered in this way1 for each of her guests1 that none may feel neglected4 ,the rest of the party can1 to be sure1 send as many valentines as they like4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chj4--,notch in ,end of ,feather4 ,make ,cupid's bow and arrow of heavy pasteboard1 like ,fig4 #cgi4 ,let the bow measure about sixteen inches from tip to tip4 ,make the arrow twelve inches long1 with a point or head three inches1 and the feathers two inches1 in length on the outside edge4 ,cut a notch in the feathered end1 as shown in ,fig4 #chj4 ,strengthen the arrow by gluing a thin stick of wood along it to within one inch of the point4 ,gild both the bow and arrow1 tie a silk cord to the tips of the bow1 leaving it slack1 and force the head of a worsted-needle into the point of the arrow 7,fig4 #cha74 ,adjust the arrow by fitting the cord in the notch and pulling it back until the cord is taut2 then fasten it to the bow by taking a few stitches with yellow silk through the bow and over the arrow4 ,fig4 #chb shows how it should appear when in place4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #cha4--,manner of fastening ,needle in ,arrow-head4 ,to determine how the guests shall be paired off for supper1 place the names of all the girls1 written on slips of paper1 in a bag2 then let each boy in turn take out a slip1 and the girl whose name it bears he shall escort to the supper-room and serve like a true cavalier4 ,at a valentine-party the valentines should1 if possible1 all be original1 or at least contain appropriate quotations4 ,the more absurd the rhyme1 the more fun it will create1 and when one is unable to make a rhyme a bit of prose can be made to serve4 ,as funny as you please let the valentines be1 but remember to omit anything that is in the least rude1 or calculated to hurt another's feelings4 ,illustration3 ,fig4 #chb4--;,cupid's ,bow with ,arrow in ,position4 ,with ,saint ,valentine's ,day ends our vacation-calendar and with it we also bring this book to a close1 for a whole year of holidays1 sports1 and entertainments are now contained within its covers4 ,if we may hope that our work has not been without profit1 as well as entertainment1 if we have been successful in opening any new avenues of enterprise and enjoyment for you1 we are satisfied4 ,if we have done more1 and with any of our suggestions have prompted the thought of adding to the comfort and happiness of others1 we have achieved a success1 and the mission of the ,,american ,,girl',s ,,handy ,,book is accomplished4 ,illustration ,,index4 ,a ,album1 an1 #djj ,all-,hallow-,eve2 see ,halloween ,appliqu designs1 #cia ,april1 first of1 #c2 ,april-fool's ,day party1 #e2 games1 #f et seq4 ,b ,back-stitching1 #chc ,ball1 soft1 #cbg ,balls1 lawn-tennis1 #fi ,basket1 ,may1 #gd2 birch-bark1 ib42 cardboard1 ib42 crab-net1 #ig ,basting1 #chb ,bedstead1 #ddd ,beech-nuts1 #bbj ,biographical nonsense1 #cci ,bladder telephone1 #bbg ,blind1 taught modelling1 #beg ,blind-man's singing-school1 #aee ,blind-man's stocking1 #cba ,bombs1 #aae ,bonbon box1 #di ,bookcase1 #dci ,book-covers1 home-made1 #dja ,book-mark1 #cbd ,book-shelves1 marine1 #id ,booths at a fair1 #dac2 tables for1 ib42 flowers for1 #dag2 arrangement of1 #dbj ,botany as applied to art1 #aci2 conventionalizing plant forms1 ib42 the peony-leaf1 #adj2 a bunch of turnips1 #adb2 decorative lines1 #adc2 cross-section plant designs1 #add2 flower-sprays1 #adf2 changing color and form1 #adg2 burs1 ib42 water-lily conventionalized1 #adh2 fern-leaf1 #he ,bouquets1 to preserve fresh1 #be ,brackets1 #bad ,bradford1 ,governor ,william1 #cjb ,bran pie1 #cba ,brushes for oil-colors1 #bej2 for china painting1 #bgj ,bubble-blowing1 #cce ,buckeye ,portire1 #bjd 8,bunching eggs10 #cg ,burgoos1 #acb ,butter-,scotch1 #dei ,butter-nuts1 #bbj ,button1 how to sew on a1 #chf ,button-holes1 #chc ,bureau transformed into a bookcase1 #dda ,c ,candlestick1 marine1 #ajc ,candy1 home-made1 #deh ,canvas for painting1 #bea ,cards1 ,easter1 #ej ,cards1 living ,christmas1 #cdb ,chair1 #dda2 how to reseat1 #ddb ,chestnuts1 #bah ,china-painting1 #bgb2 materials1 #bgc2 ,china1 #bgh2 monochrome painting1 ib42 tinting1 #bgc2 new method of decorating china1 #bgi2 tracing1 #bhj2 mottled ground1 #bha2 snow landscape1 ib42 head-painting1 #bhd2 sea-weed1 fish1 etc41 #bhg2 mixing colors1 #bhi2 painting royal ,worcester ware1 #bij ,chocolate-caramels1 #dfa ,chocolate-creams1 #dei ,christmas festivities1 #cag2 customs1 #cah ,clay1 for modelling1 #bei2 how to manage1 #bfa2 how to preserve1 #bfb ,clover1 four-leaved1 #bc ,color painting1 #bda1 #bdd1 #bdf ,conventionalized plant forms1 #ada ,court1 for lawn-tennis1 #fb ,cross-section plant designs1 #add ,crystallizing flowers1 #ba ,curtain fixtures1 marine1 #ib ,d ,dancers1 fairy1 #ccj ,darning and mending1 #chd ,declaration of ,independence1 #aag ,decoration1 sea-side cottage1 #ib ,decorations1 natural1 #bja2 of autumn wild flowers1 #bjb2 buckeye portire1 #bjd2 of horse-chestnuts1 ib42 of corn1 #bji2 ornamental gourds1 #baj ,decorative language1 #cfe2 how to make a design in1 #cga ,dolls1 corn-husk1 #afi2 with crab-apple heads1 #agc2 flower1 #age ,drapery of small scraps1 #dca ,draw1 how to1 #bbi ,drawing plant forms1 #ada ,drawn work1 #chi ,dressing-table1 #ddd ,e ,easel1 #bej ,easter1 #cc2 how celebrated in ,england1 ib42 in ,russia1 ib42 in ,ireland1 #cd2 in ,germany1 #ce2 in ,washington1 ,d4 ,c1 ib4 ,easter cards1 #ej ,easter eggs1 #cc2 games with1 #cf2 dolls made of1 #ci2 toys formed of1 #db2 maple wax eggs1 #di2 bonbon box1 ib4 ,enchanted girl1 pantomime of1 #cdh ,exercising1 best time for1 #cec2 balancing weights on the head1 #cef2 broom-handle exercise1 #ceg ,f ,fairy dancers1 #ccj ,fan1 how to make a1 #agg2 butterfly fan1 #agh2 ,mikado fan1 #ahj2 daisy fan1 #ahb2 card-board fan1 #ahc ,felling1 #chc ,ferns for decoration1 #ai ,fid1 #eg1 #afa ,five minutes' conversation1 #aed ,fish-painting on china1 #bhf ,floral vocabulary1 #cgg ,flowers1 wild1 #ad2 transplanting1 ib42 how to keep cut1 #ae2 sending by mail1 #af2 preserving1 in sand1 #af2 pressed1 #ah2 herbariums of1 #ai2 for decoration1 ib42 color of1 changed1 ib42 waxed1 #bj2 to freshen cut1 ib42 crystallized1 #ba2 frosted1 ib42 perfume of1 preserved1 ib42 spring flowers in winter1 #bc2 preserving1 in alcohol1 #bd2 in an empty bottle1 ib42 under glass1 ib42 to keep bouquets fresh1 #be2 to keep flowers or fruit fresh for a year1 ib42 painting1 in water-colors1 #bci ,fortune-telling1 by melted lead1 #aij2 by nutshell boats1 #aib2 by 8three luggies10 #aic2 by roasting nuts1 ib42 ,kaling1 #aid2 by the magic mirror1 ib42 by three tin cups1 by the ring cake1 #aie ,fortune's wheel1 #hh1 #dbf 8,fore-shortening10 #bca ,fourth of ,july1 celebration1 interior decoration for1 #ajg2 indoor illumination1 #ajh2 out-door decoration and illumination1 #aji2 fireworks for girls1 #aaa2 parachute1 #aab2 thunderbolts1 ib42 whirls1 #aac2 winged fancies1 ib42 pin-wheels1 #aad2 bombs1 #aae2 lawn party1 #aag2 declaration of independence1 ib42 game of toss1 #aah2 jackstraws1 #aai2 progressive mining1 ib4 ,frames for pictures1 #bie2 designs for1 #bif2 decorated1 #big2 cork frame1 #bii ,furniture1 old and new1 #dch ,g ,game of headless turkey1 #cab ,game and fish stew1 #acc ,games1 quiet1 for hot weather1 #aea2 door-step party1 #aeb2 five minutes' conversation1 #aec2 blind-man's singing-school1 #aee2 game of noted men1 ib42 what will you take to the picnic8 #aef2 assumed characters1 #aeg2 shadow verbs1 ib42 ,halloween games1 #aif et seq4 ,games for ,christmas holidays1 bubble-bowling1 #cce2 biographical nonsense1 #cci2 comic historical tableaux1 #cda2 living ,christmas cards1 #cdb ,gathering1 #chb ,glass1 stained1 imitated1 #dce ,glove pen-wiper1 #cbc ,glove1 to mend a kid1 #chf ,gold1 mat1 #bgf2 pure1 ib4 ,gourds1 ornamental1 #baj ,grab-bags1 #dbc ,ground glass1 imitation of1 #dcf ,gymnasium1 home1 #cec ,h ,hall seat1 #ddg ,halloween1 #ahg2 origin of1 ib42 party1 #ahi2 fortune-telling on1 #aij et seq42 games1 #aif et seq4 ,hammock1 how to make a1 #aei2 materials required1 #afa2 barrel hammock1 #afe ,hat-rack1 sea-side1 #ih ,hazel-nuts1 #bbj ,headless turkey1 game of1 #cab ,hemming1 #cha ,heraldry1 #cff2 field of1 #bff2 the points1 ib42 divisions1 #bfg ,herbariums1 #ai ,herring-bone stitch1 #chd ,hickory-nuts1 #bai ,historical tableaux1 #cda ,home gymnasium1 #cec ,home-made candy1 #deh ,horseshoe crab-bag1 #aja 8,huli ,fool10 #d ,i ,impression album1 how to make an1 #abc2 tools required1 #abe2 printing from leaves1 #abf2 from flowers1 #abg2 landscapes1 #abh2 other uses for botanical impressions1 #abi ,j ,jackstraws1 ,fourth of ,july1 #aai ,julklapp1 #cai ,k ,kaling1 #aid ,key-rack1 #dab ,l ,lace1 #cic ,lady of the ,lake1 #dbe ,landscape painting in water-colors1 #bda ,language1 a decorative1 #cfd ,lantern1 #djh ,lawn1 painting on1 #dcd ,lawn party1 #aag ,lawn-tennis1 #ee2 lawn-tennis suits1 #ef2 how to make a lawn-tennis net1 #eg2 materials for1 ib42 court1 #fb2 rules for the game1 #fc ,leap-year party1 #cea ,leaves and ferns for decoration1 #ai ,light1 #beb ,m ,mailing parcels1 directions for1 #af ,mantle-cloth1 #ded ,mantle-piece1 #dea ,maple-wax ,easter eggs1 #di ,marsh-mallow paste1 #dfj2 toasted1 #dfa ,mat colors1 #bgg ,may ,day1 #ga2 sports1 #gb2 ,may baskets1 #gd2 ,may-pole1 #gg2 ,may-pole dance1 #gi ,midsummer ,eve1 #hc2 the games of1 #he et seq4 ,mirror tableau1 #f ,mirror1 the1 #djd ,model1 arrangement of1 in water-color painting1 #bdj ,modelling in clay and wax1 #beg2 value of1 #bei2 much can be learned without a teacher1 ib42 materials1 ib42 clay1 #bfj2 general directions1 #bfa ,modelling wax1 #bfc ,modelling stand1 #bfj ,molasses candy1 #dei ,monochrome painting1 #bgh ,music-roll1 a1 #daj ,n ,nancy1 ,miss1 #cbf ,nature's types1 #abe ,needle1 hammock1 #eh2 #afa ,needle-work1 #chj ,net1 lawn-tennis1 #eg ,new ,year's ,day1 #cdg2 ,new ,year's parties1 #cdh ,noah's ark peep-show1 #h ,nutting parties1 #bah2 rules for1 #bba ,o ,overhanding1 #chj ,oil-cups1 #bea ,oils for china-painting1 #bge ,overcasting1 #chj ,p ,paint-box1 #bea ,painting in water-colors1 #bch2 materials for1 ib42 flower-painting1 #bci2 model1 #bdj2 landscapes1 #bda2 general directions1 #bdb2 painting from notes1 #bdd ,painting in oil-colors1 #bdi2 materials1 ib42 the light1 #beb2 setting the palette1 #bec ,painting on lawn1 #dcd ,painting window-panes1 #dcb ,paints1 for china-painting1 #bgd ,palette1 #bej2 setting the1 #bec ,palette-knife1 #bej2 of horn1 #bgc ,panel decorations1 #bje1 #bji1 #bgj ,panel of field-corn1 #bji ,pantomime of an enchanted girl1 #cdh ,paper-weight1 #dab ,parachute1 #aab ,party1 ,first of ,april1 #e2 ,fourth of ,july1 #aag2 door-step1 #aea2 ,halloween1 #ahi2 nutting1 #bah ,paste1 how to make1 #djb ,patch1 how to1 #chf ,peanut-candy1 #deh ,peanuts1 #bbc ,perfumes1 to prepare from flowers1 #ba ,picnics1 burgoos and corn-roasts1 #aca2 how to make a burgoo stew1 #acc2 a corn-roast1 #acd ,picture-frames1 #bie ,pilgrims1 landing of1 tableau1 #cje et seq4 ,pin-wheels1 #aad ,plain sewing1 #chj2 overhanding1 ib42 overcasting1 #cha2 hemming1 ib42 running1 #chb2 basting1 ib42 gathering1 ib42 stitching1 #chc2 back-stitching1 ib42 felling1 ib42 button-holes1 ib42 herringbone1 or cat's-tooth stitch1 #chd ,plantain test1 #hf ,plaster casts1 #bfh2 to harden1 #bgj2 to color1 ib4 8,poisson d',avril10 #d ,pop-corn balls1 #dfb ,portires1 designs for1 #cia2 buckeye1 #bjd ,postal regulations for packages1 #af ,progressive mining1 #aai ,r ,rag-balls1 #dbg ,ribbon embroideries1 #cic ,ribbon curtain1 #dcj ,rooster1 a lively1 #cbg ,rose-water1 recipe for1 #bf ,rubbish1 what to do with1 #djc ,running1 #chb ,s ,sachet1 #cbc ,saint ,valentine's ,day1 #dfd ,scrap-bag1 #cbd ,scrap drapery1 #dca ,scrap-book1 #cie ,screen1 marine1 #ii2 ,louis ,quinze1 #bjf ,settee1 #ddb ,shells1 how to polish1 #ajd ,shelves around chimney1 #def ,siccatif ,courtray1 #bec 8,silly mackerel10 #d ,spring flowers in winter1 #bc 8,squirrel1 little brown10 #bah1 #bba1 #bbb ,stained glass1 imitation of1 #dce ,starfish1 candlestick made of1 #ajb2 ornaments of1 #ajc2 how to dry1 #ajd ,stitches1 fancy1 #chg ,stitching1 #chc ,t ,t-square1 #bcd ,table1 a bric--brac1 #djf2 at a fair1 #dac ,tableau1 mirror1 #f ,tableaux1 burlesque1 #cjd2 historical1 #cda ,tar paste1 #bge ,telephone1 how to make a1 #bbd ,tent1 illuminated1 #aaa ,thanksgiving1 celebration of1 #cjb ,thunderbolts1 #aab ,tiles1 painted on marble mantle1 #dec ,tin telephone1 #bbe ,tints in water-color painting1 #bdb ,toss1 #aah ,tracing1 #bhj ,transformation scrap-book1 #cih ,u ,urchin1 sea1 vase made of1 #ajb ,v ,valentine party1 #dfe ,vase1 marine1 #ajb ,w ,walking ,club1 the1 #bg2 membership of1 #cj2 length of walks1 ib42 rules to be observed1 #ca ,walnuts1 #bbj ,walnut creams1 #dei2 glac1 #dfj ,walnut-shell turtle1 #cbe ,washstand1 #ddf ,water-colors1 #bch ,wax-modelling1 home-made1 #bfc ,wedding decorations1 wild flowers for1 #bjb ,whirls1 #aac ,wild flowers1 #ac ,window decorations1 #ib ,window-panes1 decoration of1 #dcb ,window-seat1 #ddh ,winged fancies1 #aac ,work-basket1 crab-net1 #ig ,work-basket1 #daa ,worcester1 royal1 ware1 #bij ,,charles ,,scribner',s ,,sons ,,books ,,for ,,young ,,readers ,a ,,new ,,book ,,by ,,kirk ,,munroe ,,the ,,white ,,conquerors ,,of ,,mexico ,by ,,kirk ,,munroe4 ,with #h full-page illustrations by ,w4 ,s4 ,,stacey4 #abmo1 #a4be4 ,a powerful and fascinating historical story1 the scene of which is laid in ,mexico when ,cortez made his famous conquests4 ,the story possesses a peculiar interest in that it is related from the stand-point of the native races1 the hero1 ,huetzin1 being not one of the 8,white ,conquerors10 but a native1 the son of ,tlahuicol1 a ,toltec1 and a war chief of the ,tlascalan race4 ,in warring against ,montezuma1 ,king of the ,aztecs1 ,tlahuicol is captured1 and after a long imprisonment1 is cruelly put to death4 ,his son is also ordered to be killed1 but effects a miraculous escape1 and makes his way to the army of ,cortez1 which is advancing against ,montezuma4 ,animated by a ,toltec's hatred for the ,aztecs1 who have murdered his father1 he effects an alliance between ,cortez and his own race1 and the united forces march against the ,aztec ,king4 ,in the various engagements he distinguishes himself by his valor1 several times narrowly escaping death1 and is prominent in the final overthrow of the ,aztecs1 and in the triumph that follows4 ,the book is full of the life and color of a most interesting and romantic period1 and the narrative fairly glows with thrilling battle scenes and incidents of exciting adventure4 ,,robert ,,grant',s ,,two ,,books ,,for ,,boys ,,jack ,,hall2 ,,or1 ,,the ,,school ,,days ,,of ,,an ,,american ,,boy4 ,,by ,,robert ,,grant4 ,illustrated by ,,frances ,g4 ,,attwood4 #abmo41 #a4be4 8,a better book for boys has never been written4 ,it is pure1 clean1 and healthy1 and has throughout a vigorous action that holds the reader breathlessly40--,boston ,herald4 8,a capital story for boys1 wholesome and interesting4 ,it reminds one of ,tom ,brown40--,boston ,transcript4 ,,jack ,,in ,,the ,,bush2 ,,or1 ,a ,,summer ,,on ,a ,,salmon ,,river4 ,,by ,,robert ,,grant4 ,illustrated by ,f4 ,t4 ,,merrill4 #abmo41 #a4be4 8,a clever book for boys4 ,it is the story of the camp life of a lot of boys1 and is destined to please every boy reader4 ,it is attractively illustrated 40--,detroit ,free ,press4 8,an ideal story of out-door life and genuine experiences40--,boston ,traveller4 ,,new ,,books ,,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty ,for the season of #ahic-id ,mr4 ,henty adds to his list of fascinating stories of adventure three new books--,,through ,,the ,,sikh ,,war1 ,a ,,tale ,,of ,,the ,,conquest ,,of ,,the ,,punjaub2 ,a ,,jacobite ,,exile1 ,,being ,,the ,,adventures ,,of ,a ,,young ,,englishman ,,in ,,the ,,service ,,of ,,charles ,,xii ,,of ,,sweden2 and ,,st4 ,,bartholomew',s ,,eve1 ,a ,,tale ,,of ,,the ,,huguenot ,,wars4 8,no country nor epoch of history is there which ,mr4 ,henty does not cover1 and what is really remarkable is that he always writes well and interestingly4 ,boys like stirring adventures and ,mr4 ,henty is a master of this method of composition40--,,new ,,york ,,times4 ,,through ,,the ,,sikh ,,war4 ,a ,,tale ,,of ,,the ,,conquest ,,of ,,the ,,punjaub4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #ab full-page illustrations by ,,hal ,,hurst1 and a map4 ,crown #hvo1 handsomely bound1 olivine edges1 #a4ej4 ,percy ,groves1 a plucky1 high spirited boy1 the son of an ,english officer1 loses his parents at an early age1 and joins his uncle residing on his estate in ,india1 situated in the very center of the troubles that developed later into the ,sikh war4 ,the hero and his uncle become involved in the dangers and intrigues that surround them1 and take active part in the war1 passing through many thrilling experiences and adventures during the two notable campaigns that resulted in the conquest of the ,punjaub4 ,it is one of ,mr4 ,henty's most interesting and powerful stories4 ,,st4 ,,bartholomew',s ,,eve4 ,a ,,tale ,,of ,,the ,,huguenot ,,wars4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #ab full-page illustrations by ,h4 ,j4 ,,draper1 and a map4 ,crown #hvo1 handsomely bound1 olivine edges1 #a4ej4 ,a story of a lad of ,english birth but ,huguenot parentage1 who visits relatives in ,france at the time when the feeling between the ,catholics and ,huguenots was bitterest1 and the country was disturbed by religious strife and dissension4 ,his relatives being leaders in the ,huguenot party1 the hero devotes himself heart and soul to the ,protestant cause1 following it faithfully through the varied and exciting scenes that preceded and led up to the terrible massacre of ,st4 ,bartholomew's day4 ,no boy could resist the fascination of this strong1 vivid narrative4 ,it is intense and absorbing1 while presenting a true picture of the times1 full of life and color4 ,a ,,jacobite ,,exile4 ,being the ,adventures of a young ,englishman in the service of ,charles ,,xii of ,sweden4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #h full-page illustrations by ,,paul ,,hardy1 and a map4 ,crown #hvo1 handsomely bound1 olivine edges1 #a4ej4 ,the events of the present story take place during the reign of ,william of ,orange4 ,the father of the hero is a ,jacobite gentleman who1 to avoid arrest1 is compelled to flee to ,sweden4 ,here the hero1 ,charlie ,carstairs1 and a young companion1 engage in the service of ,charles ,,xii1 taking part in the wars between ,sweden and ,poland4 ,the hero1 acting as a scout1 falls into the hands of ,polish bandits4 ,after numerous exciting adventures and hair-breadth escapes1 he finally secures his release and returns to ,sweden4 ,then he serves for a time under ,marlborough in ,france1 and distinguishes himself signally4 ,a final return to ,england1 where his father is pardoned1 supplies a satisfactory close to a story remarkable for its thrilling adventures1 its varied scenery1 and its interesting historical pictures4 ,,beric ,,the ,,briton3 ,a ,,story ,,of ,,the ,,roman ,,invasion4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #ab full-page illustrations by ,w4 ,,parkinson4 ,crown #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,it is a powerful and fascinating romance founded on the ,roman invasion of ,england1 and abounds with the prowess of valiant warriors and the triumphs of magnanimous victors1 with war and war-like scenes1 and with women like ,boadicea1 as heroic as their brothers40--,boston ,post4 ,,in ,,greek ,,waters3 ,a ,,story ,,of ,,the ,,grecian ,,war ,,of ,,independence 7#ahba-ahbg74 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #ab full page illustrations by ,w4 ,s4 ,,stacey1 and a map4 ,crown #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,it reproduces the spirit and describes many of the events of the ,greek ,war1 so that no boy can fail to remember considerable about it which is worth knowing4 ,moreover it is a stirring narrative1 wholesome and stimulating40--,congregationalist4 ,,condemned ,,as ,a ,,nihilist3 ,a ,,story ,,of ,,escape ,,from ,,siberia 4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #h full-page illustrations by ,,walter ,,paget4 ,crown1 #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,godfrey ,bullen1 the young hero1 suspected of ,nihilism1 is sent with convicts to ,siberia4 ,his final escape from prison life1 after many exciting adventures1 affords material for a narrative absorbing and thrilling4 ,the scenes of ,siberian prison life give the book a peculiar value40--,christian ,advocate4 ,,redskin ,,and ,,cowboy4 ,a ,,tale ,,of ,,the ,,western ,,plains4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #ab full-page illustrations by ,,alfred ,,pearse4 ,crown #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,this book is said to be founded on the experiences of a young ,english friend of the author1 and though it is full of hair-breadth escapes none of the incidents are improbable4 ,it is needless to say that the ,english lad's adventures are well told40--,san ,francisco ,chronicle4 ,,the ,,dash ,,for ,,khartoum4 ,a ,,tale ,,of ,,the ,,nile ,,expedition4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #aj full-page illustrations by ,,john ,,sch,,nberg and ,j4 ,,nash1 and #d plans4 ,crown #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,the author has provided a stirring book for young readers1 and the episodes of battle1 capture1 rescue1 deeds of daring1 and other exciting features in which boys delight1 are in great abundance40--,boston ,saturday ,evening ,gazette4 ,,held ,,fast ,,for ,,england4 ,a ,,tale ,,of ,,the ,,siege ,,of ,,gibraltar4 ,by ,g4 ,a4 ,,henty4 ,with #h full-page illustrations by ,,gordon ,,browne4 ,crown #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,it is an historical novel1 the siege of ,gibraltar by the combined forces of ,france and ,spain1 in the latter part of the eighteenth century1 being the foundation on which ,mr4 ,henty's clever fiction rests4 ,it is a story of pluck and adventure on sea and land40--,newark ,advertiser4 999999 ,the above are ,mr4 ,henty's latest books4 ,a full descriptive list containing all of ,mr4 ,henty's books--now #da in number--will be sent to any address on application4 ,they are all attractively illustrated and handsomely bound4 ,,recent ,,stories ,,by ,,frank ,r4 ,,stockton ,,the ,,clocks ,,of ,,rondaine ,,and ,,other ,,stories4 ,by ,,frank ,r4 ,,stockton4 ,with #bd illustrations by ,e4 ,h4 ,,blashfield1 ,w4 ,a4 ,,rogers1 ,d4 ,c4 ,,beard and others4 ,square #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,his books for boys and girls are classics4 ,in this one we have seven of the most delightful tales imaginable40--,newark ,daily ,advertiser4 8,short tales in ,mr4 ,stockton's usual clever1 distinctive style4 ,they are all extremely entertaining40--,the ,churchman4 8,marked by that attractive originality which is the author's peculiar possession1 and in which quaint and piquant humor and simple pathos are deftly and fascinatingly mingled4 ,it is charming reading4 ,it is beautifully printed and illustrated40--,boston ,saturday ,evening ,gazette4 ,,personally ,,conducted4 ,by ,,frank ,r4 ,,stockton4 ,with #df illustrations by ,,joseph ,,pennell1 ,,alfred ,,parsons and others4 ,one volume1 square #hvo1 #b4jj4 8,in ,frank ,stockton1 the boys and girls have a cicerone skilled in the art of conversation1 a traveler conversant with all the curious and characteristic things of the ,old ,world1 and a story teller renowned for the audacity of his stories40--,critic4 ,,stockton',s ,,other ,,books ,the ,story of ,viteau4 ,with #af full-page illustrations by ,r4 ,b4 ,,birch4 #abmo1 extra cloth1 #a4ej4 8,it is as romantic and absorbing as any boy could wish for1 full of adventure and daring1 and yet told in excellent spirit and with a true literary instinct40--,christian ,union4 ,a ,jolly ,fellowship4 ,with #bj illustrations4 #abmo1 #a4ej4 8,we can think of no book published the present season which will more delight the wide-awake1 adventure-loving boy4 ,it is1 to borrow the adjective from the title1 just #8jolly4'0--,boston ,transcript4 ,the ,floating ,prince and ,other ,fairy ,tales4 ,with illustrations4 ,square #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,these tales are full of the quaintest conceits and the oddest fancies1 and the strange adventures in which the different characters engage are just the kind to excite the intense interest of children40--,philadelphia ,bulletin4 ,the ,ting-,a-,ling ,tales4 ,with numerous illustrations4 #abmo1 #a4jj4 8,it would be difficult to find anything more dainty1 fanciful and humorous than these tales of magic1 fairies1 dwarfs and giants4 ,there is a vein of satire in them1 too which adult readers will enjoy40--,n4 ,y4 ,herald4 ,roundabout ,rambles in ,lands of ,fact and ,fiction4 ,with #bjj illustrations4 ,square #hvo1 #a4ej4 ,tales ,out of ,school4 ,with nearly #bjj illustrations4 ,square #hvo1 #a4ej4 8,the volumes are profusely illustrated and contain the most entertaining sketches in ,mr4 ,stockton's most entertaining manner40--,christian ,union4 ,,henry ,m4 ,,stanley',s ,,new ,,book ,,for ,,boys1 ,,now ,,in ,,press ,the volume consists of legends and folk-tales communicated to the explorer by his native followers during his long and perilous journeys through the great forests of the ,dark ,continent4 ,they are fascinating stories of strange scenes and incidents among the tribes of ,central ,africa1 and are narrated in the authors' well-known1 graphic1 picturesque style1 and attractively illustrated4 ,,my ,,kalulu ,,prince1 ,,king ,,and ,,slave4 ,a story of ,central ,africa4 ,by ,,henry ,m4 ,,stanley4 ,one volume1 #abmo41 new edition1 with many illustrations1 #a4ej4 8,a fresh1 breezy1 stirring story for youths1 interesting in itself and full of information regarding life in the interior of the continent in which its scenes are laid40--,the ,new ,york ,times4 ,,heroes ,,of ,,the ,,olden ,,time ,by ,,james ,,baldwin4 ,three volumes1 #abmo41 each beautifully illustrated4 ,singly1 #a4ej4 ,the set1 #d4jj4 ,a ,,story ,,of ,,the ,,golden ,,age4 ,illustrated by ,,howard ,,pyle4 8,it is redolent with the spirit of the ,odyssey1 that glorious primitive epic1 fresh with the dew of the morning of time4 ,it is an unalloyed pleasure to read his recital of the adventures of the wily ,odysseus4 ,howard ,pyle's illustrations render the spirit of the ,homeric age with admirable felicity40--,,prof4 ,h4 ,h4 ,,boyesen4 ,,the ,,story ,,of ,,roland4 ,illustrated by ,,reginald ,b4 ,,birch4 8,mr4 ,baldwin has culled from a wide range of epics1 ,french1 ,italian and ,german1 and has once more proved his aptitude as a story teller for the young1 while conveying information for which many of their elders will be thankful40--,the ,nation4 ,,the ,,story ,,of ,,siegfried4 ,illustrated by ,,howard ,,pyle4 8,the story of #8,siegfried' is charmingly told4 ,the author makes up the story from the various myths in a fascinating way which cannot fail to interest4 ,it is as enjoyable as any fairy tale4 ,the writer's style is simple and very attractive1 and the book is in every way an excellent one for young readers40--,hartford ,courant4 ,,two ,,juveniles ,,by ,,edward ,,eggleston ,,the ,,hoosier ,,school-,,boy4 #abmo4 ,with full-page illustrations1 #a4jj4 8#8,the ,hoosier ,school-,boy' depicts some of the characteristics of boy life years ago on the ,ohio4 ,the story presents a vivid and interesting picture of the difficulties which in those days beset the path of the youth aspiring for an education4 ,these obstacles1 which the hero of the story succeeds by his manliness and force of character in surmounting1 are just such as a majority of the most distinguished ,americans1 including ,lincoln and ,garfield1 have had to contend with1 and which they have made the stepping-stone to their future greatness40--,chicago ,inter-,ocean4 ,,queer ,,stories ,,for ,,boys ,,and ,,girls4 #abmo1 #a4jj4 8,a very bright and attractive little volume for young readers4 ,the stories are fresh1 breezy and healthy1 with a good point to them and a good sound ,american view of life and of the road to success4 ,the book abounds in good feeling and good sense and is written in a style of homely art40--,independent4 ,,two ,,books ,,for ,,boys ,,and ,,girls ,mr4 ,beard has added sixty new drawings to his 8,american ,boy's ,handy ,book10 to illustrate the new games1 sports1 and mechanical contrivances which he has incorporated in this latest edition4 ,the ,misses ,beard's companion volume1 8,the ,american ,girl's ,handy ,book10 is reduced in price1 all the features being retained4 ,both are profusely illustrated with hundreds of pictures and designs4 ,,the ,,american ,,boy',s ,,handy ,,book3 ,,or1 ,,what ,,to ,,do ,,and ,,how ,,to ,,do ,,it4 ,by ,,daniel ,c4 ,,beard4 ,with over #cfj illustrations by the ,author4 ,one volume1 square #hvo1 #b4jj4 8,the book has this great advantage over its predecessors1 that most of the games1 tricks1 and other amusements described in it are new4 ,it treats of sports adapted to all seasons of the year2 it is practical1 and it is well illustrated40--,n4 ,y4 ,tribune4 ,,the ,,american ,,girl',s ,,handy ,,book3 ,,or1 ,,how ,,to ,,amuse ,,yourself ,,and ,,others4 ,by ,,lena and ,,adelia ,b4 ,,beard4 ,with over #ejj illustrations by the ,authors4 ,one volume1 square #hvo1 #b4jj4 ,,grace ,,greenwood ,,wrote3--8,it is a treasure which1 once possessed1 no practical girl would willingly part with4 ,it is an invaluable aid in making a home attractive1 comfortable1 artistic and refined4 ,the book preaches the gospel of cheerfulness1 industry1 economy and comfort40 ,,jules ,,verne',s ,,greatest ,,work ,,the ,,exploration ,,of ,,the ,,world4 ,the three vols4 in a set1 #g4ej2 singly1 #b4ej4 8,m4 ,verne's scheme in this work is to tell fully how man has made acquaintance with the world in which he lives1 to combine into a single work in three volumes the wonderful stories of all the great explorers1 navigators and travellers who have sought out1 one after another1 the once uttermost parts of the earth40--,new ,york ,evening ,post4 ,famous ,travels and ,travellers4 ,with over #ajj full-page illustrations1 maps1 etc41 #hvo1 #b4ej4 ,the ,great ,navigators of the ,x,v,i,i,ith ,century4 ,with #if full-page illustrations and nineteen maps4 #hvo1 #b4ej4 ,the ,great ,explorers of the ,x,i,xth ,century4 ,with over #ajj full-page illustrations1 fac-similies1 etc4 #hvo1 #b4ej4 8,the ,prince of ,story ,tellers40--,london ,times4 ,,jules ,,verne',s ,,stories ,uniform ,illustrated ,edition4 #i vols41 #hvo1 extra cloth1 with over #gej full-page illustrations4 ,price1 per set1 in a box1 #ag4ej4 ,sold also in separate volumes4 ,michael ,strogoff2 or1 the ,courier of the ,czar4 #b4jj4 ,a ,floating ,city and the ,blockade ,runners4 #b4jj4 ,hector ,servadac4 #b4jj4 ,a ,journey to the ,centre of the ,earth4 #b4jj4 ,from the ,earth to the ,moon ,direct in ,ninety-seven ,hours1 ,twenty ,minutes2 and a ,journey ,around it4 #b4jj4 ,dick ,sands4 #b4jj4 ,the ,steam ,house4 #b4jj4 ,the ,giant ,raft4 #b4jj4 ,the ,mysterious ,island4 #b4ej4 99 99 99 99 99 ,transcriber's ,notes3 ,obvious punctuation errors repaired4 ,text spells the more usual macram as both ,macrem and macrim4 ,page #cj1 repeated word 8for0 deleted from text 7even for those who7 ,page #fi1 8drop0 changed to 8drops0 7by him drops outside7 ,page #aeg1 8proproses0 changed to 8proposes0 7proposes to take salmon7 ,page #cch1 word 8the0 added to text 7to the same party7 ,page #djf1 8,bric-a-brac0 changed to 8,bric--brac0 on illustration caption 7,bric--brac table7